Clamp Cylinder - Airline Hydraulics

CAT.E24B

Clamp Cylinder

Cla

mp

Cy

lind

er

Akihabara UDX 15F, 4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPANPhone: 03-5207-8249 Fax: 03-5298-5362URL http://www.smcworld.com© 2008 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.

1st printing LT printing MR 13500DN Printed in Japan.D-DN

This catalog is printed on recycled paper with concern for the global environment.

∗ Addition of series C(L)KQ.∗ Addition of series MK2T/MK2/MK. MR

Record of changes

B edition

Series CKZTSeries CLKZ1R

Power Clamp Cylinder

Series CKZ2NPower Clamp Cylinder

Series CK1Clamp Cylinder

Clamp Cylinder with LockSeries CLK2

Series C(L)KQG/Series C(L)KQP

Pin Clamp Cylinder

Rotary Clamp CylinderSeries MK2T

New

New

The cylinder is secured easily by clevis mounting.Two types of clevis widths are standardized.

Built-in speed controller With air cushion at retracted end Coil scraper (spatter proof) is a

standard feature. Magnetic field resistant auto

switches are mountable. The piping position can be

selected arbitrarily.

Series CK1 ø40, ø50, ø63

Clamp Cylinder

Clamp Cylinder with Lock

Series CLK2 ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

Remains clamped when air supply pressure drops or residual pressure is released.

For Asia

LOCK

B

A

LOCK

Retraction lock

Features 1

Series C(L)KQG/C(L)KQP ø50

Pin Clamp Cylinder

Rotary Clamp Cylinder

Series MK2T/MK2/MK ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25 ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

Simultaneous rotation and clamping

60

90

Body shape: D type

40

70

Body shape: U, K, M type

Clamping Height

Positioning and clamping can be done simultaneously! Determine the appropriate height for the

workpiece in progress, and cut down on interference with the body!

55 varieties of guide pins 4 types of body shapes Lock mechanism types

can also be selected

ø12, ø16 available for MK series only.

Double Guide TypeSeries MK2Tø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

Heavy Duty TypeSeries MK2ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40ø50, ø63

StandardSeries MKø12, ø16, ø20, ø25ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

Workpiece

Guide pin

Clamp arm

ClampClamp

For Asia

Fo

r A

sia

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

For

Nort

h A

merica

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

For

Euro

pe

CL

KZ

1R

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

CK

/M(D

)UK

A

Features 2

Series CKZ2N ø50, ø63, ø80

Conforming to the New NAAMS Standards (North American Automotive Metric Standards)

138 arm styles are available. Spatter proof, Water resistant

Manual toggle release point

Lub-retainer

Piston

Rounded cover design reducesweld spatter accumulation.

Elliptical designfor space saving

Power Clamp CylinderFor North America

CoverEquivalent to UL94standard VO:Flame resistant

Proximity cassette installationand removal easily accomplished

by unfastening a single bolt

Simple arm opening anglechanges.

Cylinder disassembly is not necessary.The arm opening angle can be changedby replacing the stopper bolt.

Hexagon socket head cover cap screw

Lub-retainer on pistonis standard.

Highly protective seal design is less effected by poor air quality.

• Power clamp cylinder with metal cover• Power clamp cylinder front mounting type• Unclamped opening angle 15° kit

(for change of angle)

Made to Order(Details → Refer to page 179 and 180.)

Features 3

Each size has 3 arm styles. Spatter proof, Water resistant

Series CKZT ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80


Series CLKZ1R ø40, ø50, ø57


Conforming to the CNOMO Standard Constant Clamping force regardless of workpiece thickness The workpiece can be held even when there is no

compressed air supply. Unclamp side end lock Unclamp side rubber bumper

For Europe

For France

Hexagon socket head cover cap screw

Proximity cassette installationand removal easily accomplished

by unfastening a single bolt

Simple arm opening anglechanges.

Cylinder disassembly is not necessary.The arm opening angle can be changedby replacing the stopper bolt.

Rounded cover design reducesweld spatter accumulation.

Manual toggle release point

CoverEquivalent to UL94standard VO:Flame resistant

Elliptical design for space saving

Lub-retainer

Piston

Lub-retainer on piston is standard.Highly protective seal design is less effected by poor air quality.

Made to Order(Details → Refer to page 204 to 206.)

• Power clamp cylinder with metal cover• Power clamp cylinder with angle adjustment• Power clamp cylinder with manually operated handle• Power clamp cylinder with pneumatic sensor• Unclamped opening angle 15° kit

(for change of angle)

Fo

r A

sia

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

For

Nort

h A

merica

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

For

Euro

pe

CL

KZ

1R

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

CK

/M(D

)UK

A

Features 4

Other Clamp CylinderSpecial

Pin Clamp Cylinder(Compact body type)

Series CKU

Pin Shift Cylinder

Series CKQR

Plate Clamp Cylinder

Series M(D)UKAClamp Cylinder

Series CKGV

Pin Shift Cylinder

Series CKZP

Features 5

I N D E X

Clamp Cylinder

Clamp Cylinder with Lock

Pin Clamp Cylinder

Rotary Clamp Cylinder

Related Equipment (For Piping Equipment)

P.227KR-W2KRMKQBH/DL/L/LL

P.240AS-W2AS

ASVAS

ASAS

FittingsFR One-touch FittingsFR One-touch Fittings ManifoldBrass One-touch FittingsSelf Align Fittings

Speed ControllerSpeed Controller with One-touch FittingsSpeed Controller: Standard TypeIn-line TypeSpeed Exhaust ControllerSpeed Controller with One-touch Fitting, Elbow Type (Metal Body) Speed Controller Adjustable by Flat Head ScrewdriverTamper Proof Speed Controller

TubingFR Soft Nylon TubingFR Double Layer TubingFR Double Layer Polyurethane TubingDouble Layer Tube StripperMulti-tube Holder

CK1

CLK2

MK2T/MK2/MK

CKZ2N

CKZT

CLKZ1R

P.1

P.25

P.53

P.109

P.155

P.183

P.209

P.219

For Asia

For Asia

For Asia

For Asia

Power Clamp CylinderConforming to the New NAAMS Standard

For North America

Power Clamp CylinderConforming to the CNOMO Standard

Other Clamp Cylinder

For Europe

For France

P.225

CKU, CKQR, M(D)UKACKGV, CKZP

Special


P.248TRSTRBTRBUTKSTM

C(L)KQG/C(L)KQP

Fo

r A

sia

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

For

Nort

h A

merica

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

For

Euro

pe

CL

KZ

1R

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

CK

/M(D

)UK

A

Front matter 1


Clevis width 16.5 mm/19.5 mm

Built-in speed controller

With air cushion

Magnetic field resistant auto switches are mountable.

SeriesBore size

(mm)Stroke(mm)

Clevis width(mm)

CK1 series

CKG1 series

CKP1 series

Options

A: 16.5 mmB: 19.5 mm

50

75

100

125

150

40

50

63

Rod endbracket

Singleknucklejoint

Doubleknuckle joint

Limit switch mounting base

Dog fitting

Foot

Pedestal

Basic type

Built-in standard magnet type(applicable to magnetic fieldresistant auto switches)

Built-in strong magnet type(applicable to magnetic fieldresistant auto switches)

Variations

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

1

The auto switch mounting and the piping position are available in three-way directions.The auto switch mounting position can be altered. Also, piping is possible in three-way directions regardless of the auto switch mounting position.

Series CKG1Series CKG1[Built-in

standard magnet]

Series CKP1Series CKP1[Built-in

strong magnet]

Magnetic field resistant auto switches are mountable. [CKG1 series / Built-in standard magnet] … D-P4DWSC, D-P4DWSE, D-P4DWL/Z (AC magnetic field)

[CKP1 series / Built-in strong magnet] … D-P79WSE, D-P74L/Z (DC/AC magnetic fields)

Magnetic field resistantauto switch

Switch mounting rod

Switch mounting bracket

Standard mounting position for the auto switch (switch mounting rod)

Piping port Piping port

Piping port

2

How to OrderCKP1

Built-in standard magnet typewith magnetic field resistant

auto switch

Built-in strong magnet typewith magnetic field resistant

auto switch

CKG1A Y100

CKP1

50

50A Y100 P79WSE

P4DWSC

AB

16.5 mm19.5 mm

Clevis width

405063

40 mm50 mm63 mm

Bore size

405063

Cylinder stroke (mm)50, 75, 100, 125, 15050, 75, 100, 125, 15050, 75, 100, 125, 150

None

End bracket

IIAY

YA

NilSingle knuckle joint (M6 without tap)Single knuckle joint (M6 with tap)Double knuckle joint (M6 without tap)Double knuckle joint (M6 with tap)

Note 1) IA and YA are equivalent to the conventional models.Note 2) Knuckle pin, cotter pin and flat washer are provided

as a standard for Y and YA.

Number of auto switches

Sn

Nil 2 pcs.1 pc.“n” pcs.

Auto switch

P

NilWithout auto switch (built-in magnet)Without switch mounting rod

Without auto switch (built-in magnet)With switch mounting rod

∗ Select applicable auto switch models from the table below.

1) Built-in standard (strong) magnet type without auto switch and switch mounting rod

Symbol for the auto switch type is "Nil" as shown below.CKG1: (Example) CKG1A50-50YCKP1: (Example) CKP1A50-50Y

2) Built-in standard (strong) magnet type without auto switch, with switch mounting rod

Symbol for the auto switch type is "P" as shown below.CKG1: (Example) CKG1A50-50Y-PCKP1: (Example) CKP1A50-50Y-P

Built-in Standard (Strong) Magnet Cylinder Part No.

Note 1) When the dog bracket is selected, choose the rod end bracket IA or YA (M6 with tap).

Note 2) Clevis width B (19.5 mm) is not available with mounting base K.

NilBDL

K Note 2)

OptionNoneLimit switch mounting baseDog fitting Note 1)

FootPedestal (for 75, 100, 150 strokes only)

Thread typeNilTN

Rc1/4NPT1/4

Clamp Cylinder with Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch (Rod Mounting Style)

ø40, ø50, ø63Series CKG1/CKP1

Note 1) PLC: Programmable Logic ControllerNote 2) There are other applicable auto switches other than the listed above. For details, refer to page 13.Note 3) Refer to page 14 when ordering the auto switch mouting bracket assembly or switch mounting rod assembly.

D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL

D-P4DWZ

D-P79WSE

D-P74L

D-P74Z

TypeApplicablecylinder series

Auto switchmodel

Applicablemagnetic field

AC magnetic field(Single-phaseAC welding

magnetic field)

DC / ACmagnetic field

Loadvoltage

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC100 VAC

Relay,PLC Note 1)

Applicableload

Applicable Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switches (Refer to page 104 through to 108 for detailed auto switch specifications.)

Electrical entry

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Indicatorlight

2-colordisplay

2-colordisplay

1-colordisplay

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

Wiring(Pin no in use)

Solid stateswitch

Reed switch

CKG1 series

CKP1 series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

CKG1

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

3

CKG1

CKP1

40 50 63

Standard Stroke

40, 50, 63 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)

Theoretical Output

Operat-ing

direc-tion

Operating pressure (MPa)

Unit: N

40

50

63

20

20

20

Boresize(mm)

Rodsize(mm)

Pistonarea

(mm2)

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

1260

943

1960

1650

3120

2800

0.40.3 0.5 0.6

Specifications

Clevis width16.5 mm

19.5 mm

CKG1A/CKP1A series

CKG1B/CKP1B series

Bore size (mm)

Fluid

Proof pressure

Maximum operating pressure

Minimum operating pressure

Ambient and fluid temperature

Piston speed

Cushion Note 1)

Speed controller

Lubrication

Stroke length tolerance

Mounting Note 2)

Air

1.5 MPa

1.0 MPa

0.05 MPa

–10°C to +60°C50 to 500 mm/s

Unclamped side (head end): With air cushion

Equipped on both ends

Non-lube

Double clevis

Note 1) With cushion on both ends are available as Made to Order. For details, refer to page 20, Made to Order 4 . Ordering example CKG1A50-100Y-P4DWSC -X1515

Note 2) Clevis pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer are equipped as a standard. With cushion on both ends

+1.00

End Bracket / Options

IIA

Y

YA

BDL

K

CKA-Y04

CKA-YA04

CKA-K075

CKA-K100

CKA-K150

CKB-I04

CKB-IA04

CK-B04

CK-D04

CK-L04

CKB-Y04

CKB-YA04

—

—

—

Single knuckle joint

Double knuckle joint(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer are equipped as a standard.)

M6 without tap

M6 with tap

M6 without tap

M6 with tap


Dog fitting

Foot

Pedestal

Symbol DescriptionParts no.

CKG1A/CKP1A series CKG1B/CKP1B series

For 75 stroke

For 100 stroke

For 150 stroke

Weight (Basic weight includes the switch mounting rod. At 0 stroke)

0.75

0.11

0.77

0.11

0.97

0.12

1.03

0.12

0.20

0.34

0.22

0.12

0.24

2.2

1.18

0.14

1.34

0.14

CKG1 cylinder

CKP1 cylinder

Basic weight

Additional weight per 25 mm stroke

Basic weight



Double knuckle joint (Knuckle pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer are equipped as a standard.)


Dog fitting

Foot

Pedestal

Bore size (mm) 40 50 63

Unit: kg

Calculation • Basic weight ……… 0.97 (ø50) • Double knuckle joint…0.34 (Y)Example) CKG150-100Y-P • Additional weight … 0.12/25 mm

• Cylinder stroke …… 100 mm 0.97 + 0.12 x 100/25 + 0.34 = 1.79 kg

504

377

784

660

1250

1120

378

283

588

495

934

840

630

472

980

825

1560

1400

756

566

1180

990

1870

1680

4

Series CK1

Bore size (mm) Order no. ContentsCK1A40-PSCK1A50-PSCK1A63-PS

405063

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

Set of nos. above 29, 30, 31.

Note 1) Seal kits are the same as the CKG1/CKP1.Note 2) The seal kit does not come with a grease pack,

so please order it separately.Grease pack part no.: GR-S-005 (compatible with all sizes)Please order 2 pieces exceeding 100 strokes.

Construction

Component Parts

Rod coverTube coverPistonPiston rodBushingCushion valveSpeed controller valveSnap ringClevis bushingHexagon socket head plugPinCotter pinFlat washerCushion seal retainerMagnetSwitch mounting rodAuto switch mounting bracket

Aluminum alloyAluminum alloyAluminum alloyCarbon steelCopper alloy

Aluminum alloyAluminum alloy

Spring steelOil-impregnated sintered alloy

Carbon steelCarbon steel

Low carbon steel wire rodRolled steelRolled steel

—Carbon steel

Aluminum alloy

1111112324122111—

ChromatedHard anodized

ChromatedHard chrome plated

Rc 1/4

Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

123456789

1011121314151617

No. Description Material Qty Note

Rod coverTube coverPistonPiston rodBushingCushion valveSpeed controller valveRetaining ringMagnet holderClevis bushingHexagon socket head plugPinCotter pinFlat washerCushion seal retainerMagnetSwitch mounting rod

Aluminum alloyAluminum alloyAluminum alloyCarbon steelCopper alloy


Spring steelAluminum alloy

Oil-impregnated sintered alloyCarbon steelCarbon steel

Low carbon steel wire rodRolled steelRolled steel

—Carbon steel

11111123124122111

ChromatedHard anodized

ChromatedHard chrome plated

Chromated

Rc 1/4

Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

123456789

1011121314151617

Component PartsNo. Description Material Qty Note

CKP140, 50, 63 Built-in strong magnet type / With magnetic field resistant auto switch

CKG140, 50, 63 Built-in standard magnet type / With magnetic field resistant auto switch

Magnetic field resistant auto switch

Hexagon socket head button screw

Switch mounting spacerWear ringCushion sealCushion valve sealSpeed controller valve sealCoil scraperPiston gasketRod sealPiston sealTube gasket

—Steel wire

Steel wire

Steel wire

Aluminum alloyResin

UrethaneNBRNBR

Phosphor bronzeNBRNBRNBRNBR

—2

2111211111

M4 x 0.7 x 12 L

M4 x 0.7 x 8 L

M3 x 0.5 x 14 L

1819

20

21

22232425262728293031


2 pcs.per

switch2 pcs.

perswitch

Auto switch mounting bracketMagnetic field resistant auto switch


Switch mounting spacerWear ringCushion sealCushion valve sealSpeed controller valve sealCoil scraperRod sealPiston sealTube gasket

Aluminum alloy—

Steel wire

Steel wire

Steel wire

Aluminum alloyResin

UrethaneNBRNBR

Phosphor bronzeNBRNBRNBR

——2

211121111

M4 x 0.7 x 12 L

M4 x 0.7 x 8 L

M3 x 0.5 x 16 L

181920

21

22

232425262728293031


2 pcs.per

switch2 pcs.

perswitch

5

Hexagon socket head cap screw




!3 !1 !2o

i @6u @0

@2

@1 !9!8 @7 @9r t q w @8 e !5 #0 @3 !4 @4#1 !0y@5 !6!7 !5#0

ø40

!4!2 !3!0

i

@7

u

@2 !9 !8 @3 @8 @9r t q w#1 o !6 e#0 @4 !5 @5 @1y @6 !1!7

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

5

Clamp Cylinder Series CK1

Dimensions

CKG140, 50, 63 Built-in standard magnet type / With magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DWS type)

CKP140, 50, 63 Built-in strong magnet type / With magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P79WSE type)

405063

FSymbol

Bore size

44

55

69

52

60

74

47

58

72

52

49

49

65

58

58

5

5.5

5.5

90

80

80

202

192

192

44.5

50.5

57.5

øIA øIB N S W Z ZZ Hs

405063

Symbol

Bore size

44

55

69

52

60

74

47

58

72

52

49

49

55

58

58

5

5.5

5.5

45.5

51

58.5

F øIA øIB N S W Hs

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

40

W 45° 45°

FR15

30

ø38

97

40

ø30

14

17 10 10

52 S + Stroke

10

N

3

øIB

35

øIA

ø20

57

4-M6Threaddepth 2

45°

Speed controller valveTop width across flats 3

M16 x 1.5

3-Rc1/4 3-Rc1/4

Width across flats 17

192 + Stroke

80 + Stroke

Cushion valve Top width across flats 3(Tube cover side only)

F

40

W

45°

45°

R15

30

ø38

97

40

ø30

14

17 10 10

52

10

N

3

øIB

35

øIA

ø20

57

4-M6Threaddepth 12

M16 x 1.5



3-Rc1/43-Rc1/4

S + Stroke

ZZ + Stroke

Z + Stroke

45°


≈ Hs

≈ Hs

Clevis widthCKG1A: 16.5CKG1B: 19.5

+0.30

+0.40

Shaft: ø12Hole: ø12

–0.050d9–0.093

+0.027H8 0

Clevis widthCKP1A: 16.5CKP1B: 19.5

+0.30

+0.40


–0.050d9–0.093

+0.027H8 0

6

Series CK1

How to Order

Without magnet

Built-in standardmagnet type

AB

16.5 mm19.5 mm

Clevis width

405063

40 mm50 mm63 mm

Bore size

Thread type

405063

Cylinder stroke (mm)50, 75, 100, 125, 15050, 75, 100, 125, 15050, 75, 100, 125, 150

None

End bracket

IIAY

YA


NilBDL

K Note 2)



Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch D-P4DW Type / Band Mounting Compliant

Please order the switch mounting bracket, auto switch and built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder individually.Refer to the table below for auto switch mounting bracket part numbers.

How to OrderExample case q Built-in standard magnet cylinder:

CKG1A50-50Y ... 1Example case w Magnetic field resistant auto switch:

D-P4DWSC ... 2Example case e Switch mounting bracket:

BA8-050 ... 2Note 1) Please order the same quantity for the switch mounting bracket and the

magnetic field resistant auto switch respectively. Note 2) Band mounting for the magnetic field resistant auto switch D-P79WS type,

D-P74 type is not applicable.

Ordering Example

Auto switch mounting part no. Applicable auto switch Applicable clamp cylinder

BA8-040

BA8-050

BA8-063

D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL/Z

CKG140CKG150CKG163

Auto switchmodel

D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL

D-P4DWZ



magnetic field)

Loadvoltage

24 VDCRelay,

PLC Note 1)

Applicableload

Applicable Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switches

Electrical entry

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Indicatorlight

2-colordisplay

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

Wiring(Pin no in use)Type

Solid stateswitch

Applicablecylinder series

CKG1 series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

Standard type auto switch is mountable for the built-in standard magnet type. For details, please refer to “Made to Order” on page 15. Also, please note that the standard type auto switch cannot be used under the magnetic field resistant environment.

Caution

Note 1) PLC: Programmable Logic ControllerNote 2) There are other applicable auto switches other than the listed above. For details, refer to page 13.

Band mounting of the magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DW type) to the built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder (the CKG1 series) is possible by ordering the switch mounting bracket and the auto switch individually.

CK1 TNA Y100

CKG1A TN

50

Y10050

Note 1) When the dog fitting is selected, choose the rod end bracket IA or YA (M6 with tap).

Note 2) Clevis width B (19.5 mm) is not available with mounting base K.

Note 1) IA and YA are equivalent to the conventional models.Note 2) Knuckle pin, cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a

standard for Y and YA.

NilTN

Rc1/4NPT1/4

For how to order auto switch/switch mounting bracket, refer to below.

Clamp Cylinder : Basic Type / Built-in Standard Magnet TypeMagnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch (Band Mounting Style)

ø40, ø50, ø63Series CK1/CKG1

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

7

Clevis width16.5 mm

19.5 mm

CK1A/CKG1A series

CK1B/CKG1B series

Bore size (mm)

Fluid

Proof pressure




Piston speed

Cushion Note 1)

Speed controller

Lubrication


Mounting Note 2)

40 6350Air

1.5 MPa

1.0 MPa

0.05 MPa

50 to 500 mm/s

Unclamped side (head end): With air cushion


Non-lube

Double clevis

Without auto switch: –10°C to +70°CWith auto switch: –10 to +60°C

Note 1) With cushion on both ends are available as Made to Order. For details, refer to page 20, Made to Order 4 .Ordering example CKG1A50-100Y -X1515

Note 2) Clevis pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer are equipped as a standard. With cushion on both ends

+1.00

Theoretical Output


Unit: N

Boresize

40

50

63

(mm)

Rodsize

20

20

20

(mm)

Pistonarea

(mm2)

Operat-ing

direc-tion

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

1260

943

1960

1650

3120

2800

0.40.3 0.5 0.6

504

377

784

660

1250

1120

378

283

588

495

934

840

630

472

980

825

1560

1400

756

566

1180

990

1870

1680

Standard Stroke

40, 50, 63 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)

End Bracket / Options

Weight

0.73

0.10

0.95

0.11

0.20

0.34

0.22

0.12

0.24

2.2

1.16

0.13Cylinder

Basic weight



Double knuckle joint (Knuckle pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer are equipped as a standard.)


Dog fitting

Foot

Pedestal

Bore size (mm) 40 50 63Unit: kg

Calculation • Basic weight ……… 0.95 (ø50) • Double knuckle joint…0.34 (Y)Example) CK1G50-100Y • Additional weight … 0.11/25 mm

• Cylinder stroke …… 100 mm 0.95 + 0.11 x 100/25 + 0.34 = 1.73 kg

Specifications

IIA

Y

YA

BDL

K

CKA-Y04

CKA-YA04

CKA-K075

CKA-K100

CKA-K150

CKB-I04

CKB-IA04

CK-B04

CK-D04

CK-L04

CKB-Y04

CKB-YA04

—

—

—


Double knuckle joint(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer are equipped as a standard.)

M6 without tap

M6 with tap

M6 without tap

M6 with tap


Dog fitting

Foot

Pedestal

Symbol DescriptionPart no.

CK1A/CKG1A series CK1B/CKG1B series

For 75 stroke

For 100 stroke

For 150 stroke

8

Series CK1

Note) The seal kit does not come with a grease pack, so please order it separately.Grease pack part no.: GR-S-005 (compatible with all sizes)Please order 2 pieces exceeding 100 strokes.

Construction

Rod cover

Tube cover

Piston

Piston rod

Bushing

Cushion valve

Speed controller valve

Snap ring

Clevis bushing

Hexagon socket head plug

Pin

Cotter pin

Flat washer

Cushion seal retainer

Wear ring

Cushion seal

Cushion valve seal

Speed controller valve seal

Coil scraper

Rod seal

Piston seal

Tube gasket

Piston gasket

Magnet

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Carbon steel

Copper alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Spring steel

Oil-impregnated sintered alloy

Carbon steel

Carbon steel

Low carbon steel wire rod

Rolled steel

Rolled steel

Resin

Urethane

NBR

NBR

Phosphor bronze

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

—

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

3

2

4

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

—

Chromated

Hard anodized

Chromated

Hard chrome plated

Rc 1/4

Zinc chromated

For CKG1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Component PartsNo. Description Material Qty Note

CK140, 50, 63 Basic type / CKG140, 50, 63 Built-in standard magnet type

Bore size (mm) Order no. Contents

CK1A40-PS

CK1A50-PS

CK1A63-PS

405063


Set of nos. above 20, 21, 22.

ø40

@1 @4

r !9 @0 t q @2 w @3 e @4 @1 !5 !4 !6 y !7 !0i

o

!3

!1

!2

u !8

CK

1C

LK

2

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

C(L

)KQ

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

9


Dimensions

CK140, 50, 63 / Basic typeCKG140, 50, 63 / Built-in standard magnet type

CKG140, 50, 63 / Example: Built-in standard magnet type + Magnetic field resistant auto switchD-P4DW type (Band mounting)

405063

Symbol

Bore size

44

55

69

52

60

74

47

58

72

52

49

49

55

58

58

5

5.5

5.5

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

F øIA øIB N S W

405063

HsSymbol

Bore size

43

48

55

46

51.5

58.5

45°36°33°

Ht θ

Clevis widthCK1A: 16.5CK1B: 19.5

+0.30

+0.40


–0.050d9–0.093

+0.027H8 0

M16 x 1.5

3-Rc1/4

3-Rc1/4

52 N S + Stroke

17 10 10

14

30

3

W 10

ø20


97

192 + Stroke

80 + Stroke

ø38

R15

ø30

øIA

øIB

35


45°

F

45°


45°

ø40

4-M6Thread

depth 12

40

57

32 4

12

θ°

θ°

≈ Ht

≈ Hs

10

Series CK1

End Bracket


Option

Limit switch mounting base/Dog fitting

Material: Cast iron

Part no. Rod end bracket symbol Applicable clamp cylinder

CKB-I04CKB-IA04

CK1A seriesCK1B series

I (M6 without tap)

IA (M6 with tap)

Note 1) Spring pin is attached to the single knuckle joint as a standard.Note 2) The conventional model is equivelant to the component part no CKB-IA04

(rod end bracket symbol IA).

Pin

Material: Carbon steel

Material: Rolled steel

Note 1) Limit switch mounting base and dog fitting can be repositioned by removing the hexagon socket head cap screw.

Note 2) When ordering the limit switch base and the dog bracket individually, a spring washer for the mounting bolt (hexagon socket head cap screw) will be attached as a standard.

Part no. Name Applicable clamp cylinder

CK-B04CK-D04

Option symbol

BD

CK1A seriesCK1B series


Dog fitting

Part no. Application

CK-P04 Knuckle pinClevis pin

Note) Cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard.

Double knuckle joint

Material: Cast iron

Unit: mm

Y (M6 without tap)

YA (M6 with tap)

Y (M6 without tap)

YA (M6 with tap)

16.5+0.30

19.5+0.40

Part no. Rod end bracket symbol Applicable clamp cylinderACKA-Y04

CKA-YA04CKB-Y04

CKB-YA04

CK1A series

CK1B series

Note 1) Knuckle pin, cotter pin, flat washer and spring pin are attached to the double knuckle joint as a standard.

Note 2) The conventional model is equivelant to the component part no CKA-YA04, CKB-YA04 (rod end bracket symbol YA).

ø40

1758.75

75

1745

20

30

97

45°

50

30.2

60

4.5

42.5

1520

4-M5 x 0.8

44

57

2-ø3

ø12

–0.0

50d9

–0.0

93

When you attach a dog fitting, be sure to use a knuckle joint, M6 with tap (rod end bracket symbol IA or YA). The dog fitting cannot be attached to the knuckle joint, M6 without tap (rod end bracket symbol I or Y).


Dog fitting

15

17

19

ø30

Press-fit spring pin

2-M6 thread depth 11 (for IA type)

ø3 x 38 L

ø12 +0.027H8 0

25

60

45

15

17

20

2-M6 thread depth 11 (for IA type)

19.5

–0.2

–0.5

57 A

20

40

60

45

15

33

17

20

2-M6 thread depth 11 (for YA type)

17 ø30

19

15

20

Press-fit spring pin

ø3 x 38 L

2-M6 thread depth 11 (for YA type)

Shaft: ø12 –0.050d9–0.093

Hole: ø12 +0.027H8 0

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

11


Option

Foot

Pedestal



Unit: mm

Note) The CK1B series (clevis width 19.5 mm) is not available with pedestal.

Part no.

CKA-K075

CKA-K100

CKA-K150

KZ

222

232

267

KY

35

45

70

KX

132

142

167

KS

70

90

140

KL2

75

75

85

KL1

167

177

202

Optionsymbol

K

KC

0

0

10

Kθ40 50

KZZ63

362

397

482

Applicableclamp cylinder

CK1A40-75YCK1A50-75YCK1A63-75Y

CK1A40-100YCK1A50-100YCK1A63-100Y

CK1A40-150YCK1A50-150YCK1A63-150Y

69° 59'

83° 58'

108° 55'

Note 1) A spring washer for the mounting bolt (hexagon socket head cap screw) will be attached as a standard for the foot bracket.

Note 2) When mounting the cylinder, use both the foot and clevis pin. Please avoid using the foot by itself as this may result in damage.

Part no.Applicable

clamp cylinder

CK-L04 CK1A seriesCK1B series

Optionsymbol

L

45

60

ø40

49

6

12 60

48

ø9

57

34

16

5030

1580

95

KZZ

KL2

KY

KS

3545

KL1

15KX25

5

50KC

KZ

Kθ

Foot

Clevis pin

Pedestal

12

Series CK1

B

5

32A

≈ Hs

BA 432

≈ Hs

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position and Its Mounting Height for Stroke End Detection

Rod mountingD-P4DW type

Note) The above drawing is the mounting example for the D-P4DWS type.

Note 1) The mounting position should be referred for reference only for the auto switch mounting position at the stroke end detection. Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operation to set actually.

Note 2) A/B dimensions are the distance from the standard position (above drawing) to the end surface of the auto switch.

Note 3) The auto switch mounitng position is temporarily set at the time of shipping from our factory. Change it to the desired position in accordance to your facility.

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height: Rod Mounting Style Unit: mm

Auto switch model

D-P4DW

D-P79WSED-P74

Symbol

AB

HsAB

Hs

Auto switch set value and its height

ø63

4.5

27.5

58.5

0

26

58

ø50

4.5

27.5

51

0

26

51

ø40

8

20.5

45.5

5.5

27.5

46

Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch MountingUnit: mm

Auto switch model

D-P4DWD-P79WSED-P74

1 pc.

50

2 pcs.

50

Unit: mm

Auto switch model

Rod mounting

Band mounting

Rod mounting

Bore size

D-P4DW

D-P79WSED-P74

4

5

8

404

5

9

504.5

5.5

9.5

63

Operation Range

D-P7 type

Note) The above drawing is the mounting example for the D-P79WSE type.

Band mountingD-P4DW type

Note) The above drawing is the switch band mounting example for the D-P4DWS type.



Note 3) As for D-P4DW type, band mounting style, the switch mounting bracket and the auto switch have to be ordered separately. For details, refer to page 7.

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height:Band Mounting Style / D-P4DW Type Unit: mm

Auto switch model

D-P4DW

Symbol

AB

HsHtθ


ø63

4.5

27.5

55

58.5

33°

ø50

4.5

27.5

48

51.5

36°

ø40

8

20.5

43

46

45°

B≈ Ht

≈ Hs

A 32 4

12

θ°

θ°

Besides the models listed in “How to Order,” the following auto switches are applicable.∗ For magnetic field resistant 2-color indication solid state switches, auto switches with pre-wired connector (D-P4DWDPC type)

are also available.Refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

13


Auto Switch Mounting Bracket / Part No.

Switch mounting rod assembly / Auto switch mounting bracket assembly

CKP40-R050CKP40-R075CKP40-R100CKP40-R125CKP40-R150

CKG40-R050

CKG40-R075

CKG40-R100

CKG40-R125

CKG40-R150

Applicable clamp cylinderApplicable series Part no.

CKP140-50

CKP140-75

CKP140-100

CKP140-125

CKP140-150

CKG140-150CKG150-150/CKP150-150CKG163-150/CKP163-150





Dedicated toCKP140

series

CKG140/50/63 series

CKP150/63 series

Common


CKG1 series

Applicableauto switch

Auto switch mounting bracket part no.

635040

BK1T-040D-P4DWSCD-P4DWSED-P4DWL/Z

CKP1 series BAP1T-040D-P79WSED-P74L/Z

Auto switchmounting bracket

part no.Applicable auto switch Applicable clamp cylinder

BA8-040

BA8-050

BA8-063

D-P4DWSCD-P4DWSED-P4DWL/Z

CKG140CKG150CKG163

Switch Mounting Rod Assembly / Part No.

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Assembly / Part No.

Auto switch mounting

bracket assembly

Swtich mounting rod

assembly

Collar

Switch mounting rod Hexagon socket head cap screw(M3 tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.7 N m)

Auto switch

Hexagon socket head cap screw(M4 tightening torque: 1.0 to 1.2 N m)

Auto switch mounting bracket

Hexagon socketbutton head screw(M4 tighteningtorque: 1.0 to 1.2 N m)

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket (Band Mounting) / Part No.

Auto switch mounting bracket (Band mounting)

Auto switch mounting band

Round headPhillips screw

(M4 tightening torque:1.0 to 1.2 N·m)

Auto switch mounting bracket D

Round headPhillips screw(M3 tightening torque:0.5 to 0.7 N·m)


Spring washer

Auto switch mounting bracket B

Auto switch

14

Series CK1

24.5

10.5

16.5

≈ Hs

≈ Hs

Band Mounting Style / Standard Auto Switch

The built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder / the CKG1 series can be attached to the band mounting style / standard auto switch as shown below.

1

The standard auto switch cannot be used in a magnetic field environment.For information on our cylinders that can be fitted with a magnetic field resistant auto switch, please refer to page 3.

Caution

As for the precautions on the auto switches, product specifications, refer to the general catalog (Best Pneumatics) or individual catalog.

Caution

D-A93/M9B

D-B54

Mounting Allowable Auto Switch: Band Mounting / Standard Auto Switch

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height for Stroke End Detection

Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting Unit: mm


Note 2)A/B dimensions are the distance from the standard position (above drawing) to the end surface of the auto switch.

Note 3) The auto switch mounitng position is temporarily set at the time of shipping from our factory. Change it to the de-sired position in accordance to your facility.

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height Unit: mm

Autoswitch

D-A93

D-M9BD-M9BW

D-B54

Symbol

ABHsABHsABHs

Auto switch set value and its heightø63

7.530.547 11.534.547 2

25 50.5

ø50 7.530.540 11.534.540 2

25 43.5

ø4011 23.534.515 27.534.5 5.518 38

Autoswitch

D-M9BD-M9BWD-B54

D-A93

1 pc. 2 pcs.(Different surfaces)

50

50

50

50

50

75

2 pcs.(Same surface)


Applicableload

Lead wire length (m)

Relay,PLC

—

TypeLoad voltageWiring

(Output)

—

5 (Z)

3 (L)

100 V100 V200 V

0.5 (Nil)Auto switch modelBand mountingDC AC

12 V24 V2-wire

Indicatorlight

Yes

Electricalentry

GrommetReed switchCKG1 series

Note 1) Lead wire length symbol 0.5 m ................ Nil (Example) M9BW 1 m ................ M (Example) M9BWM 3 m ................ L (Example) M9BWL 5 m ................ Z (Example) M9BWZ

Note 2) Auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.Note 3) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

Unit: mm

Auto switchmodel

8 3.5 5.510

8 4

6.510

Bore size

D-A93D-M9BD-M9BWD-B54

40 50 9 4 711

63

Operating Range

∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaran-teed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.

Auto switch

Note)

qBMA2-040wBJ3-1

Note)

qBMA2-050wBJ3-1

Note)

qBMA2-063wBJ3-1

BA-04 BA-05




40 50

BA-06

63

Note) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are required.

33

12

A

8.5

22 BA

B

—

—

1 (M)—

A93

B54

M9BM9BW

—5 V12 V24 V2-wireYesGrommet

Solid stateswitch

Series CK1Made to OrderPlease contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and lead times.

CK G 1 Enter the standard model no.

2 pcs.1 pc.

NilS

Number of auto switchesWithout auto switch

Note) Select applicable auto switch models from the table below.

Nil

Auto switch type: Band mounting style / Standard auto switchBuilt-instandard magnet

Built-instandard magnet

M9BW

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

15

Dimensions

CKGA32 Series / With Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch D-P4DW Type (Band Mounting Style)2Band mounting of the magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DW type) to the built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder (the CKGA32 series) is possible by ordering the auto switch mounting bracket and the auto switch separately.

Specifications12 mm CKGA32 seriesClevis width

Note) Clevis pin, cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard.

Air

1.5 MPa

1.0 MPa

0.05 MPa

–10°C to +60°C50 to 500 mm/s

With air cushion on both ends

Non-lube

Double clevis

Fluid

Proof pressure




Piston speed

Cushion

Lubrication


Mounting Note)

+1.0 0

CK G A 32 100 Y

Built-in standard magnet

Clevis width: 12 mm

Bore size: 32 mm

P4DWSCP4DWSEP4DWLP4DWZ

BA8-032

Applicable auto switch Auto switch mounting bracket part no.

Built-in standard magnet typewith magnetic field resistant

auto switch

NoneSingle knuckle joint (without tap)Double knuckle joint (without tap)

NilIY

End bracket

Note) Knuckle pin, cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard for Y.

Cylinder stroke (mm)50, 75, 100, 125, 150

∗ Please contact SMC for details of the CKGA32 series.

45°45°m

ax. 26.5

41.2

26

Speed controller valve Cushion valve

12

12

432

2034 + Stroke

70 + Stroke55

137 + Stroke

5612

9.5

25

ø28

R12

ø12

4

4

28

20

ø40

26

5


M10 x 1.25

3-Rc 1/83-Rc 1/8

Double knuckle jointSingle knuckle joint

24

13

C7

18

36

48

24

12–0

.1–0

.3

13

24

C7

30

48

36

26

12

41.2

+0.

5+0.

2

≈ 41.5

≈ 38

12 +0.5+0.2

ø10 +0.022H8 0

ø3 x 22 LPress-fit spring pin Press-fit spring pin

ø3 x 22 LHole: ø10 +0.022H8 0

Shaft: ø10 –0.040d9–0.076

Hole: ø10 +0.022H8 0

Shaft: ø10 –0.040d9–0.076

16

Series CK1

CKGA80, 100 / CKPA80, 100 Series / With Magnet Field Resistant Auto Switch (Rod Mounting Style)3

P4DWSCCK G A 80 YBuilt-in standard magnet type with

magnetic field resistant auto switch

Specifications28 mm CKGA/CKPA seriesClevis width

Note) Clevis pin, cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard.

Air

1.5 MPa

1.0 MPa

0.05 MPa

–10°C to +60°C50 to 500 mm/s

With air cushion on both ends


Non-lube

Double clevis

Fluid

Proof pressure




Piston speed

Cushion

Speed controller

Lubrication


Mounting Note)

+1.0 0

Built-in Standard (Strong) Magnet Cylinder Part No.1) Built-in standard (strong) magnet type without auto switch and switch

mounting rod

Symbol for the auto switch type is "Nil" as shown below.CKGA: (Example) CKGA80-50YCKPA: (Example) CKPA80-50Y

2) Built-in standard (strong) magnet type without auto switch, with switch mounting rod

Symbol for the auto switch type is "P" as shown below.CKGA: (Example) CKGA80-50Y-PCKPA: (Example) CKPA80-50Y-P

Built-in standard magnet

Built-in strong magnet

Clevis width: 28 mm

100

P79WSECK P A 80 Y

2 pcs.1 pc.

NilS


Built-in strong magnet type withmagnetic field resistant auto switch 100

80 mm100 mm

80100

Bore size

50, 75, 100, 125, 15050, 75, 100, 125, 150

80100

Cylinder stroke (mm)

Note) Knuckle pin, cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard for Y.

NoneDouble knuckle joint (with tap)

NilY

End bracket

Nil

P

P4DWSCP4DWSEP4DWLP4DWZ

P79WSEP74LP74Z

Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)Without switch mounting rod

Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)With switch mounting rod

D-P4DWSCD-P4DWSED-P4DWLD-P4DWZ

D-P79WSED-P74LD-P74Z

CKGA series

CKPA series

Auto switch

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

17


CKGA80, 100 / CKPA80, 100 Series / With Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch (Rod Mounting Style) 3

Dimensions

CKGA80 Built-in standard magnet type / with magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DWS type)

CKPA80 Built-in strong magnet type / with magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P79WSE type)


Shaft: ø18Hole: ø18 +0.027

0–0.050–0.093

28+

0.5

+0.

1

17

24

3447

75 55

2-M6 Thread depth 6

21

71

90

ø36

33

34

2-M6 Thread depth 6 ø3 x 38 LPress-fit spring pin

17Speed controller valveTop width across flats 3

≈ 64.5

45°

5575

ø62

ø44

45°

Cushion valveTop width across flats 3

Thread depth 15

4-M6 28 +0.5+0.1


45°

5575

ø62

ø44

45°


Thread depth 15

4-M6

28 +0.5+0.1

1111

ø46


27

ø25

110

258 + Stroke

30

60

50

R20

ø95

129 + Stroke

1510

3554 + Stroke

1040

60

SMC


Width across flats 22 +0.027 0

–0.050–0.093

SMC

M20 x 1.5

3-Rc 3/8 3-Rc 3/8

ø46

27

ø25

11

110

258 + Stroke

1130

60

50

R20

ø95

129 + Stroke

1510

3554 + Stroke

1040

60



M20 x 1.5

3-Rc 3/8 3-Rc 3/8

Shaft: ø18Hole: ø18 +0.027

0–0.050–0.093

max. 58 m

ax. 5

8

max. 58 m

ax. 5

8

≈ 64.5

18

Series CK1

∗ Please contact SMC for details of the CKGA/CKPA series.

≈ 72.5

85

61

max. 65 m

ax. 6

5

45° 45°

Thread depth 12

4 x M6

Speed controller needleTop width across flats 4



4 x M6Thread depth12

28 +0.5+0.1

Speed controller needleTop width across flats 4

45° 45°

≈ 72.5

max. 65


max

. 65

61

85

85 61

90

70

25

24

48

ø38

37

32 17

Press-fit spring pinø5 x 40 L

2 x M6 Thread depth 6

CKGA100 Built-in standard magnet type / with magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DWS type)

CKPA100 Built-in strong magnet type / with magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P79WSE type)

101310

ø52

R24

259 + Stroke

ø11

2

50

ø30

129 + Stroke

56 + Stroke

SM

C

SM

C


3 x Rc 3/8

M24 x 1.5

3 x Rc 3/8

30

63

43 1027

34

14

110

56

10 13

ø52

R24

259 + Stroke

110

ø11

2

50

ø30

129 + Stroke

27

30

56

43 10

63 56 + Stroke 34

1410


3 x Rc 3/8

M24 x 1.5

3 x Rc 3/8

ø44

ø44

Shaft: ø18 –0.050–0.093

Hole: ø18 +0.027 0


+0.027 0

–0.050–0.093

28+

0.5

+0.

1

Shaft: ø18 –0.050–0.093

Hole: ø18+0.027 0

28+0.5+0.1



CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

19


CK140, 50, 63 Series / With Cushion on Both Ends4 -X1515Symbol

Built-in standard magnet type withmagnetic field resistant auto switch

Basic type

Built-in strong magnet type withmagnetic field resistant auto switch

The specifications and the dimensions other than the cushion are the same as the standard products. For the respective specifications and the dimensions, please refer to page 3 to 6 for the CKG1/CKP1 series, and page 7 to 10 for the CK1 series.

Clamp cylinder with cushion on both ends (with cushion on clamped / unclamped side)

Caution

X1515CK1 Enter the standard model no.

X1515Enter the standard model no.

X1515Enter the standard model no.

CKG1

CKP1With cushion on both ends

The air cushion is integrated in the unclamped side (head end) only for the standard type CK1 / CKG1 / CKP1 series, bore size 40, 50 and 63. When an air cushion is required on both ends, it is available as a made-to-order -X1515.

20

Series CK1

Series CK1Specific Product Precautions 1Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A).

Adjustment range: 180°

Marking


Marking

“S” marking

“C” marking

Speed controller valve in the rod end Speed controller valve in the head end

Max. speed positionMax. speed position

Left-side portMax. speed position

Left-side portMax. speed positionMin. speed position

Min. speed position

1. Do not remove the retaining ring that fixes the speed controller valve and cushion valve. It is also unsafe to remove it once and then reattach it. Without the retaining ring, the valve may be ejected when air pressure is supplied causing a serious hazard.Even if it is reattached, there remains the possibility that it may be unsecured, resulting in danger.

Danger

Note 1) The figure shows the max. speed position when piping to the upper or right- side port (viewed from the front side of the rod cover).

Note 2) When piping to the left-side port, the max. speed position will be at the same angle, but on the opposite side.

θ

θ θ

θ

Tube coverMax. speed position position marked with an “I”

Rod coverMax. speed position position marked with an “I”

Cushion AdjustmentThe CK1 series has an integrated air cushion in the head end. The cushion is pre-adjusted at the time of shipping. However, please re-adjust the cushion valve in the tube cover, depending on an operating speed and a load before use.The diameter of throttle will be smaller when the cushion valve is turned clockwise, resulting in stronger cushion reaction.Shown below is the fully open state, although the cushion valve can rotate 360 degrees.The adjustment range is about 225 degrees from the fully open state. The range between 225 and 360 degrees is the fully closed state.

Speed Controller AdjustmentThe CK1 series integrates the speed controller (exhaust restrictor) in the rod and head end. The cushion is pre-adjusted at the time of shipping. However, please re-adjust the speed controller valve (marked "S" on the rod cover) in each cover, depending on an operating speed and load before using.If the speed controller valve is open all the way (max. speed position), rotating it in either direction—to the right or to the left—will cause a reduction in speed. Please note that the speed controller valve can be rotated to the right or left any number of times. However, the adjustment range is limited, and 180 degrees from the max. speed position (directly opposite) is the min. speed position.

Cushion valve in the head end


Fully closed state(Non-adjustment range)

Fully openstate

Fully closed state

Marking

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

21


Piping Port Location ChangeWhen the piping port location is changed, carefully follow the instructions as detailed below.

1. Do not leave out the component parts when the piping port location is changed. Even if one of the component parts is not replaced, malfunc-tion may occur, resulting in dangerous operation.

2. To prevent air leakage, re-wind the pipe tape and fit into the changed location when the piping port lo-cation is changed.

Warning

Switch Mounting Rod Location ChangeThe switch mounting rod is mountable in 3-way direc-tions. Please be careful to the following things when the switch mounting rod is changed.

1. Mount all the component parts to the changed loca-tion.Even if one of the component parts is kept away, the switch detection error, etc may occur. (Switch mounting rod, Spacer with switch, Hexagon socket head button bolt)

2. After the switch mounting rod location is changed, please be sure to check there is no interference with other parts before using.

Warning

Piping Port / Switch Mounting Rod Location Change

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Assembly / Part No. Applicable

cylinder series

CKG1 series

Applicable auto switch


635040

BK1T-040D-P4DWSCD-P4DWSED-P4DWL/Z

CKP1 series BAP1T-040D-P79WSED-P74L/Z


CKP40-R050CKP40-R075CKP40-R100CKP40-R125CKP40-R150

CKG40-R050

CKG40-R075

CKG40-R100

CKG40-R125

CKG40-R150


CKP140-50CKP140-75CKP140-100CKP140-125CKP140-150


CKG140-50CKG150-50/CKP150-50CKG163-50/CKP163-50CKG140-75CKG150-75/CKP150-75CKG163-75/CKP163-75

CKG140-100CKG150-100/CKP150-100CKG163-100/CKP163-100CKG140-125CKG150-125/CKP150-125CKG163-125/CKP163-125

Dedicated toCKP140

series

CKG140/50/63 series

CKP150/63series

Common

Switch mounting rod standard mounting location changed

Switch mounting rod standard mounting location changed

Switch mounting rod standard mounting location

Standard piping port location

Piping port(plugged)







Switch mounting

rod assembly

Switch mounting rodmounting tap (3 locations)

Plugged(Rc1/4tighteningtorque:15.8 to20.1 N m)

Collar

Hexagon socket head button bolt(M4 tightening torque: 1.0 to 1.2 N m)

Plugged

Switch mounting rod



Auto switch



bracket assembly


Switch mounting rodmounting tap (3 locations)

22


Handling

Magnetic field resistant auto switches D-P79WSE/D-P74 type are specifically for use with magnetic field resistant cylinders and are not compatible with gener-al auto switches or cylinders. Magnetic field resistant cylinders are labeled as follows.

Mounting1. The minimum stroke for mounting magnetic field

resistant auto switches is 50 mm.2. In order to fully use the capacity of magnetic field

resistant auto switches, strictly observe the follow-ing precautions.1) Do not allow the magnetic field to occur when the cylinder

piston is moving.2) When a welding cable or welding gun electrodes are near

the cylinder, change the auto switch position to fall within the operational ranges shown in the graphs on page 24, or move the welding cable away from the cylinder.

3) Cannot be used in an environment where welding cables surround the cylinder.

4) Please consult with SMC when a welding cable and weld-ing gun electrodes (something energized with secondary current) are near multiple switches.

3. In an environment where spatter directly hits the lead wire, cover the lead wire with protective tub-ing. Use protective tubing with a bore size of ø8 or more that has excellent heat resistance and flexibil-ity.

4. Be careful not to drop objects, make dents, or apply excessive impact force when handling.

5. When operating two or more parallel and closely positioned cylinders with magnetic field resistant auto switches, separate the auto switches from other cylinder tubes by an additional 30 mm or more.

6. Avoid wiring in a manner in which repeated bend-ing stress or tension is applied to lead wires.

7. Please consult with SMC regarding use in an envir-onment with constant water and coolant splashing.

8. Please be careful of the mounting direction of the magnetic field resistant auto switch D-P79WSE type.Be sure to face the molded surface with soft-resin to the switch mounting bracket side for mounting. (Please refer to page 13 for mounting example and page 106 for soft-resin mold surface.)

Wiring/Current and Voltage1. Always connect the auto switch to the power supply

after the load has been connected.2. Series connection

When auto switches are connected in series as shown below:Note that the voltage drop due to the internal resistance of the LED increases.

Magnetic field resistant cylinder with built-in magnet(For use with auto switch D-P7 type)

Load

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

23


Safety Distance from Side of Auto Switch

Safety Distance from Top of Auto Switch

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l1

Dangerous range

Operational range

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l2

Operational range

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l2

Operational range

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l1

Dangerous range

Operational range

l1

l2

l1

l1

l1

l2

l2l2

Data: Magnetic Field Resistant Reed Switch (D-P79WSE type, D-P74 type) Safety Distance

Dangerous range

24

Series CLK2Clamp Cylinder with Lock

Body is shortened while maintaining the mounting interchangeability with the existing series (CLK1).

Improved workability

Total length reduced by 2 mm

With a cover configuration eliminating protruding valve

Total length reduced by 2 mm

With a cover configuration eliminating protruding valves

NewCLK2

Maintains a clamped or unclamped state when air supply pressure drops or residual pressure is released.

Magnetic field resistant auto switches are mountable.With air cushion (head end)ø32 to ø63 introduced to series2 series, 4 sizes and 3 clevis widths have been standardized.Widely applicable to different types of equipment

Cushionvalve Plug

ConventionalCLK1

ConventionalCLK1

Series

CLK2Gseries

CLK2Pseries

Bore size(mm)

32

40

50 63

40

50 63

Band

Rod,Band

Rod

Stroke(mm)

50

75

100

125

150

Clevis width(mm)

12

16.5

16.5 19.5

16.5

16.5 19.5

Built-in standard magnet typeApplicable to magnetic field resistant auto switches D-P4DW

Built-in strong magnet typeApplicable to magnetic field resistant auto switches D-P7

Switchmounting

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

25

<Example>Holding a clamped statePrevents work piece slippage and dropping due to work piece weight.

Holding an unclamped statePrevents dislocation of home position due to weight of clamp arm.

Clamp Cylinder with Lock Series CLK2

Series CK1 clamp cylinder (without lock)

Extension locking

LOCK

B

A

LOCK

Bore size

ø40

ø50

ø63

Extended DimensionE

34

38.5

42

(mm)

Extension locking

LOCK

Locked state Unlocked state Unlocked state

Supply Exhaust

By-pass piping

Un-locked

Operation

Retraction locking

LOCK

A

B

LOCK

Retraction lockingOperating Principle

Retraction locking

ECK1

CLK2

When compressed air is completely exhausted from the unclamping port, the lock ring is tilted by the spring force, thereby locking the piston rod.

When compressed air is supplied to the unclamp-ing port, the lock ring stands up perpendicular to the piston rod and the lock is released. Then, the piston rod is retracted.

Air can be supplied to or exhausted from the cylin-der head end by providing by-pass piping.

Can be locked at any position within the entire stroke.Locking is possible at any desired position.Able to easily accommodate changes in work piece thickness.

A selection of retraction locking andextension locking is possible.

Compact lock mechanism minimizes extension of length dimension.Series CLK2 clamp cylinder with lock

(piston retracted)

Extension port

Retraction port

Unlocked ExhaustSupply

Operation

Retraction port

Locked

LOCK

Exhaust Supply

(piston extended)Extension port

26

Retraction locking

Clamp cylinder with lock Cylinder with lock (Series CN)

B

A

LOCK

SOL.C SOL.B SOL.A

W

LOCKExtension locking

Piping is not required for unlocking.Since a dedicated solenoid valve is not required for unlocking,reduction of initial costs and replacement of existing equipmentcan be easily accomplished.

Able to maintain an unlocked stateAssembly and maintenance simplified

The auto switch mounting and the piping position are available in three-way directions.The auto switch mounting position can be altered. Also, piping is possible in three-way directions regardless of the auto switch mounting position.Note) For port/bypass mounting positions, refer to page 29 and 35.

Piping port

By-pass piping

Piping port

Collar

Switch mounting rod

Hexagon socket head cap screw(M3 tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.7 N·m)

Auto switch

Switch mounting bracket

Switch mounting

bracket assemblyHexagon socket head cap screw

(M4 tightening torque: 1.0 to 1.2 N·m)

Hexagon socketbutton head screw(M4 tighteningtorque: 1.0 to 1.2 N·m)

Switchmounting rod

assembly(Collar)

∗ Only used for ø63

Standard mounting position for the auto switch (switch mounting rod)

Piping portPiping port

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

27

How to Order

Clamp Cylinder with Lock with Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch Rod Mounting

ø40, ø50, ø63Series CLK2G/CLK2P

CLK2G 50Built-in standardmagnet typewith magnetic fieldresistant auto switch

Clevis width405063

40 mm50 mm63 mm

Bore size

Cylinder stroke50, 75, 100, 125, 150

A Y100 P4DWSC

CLK2P 50Built-in strongmagnet typewith magnetic fieldresistant auto switch

A Y

B

B100 P79WSE

None

End bracket

IIAY

YA


Note) Pin (for knuckle), cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard for Y and YA.

NilBDL

K Note 2)



Note 1) When the dog bracket is selected, choose the rod end bracket IA or YA (M6 with tap).

Note 2) Clevis width 19.5 mm is not available with mounting base K.

Note 1) PLC: Programmable Logic ControllerNote 2) There are other applicable auto switches other than the listed above. For details, refer to page 43.Note 3) Refer to page 44 when ordering the auto switch mounting bracket assembly or switch mounting rod assembly.

P4DWSC

P4DWSE

P4DWL

P4DWZ

P79WSE

P74L

P74Z

Auto switchmodel



magnetic field)

DC / ACmagnetic field

Loadvoltage

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC100 VAC

Relay,PLC Note 1)

Applicableload


Electrical entry

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Indicatorlight

2-colordisplay

2-colordisplay

1-colordisplay

2-wire(3–4)2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

Wiring(Pin no. in use)

Type

Solid stateswitch

Reed switch


CLK2G series

CLK2P series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

Port/By-pass piping position∗ Refer to page 29.

BF

Retraction lockingExtension locking

Locking direction


Sn

Nil 2 pcs.1 pc.“n” pcs. (n = 3, 4, 5···n)

Auto switch

P

Nil

Auto switchmodel

Without auto switch,Without switch mounting rod

Without auto switch,With switch mounting rod

With auto switch,With switch mounting rod

Note) Select applicable auto switch models from the table below.

LR

Nil TopLeftRight

Note 1) Viewed from the rod end.Note 2) When the auto switch D-P79WSE is

mounted, by-pass piping and a switch mounting rod cannot be place at the same position.

Switch mounting rod position

1) Built-in standard (strong) magnet type with-out auto switch and switch mounting rod

Symbol for the auto switch type is "Nil" as shown below.CLK2G: (Example) CLK2GA50-50YCLK2P: (Example) CLK2PA50-50Y

2) Built-in standard (strong) magnet type with-out auto switch, with switch mounting rod

Symbol for the auto switch type is "P" as shown below.CLK2G: (Example) CLK2GA50-50Y-PCLK2P: (Example) CLK2PA50-50Y-P

Built-in Standard (Strong) Magnet Cylinder Part No.

AB

16.5 mm19.5 mm

ø40, ø50, ø63ø50, ø63

NilTN

RcNPT

Port type

CLK2P

CLK2G

28

Standard Stroke

Bore sizeActionFluidProof pressureMaximum operating pressureMinimum operating pressureLocking actionLocking pressureLocking direction

Lock application


LubricationPiston speedStroke length toleranceCushionMounting

Lock holding force N Note 1)

(Max. static load)

Double acting, Single rodAir

1.5 MPa1.0 MPa0.2 MPa

Spring locking0.05 MPa

One direction (Retraction, Extension)0.5 MPa or equivalent

Drop prevention, Position holdingWithout auto switch: –10°C to 70°CWith auto switch : –10°C to 60°C

Non-lube50 to 500 mm/s

+1.0/0Retraction direction (Head end): With air cushion

Double clevis Note 2)

40

629 982 1559

50 63

Note 1) Be sure to comply with guidelines in page 49 when selecting cylinders. Note 2) Pin (for clevis), cotter pin, flat washer are equipped as standard.

Clevis widthø40, ø50, ø63ø50, ø63

16.5 mm19.5 mm

Retractionlocking type

Extensionlocking type

Bore size (mm)40, 50, 63

Standard stroke (mm)50, 75, 100, 125, 150

Theoretical Output

Rod size(mm)

Piston area(mm2)

Operatingdirection

Bore size(mm)

40

50

63

16

20

20

OUTIN

OUTIN

OUTIN

126010601960165031202800

0.3378318588495934840

0.4 504 424 784 66012501120

0.5 630 530 980 82515601400

0.6 756 6361180 99018701680

Operating pressure (MPa)Unit: N

Accessories (Options)

Description

IIA

BDL

K

Y

YA

Single knuckle jointM6 without tapM6 with tap

M6 without tap

M6 with tap

CLK-I04CLK-IA04

CKB-I04CKB-IA04

CKB-Y04

CKB-YA04

CLK-Y04

CLK-YA04

CKA-Y04

CKA-YA04

CK-B04CK-D04CK-L04

CKA-K075CKA-K100CKA-K150

———

Limit switch mounting baseDog fitting

Foot

PedestalFor 75 strokeFor 100 strokeFor 150 stroke

Double knuckle joint (knucklepin, cotter pin, flat washer are equipped as a standard.)

Parts no.

CLK2GA/CLK2PAseries

CLK2GB/CLK2PBseries

50, 63 50, 6340

Weight (Basic weight is for a 0 mm stroke.)

Unit: kg

Symbol

CLK2P

CLK2G

For specifications with auto switches, refer topages 43 and 44.

• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (for

Stroke End Detection) and its Mounting Height

• Operating Range• Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.

Clamp Cylinder with Lock Specifications

Bore size (mm)Cylinderbasic weight


Limit switch mounting baseDog fittingFootPedestal

CLK2G seriesCLK2P seriesAdditional weight per 25 mm stroke

63B: 1.96 F: 2.02B: 2.06 F: 2.08

0.13

50B: 1.48 F: 1.54B: 1.49 F: 1.55

0.110.20

0.34

0.220.120.242.04

40B: 1.05 F: 1.11B: 1.12 F: 1.18

0.080.25

0.36

Note) The above values do not include the weight of the auto switch and auto switch mounting bracket. CalculationExample) CLK2PB50-100Y-B

• Basic weight ··· 1.49 (ø50)• Additional weight ··· 0.11/25 mm• Cylinder stroke ··· 100 mm

• Double knuckle joint ··· 0.34 (Y)1.49 + 0.11 x 100 / 25 + 0.34 = 2.27 kg

Double knuckle joint (Pin, cotter pin, flat washer are included.)

Sym

bol

Port/By-pass Piping PositionLocking direction

B: Retractionlocking

F: Extensionlocking

Symbol

Nil

2

3

4

5

6

—

—

—

By-passpiping

position

By-passpipingon left

By-passpiping

on right


By-passpiping

on right

By-passpipingon top

By-passpipingon top

Portposition

Portontop

Portonleft

Porton

right

Portontop

Portonleft

Porton

right

Port By-pass piping

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

29

Series CLK2G/CLK2PClamp Cylinder with Lock With Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch

30

No.123456789101112131415161718192021222324

Rod coverCoverTube coverPistonCushion ringPiston rodBushingPivotLock ringDust coverDust coverBrake springRetainer plateHexagon socket head cap screw



Round head Phillips screwCushion valvePlugRetaining ringClevis bushingHexagon socket head plugPinCotter pin

Description

Component PartsMaterial

Aluminum alloyAluminum alloyAluminum alloyAluminum alloy

Copper alloyCarbon steelCopper alloyCarbon steelCarbon steel

Stainless steelStainless steel

Steel wireAluminum alloy

Chrome molybdenum steel





Spring steelOil-impregnated sintered alloy

Carbon steelCarbon steel


NoteHard anodizedHard anodizedHard anodized

Chromatedø40 only

Hard chrome plated

Heat treated, Electroless nickel plated

Zinc chromated

Zinc chromatedAnodized, Extension locking only

Nickel platedNickel platedNickel platedNickel plated

Rc1/4, 5 pcs. of extension locking

Zinc chromated

Qty111111111112141111122

4(5)12

No.252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748

Flat washerCushion seal retainerMagnetSwitch mounting rodAuto switch mounting bracketMagnetic field resistant auto switch




Switch mounting spacerWear ringCushion sealCushion valve sealPlug gasketCoil scraperPiston gasketRod sealPiston sealTube gasketLock ring sealO-ringFR one-touch fittingSpatter coverFR double layer tube

Description MaterialRolled steelRolled steel

—Carbon steel

Aluminum alloy—




Aluminum alloyResin

UrethaneNBRNBR

Phosphor bronzeNBRNBRNBRNBRNBRNBR

NoteZinc chromatedZinc chromated

Zinc chromated

2 pcs. for ø63

2 pcs. for ø40

Extension locking onlyExtension locking onlyExtension locking only

Nickel plated, M4 x 0.7 x 12 LNickel plated, M4 x 0.7 x 8 LNickel plated, M3 x 0.5 x 14 L

Qty2111——2

1(2)1111112

1(2)111221

2 pcs. perswitch

2 pcs. perswitch

t

ø40

ø40

t

#3 @9#0!4

@4@3@5@1

@2#7 !8 #4 #1 !9

#8

@0@8#2r$0 #5 #6$2@6@7!3 $5!5!0!6!2 $3u$1#9y

!7 e$6 $4 !1 oiw q$7 $8

#3 @9#0!4

@4@3@5@1

#2#7 !8 #4 !9 @0#8#1 @8 @2r$0 #6 #5$2@6@7$5!5!0!6!2 $3u$1#9y

!7 e!1 $4oiw q

Construction: CLK2G40/50/63Built-in Standard Magnet Type / With Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch (D-P4DW type)

Retraction locking (B)

Extension locking (F)

Series CLK2G/CLK2P

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Rod cover

Cover

Tube cover

Piston

Piston rod

Bushing

Pivot

Lock ring

Dust cover

Dust cover

Brake spring

Retainer plate




Round head Phillips screw

Cushion valve

Plug

Retaining ring

Magnet holder

Clevis bushing


Pin

Cotter pin

Description


Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Carbon steel

Copper alloy

Carbon steel

Carbon steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy





Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Spring steel

Aluminum alloy


Carbon steel

Carbon steel


Note

Hard anodized

Hard anodized

Hard anodized

Chromated

Hard chrome plated


Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

Anodized, Extension locking only

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Chromated


Zinc chromated

Qty

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

4

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

4(5)

1

2

No.

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

Flat washer


Magnet

Switch mounting rod


Magnetic field resistant auto switch




Switch mounting spacer

Wear ring

Cushion seal

Cushion valve seal

Plug gasket

Coil scraper

Rod seal

Piston seal

Tube gasket

Lock ring seal

O-ring

FR one-touch fitting

Spatter cover

FR double layer tube

Description Material

Rolled steel

Rolled steel

—

Carbon steel

Aluminum alloy

—




Aluminum alloy

Resin

Urethane

NBR

NBR

Phosphor bronze

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Note

Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

2 pcs. for ø63

Extension locking only



Nickel plated, M4 x 0.7 x 12 L

Black zinc chromated, M4 x 0.7 x 8 L

Black zinc chromated, M3 x 0.5 x 16 L

Qty

2

1

1

1

—

—

2

1(2)

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

2 pcs. perswitch

2 pcs. perswitch

@7@0 #5 #6$1@6r

!6 iu e

!2

$5 !0$3

$4!4!5o!1

w

$2

q

y$0#9t

$6 $7

!6 e

@7@0 #6 #5$1@6r

!0

$4!4o!5!1

$3iuw

$2

q

y$0#9t

@2#7 !7 #4 @8 !8

#8

!9#1 #2

#7 !7 #4 @8 !8 !9#8 @2#1 #2

#3 @9#0!3

@4@3@5@1

#3!3 @9#0

@4@3@5@1

Construction: CLK2P40/50/63Built-in Strong Magnet Type / With Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch (D-P7 type)



Series CLK2G/CLK2PClamp Cylinder with LockWith Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

31

32

Bore size

SymbolBX

56

64

74

BY

54

64

74

D

16

20

20

F

44

55

69

GA

77

78.5

82

IA

47

58

72

K

14

17

17

L

55

58

58

N

86

87.5

91

T

57

60

67

Hs

45.5

51

58.5

WA

12.5

14

19

NA

59

59.5

61

Z

114

118.5

122

W

5

5.5

5.5

ZZ

226

230.5

234

M

M12 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7

M4 x 7

M5 x 7

40

50

63

(mm)

Bore size

SymbolBX

56

64

74

BY

54

64

74

D

16

20

20

F

44

55

69

GA

77

78.5

82

IA

47

58

72

K

14

17

17

L

55

58

58

N

86

87.5

91

W

5

5.5

5.5

Hs

45.5

51

58.5

WA

12.5

14

19

NA

51.5

52.5

53.5

Z

114

118.5

122

ZZ

226

230.5

234

M

M12 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7

M4 x 7

M5 x 7

40

50

63

(mm)

Note) Refer to page 41 and 42 for Accessories.


≈ Hs

CLK2GB: 19.5CLK2GA: 16.5

40

57

40

BY

BX

Clevis width

4 x M6 x 12

NA

WA

Dust coverMA

F

45°


52

øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke

2713

35

øIA

GA

310

1017

14

N L + Stroke

W10

3 x Rc1/4Retraction port


Width across flats K

Hole: ø12H8Shaft: ø12d9

M

3 x Rc1/4Extension port

≈ Hs

T

40

57

40

BY

BX

Clevis width

4 x M6 x 12

F

45°


WA

NA

MA Dust cover



30

GA

3

10

1017

14

N52 L + Stroke

W10

øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke

27

1335

øIA



M

+0.30

+0.40

CLK2GB: 19.5CLK2GA: 16.5 +0.3

0+0.4

0

–0.050–0.093

+0.0270

Hole: ø12H8Shaft: ø12d9 –0.050

–0.093

+0.0270

Dimensions: CLK2G40/50/63Built-in Standard Magnet Type / With Magnetic Field Resistant Solid State Switch (D-P4DW type)



Series CLK2G/CLK2P

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

33

Bore size

SymbolBX

56

64

74

BY

54

64

74

D

16

20

20

F

44

55

69

GA

77

78.5

82

IA

47

58

72

K

14

17

17

L

65

58

58

N

86

87.5

91

NA

59

59.5

61

T

57

60

67

Hs

46

51

57.5

WA

12.5

14

19

Z

124

118.5

122

W

5

5.5

5.5

ZZ

236

230.5

234

M

M12 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7

M4 x 7

M5 x 7

40

50

63

(mm)

Bore size

SymbolBX

56

64

74

BY

54

64

74

D

16

20

20

F

44

55

69

GA

77

78.5

82

IA

47

58

72

K

14

17

17

L

65

58

58

N

86

87.5

91

W

5

5.5

5.5

NA

51.5

52.5

53.5

Hs

46

51

57.5

WA

12.5

14

19

Z

124

118.5

122

ZZ

236

230.5

234

M

M12 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7

M4 x 7

M5 x 7

40

50

63

(mm)



F

45°


≈ Hs

T

40

57

40

BY

BX

Clevis width

4 x M6 x 12

WA

NA

MA Dust cover



30

øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke

27

1335

øIA

GA

3

10

1017

14

N52

L + Stroke

W

10



M

≈ Hs

BX

40

57

40

BY

Clevis width

4 x M6 x 12

NA

WA

Dust coverMA

F

45°


Z + Stroke

øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

2713

35

øIA

GA

310

1017

14

N52

L + Stroke

W10



3 x Rc1/4Retraction portM


CLK2PB: 19.5CLK2PA: 16.5 +0.3

0+0.4

0


–0.093

+0.0270

CLK2PB: 19.5CLK2PA: 16.5 +0.3

0+0.4

0


–0.093

+0.0270

Dimensions: CLK2P40/50/63Built-in Strong Magnet Type / With Magnetic Field Resistant Reed Switch (D-P7 type)



Series CLK2G/CLK2PClamp Cylinder with LockWith Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch

Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch D-P4DW Type / Band Mounting CompliantBand mounting of the magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DW type) to the built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder (the CLK2G32 to 63 series) is possible by ordering the auto switch mounting bracket and the auto switch individually.

How to Order

CLK2 50Without magnet

A

B

12.5 mm16.5 mm19.5 mm

ø32ø40, ø50, ø63ø50, ø63

Clevis width

32405063

32 mm40 mm50 mm63 mm

Bore size

Port type

Cylinder stroke50, 75, 100, 125, 150

A Y100

CLK2 50Built-in standardmagnet type AG Y

B

B100

None

End bracket

IIAY

YA


Note 1) IA and YA are not available for ø32.Note 2) Conventional products for ø40, 50, 63 are

equivalent to IA and YANote 3) Knuckle pin, cotter pin and flat washer are

provided as a standard for Y and YA.

For how to order auto switch/ auto switch mounting bracket, refer to below.

NilBDL

K Note 3)



Note 1) Option is not available for ø32.Note 2) When the dog fitting is selected, choose the

rod end bracket IA or YA (M6 with tap).Note 3) Clevis width 19.5 mm is not available with

mounting base K.

BF


Locking direction

Built-in standard magnet Port/By-pass piping position∗ Refer to page 35.Nil

TNRcNPT

ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63Series CLK2Clamp Cylinder with Lock

Please order the auto switch mounting bracket, auto switch and built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder individually.Refer to the below table for auto switch mounting bracket part numbers.

How to OrderExample case q Built-in standard magnet cylinder:

CLK2GA50-50Y-B ····· 1Example case w Magnetic field resistant auto switch:

D-P4DWSC ····· 2Example case e Auto switch mounting bracket:

BA8-050 ····· 2

Note 1) Please order the same quantity for the auto switch mounting bracket and the magnetic field resistant auto switch respectively.

Note 2) Band mounting for the magnetic field resistant auto switch D-P79WSE type, D-P74 type is not applicable.

Ordering Example for CLK2G32 to 63

Note) Refer to page 44 for mounting brackets.

Auto switchcomponent part no. Applicable auto switch Applicable clamp cylinder

with lockBA8-032BA8-040BA8-050BA8-063


CLK2G32CLK2G40CLK2G50CLK2G63


Auto switchmodel

P4DWSC

P4DWSE

P4DWL

P4DWZ



magnetic field)

Loadvoltage

24 VDCRelay,

PLC Note 1)

ApplicableloadElectrical entry

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Indicatorlight

2-colordisplay

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

Wiring(Pin no. in use)Type

Solid stateswitch


CLK2G series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m


34


Symbol


Clamp Cylinder with Lock Specifications

Bore sizeActionFluidProof pressureMaximum operating pressureMinimum operating pressureLocking actionLocking pressureLocking directionLock holding force N Note 1)

(Max. static load)Lock application


LubricationPiston speedStroke length toleranceCushionMounting

Double acting, Single rodAir

1.5 MPa1.0 MPa0.2 MPa

Spring locking0.05 MPa

One direction (Retraction, Extension)0.5 MPa or equivalent

Drop prevention, Position holdingWithout auto switch: –10°C to 70°CWith auto switch : –10°C to 60°C

Non-lube50 to 500 mm/s

+1.0/0Retraction direction (Head end): With air cushion

Double clevis Note 2)

1559

63

982

50

629

40

402

32

Note 1) Be sure to comply with guidelines in page 49 when selecting cylinders. Note 2) Pin (for clevis), cotter pin, flat washer are equipped as a standard.

Clevis widthø32ø40, ø50, ø63ø50, ø63

12 mm16.5 mm19.5 mm

Weight (Basic weight is for a 0 mm stroke.)

CalculationExample) CLK2B50-100Y-B

• Basic weight ··· 1.48 (ø50)• Additional weight ··· 0.11/25 mm• Cylinder stroke ··· 100 mm

• Double knuckle joint ··· 0.34 (Y)1.48 + 0.11 x 100 / 25 + 0.34 = 2.26 kg

Bore size (mm)Cylinderbasic weightSingle knuckle joint

Limit switch mounting baseDog fittingFootPedestal

CLK2 seriesAdditional weight per 25 mm stroke

63B: 1.96 F: 2.02

0.13

50B: 1.48 F: 1.54

0.110.20

0.34

32B: 0.51 F: 0.54

0.080.25

0.17

————

0.220.120.242.04

40B: 1.05 F: 1.11

0.080.25

0.36

Unit: kg

Double knuckle joint (Pin, cotter pin, flat washer are included.)

Theoretical Output

Rod size(mm)

Piston area(mm2)

Operatingdirection

Bore size(mm)

32

40

50

63

12

16

20

20

OUTIN

OUTIN

OUTIN

OUTIN

804 691126010601960165031202800

0.3241207378318588495934840

0.4 322 276 504 424 784 66012501120

0.5 402 346 630 530 980 82515601400

0.6 482 415 756 6361180 99018701680

Operating pressure (MPa)Unit: N

Accessories (Options)

Description

IIA

BDL

K

Y

YA

Single knuckle jointM6 without tapM6 with tap

M6 without tap

M6 with tap

CKB-I04CKB-IA04

CLK-I04CLK-IA04

CKA-Y04

CKA-YA04

CKB-Y04

CKB-YA04

CLK-Y04

CLK-YA04

CK-B04CK-D04CK-L04

———

Limit switch mounting baseDog fitting

Foot

PedestalFor 75 strokeFor 100 strokeFor 150 stroke

Double knuckle joint (knuckle pin, cotter pin, flat washer are equipped as a standard.)

Parts no.CLK2A Series CLK2B Series

40 50, 6350, 6332CLK-I03

——————

—

—

CKA-K075CKA-K100CKA-K150

CLK-Y03

35

Standard Stroke

Bore size (mm)32, 40, 50, 63

Standard stroke (mm)50, 75, 100, 125, 150

Port/By-pass Piping PositionLocking direction

B: Retractionlocking

F: Extensionlocking

Symbol

Nil

2

3

4

5

6

—

—

—

By-passpiping

position


By-passpiping

on right


By-passpiping

on right

By-passpipingon top

By-passpipingon top

Portposition

Portontop

Portonleft

Porton

right

Portontop

Portonleft

Porton

right

Port By-pass piping

For specifications with auto switches, refer topages 43 and 44.

• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (for

Stroke End Detection) and its Mounting Height

• Operating Range• Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

35


No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Rod cover

Cover

Cylinder tube

Head cover

Piston

Piston rod

Bushing

Pivot

Lock ring

Dust cover

Brake spring





Cushion valve

Plug

Clevis bushing

Description


Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Carbon steel

Copper alloy

Carbon steel

Carbon steel

Stainless steel

Steel wire





Free-cutting brass

Free-cutting brass


Note

Hard anodized

Hard anodized

Hard anodized

Chromated

Chromated

Hard chrome plated


Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Electroless nickel plated

Qty

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

4

1

1

1

1

1

2

No.

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36


Pin

Cotter pin

Flat washer

Magnet

Wear ring

Cushion seal

Cushion valve seal

Plug seal

Coil scraper

Rod seal

Piston seal

Tube gasket

Lock ring seal

O-ring


Spatter cover



Carbon steel

Carbon steel


Rolled steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Phosphor bronze

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Note


Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

CLK2GA32 only




Qty

4(5)

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

1

1

2

2

1

@3

!5

t@8 #3

#2

@5#1 #0@9 @4!4!3!1!0

oi

u

y

r

ew q@2@1@0

!2

!8

@7@6 !7!6 !9

@7@6 !7!6 !9

!5

@3t

#6#5 #4

o !1@8 #3

i

@5#1 #0@9 @4!3!4!0

#2

u

y

r

ew q@2@1@0

!2

!8

Construction: CLK2A32 Without Magnet / CLK2GA32 Built-in Standard Magnet Type



36

Series CLK2

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Rod cover

Cover

Tube cover

Piston

Cushion ring

Piston rod

Bushing

Pivot

Lock ring

Dust cover

Dust cover

Brake spring

Retainer plate





Cushion valve

Plug

Retaining ring

Clevis bushing

Description


Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Copper alloy

Carbon steel

Copper alloy

Carbon steel

Carbon steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy





Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Spring steel


Note

Hard anodized

Hard anodized

Hard anodized

Chromated

ø40 only

Hard chrome plated


Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

Anodized, Extension locking only

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Nickel plated

Qty

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

4

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

No.

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41


Pin

Cotter pin

Flat washer


Magnet

Wear ring

Cushion seal

Cushion valve seal

Plug gasket

Coil scraper

Piston gasket

Rod seal

Piston seal

Tube gasket

Lock ring seal

O-ring


Spatter cover



Carbon steel

Carbon steel


Rolled steel

Rolled steel

—

Resin

Urethane

NBR

NBR

Phosphor bronze

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Note


Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

Zinc chromated

CLK2G only

2 pcs. for ø40




Qty

4(5)

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1(2)

2

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

ø40

!9 @0#1 @2!8#0

!7

!0

e!1

#8!6!5!2

#7oiw

@7#3 @6 @9@8#5r#6

q

u#4#2y!4

@4@3@5@1 t

!4

@4@3@5@1

@2 !9 @0#1!8 #0

!7

!0

e

!3

#9 #7

#8!6!5!2

!1 oiw

@7#3 @6 @9@8#5r#6

q

u#4#2y

$0 $1

ø40

t

Construction: CLK240/50/63 Without Magnet / CLK2G40/50/63 Built-in Standard Magnet Type



CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

37


45°

Head end cushion valve

26

102 + Stroke

169 + Stroke

34 + Stroke

12

1026

ø12

9.5

56

12 534 12

206025

ø40

6

55

R12

3 x Rc1/8Retraction port 3 x Rc1/8

Extension port

+0.0220

Shaft: ø10d9Hole: ø10H8

–0.040–0.076

Width across flats 10 Width across

flats 36

M10 x 1.25

+0.0220


–0.040–0.076

26

102 + Stroke

169 + Stroke

34 + Stroke

19

12

1026

ø12

9.5

56

12 534 12

206025

ø40

6

55

R12



M10 x 1.2545°

Head end cushion valve

3111


Dust cover

M3 x 6


11

47

47

41.2

26

12 +0.5+0.2

47

49

47

41.2

26

12 +0.5+0.2



Dust cover

M3 x 6

Dimensions: CLK2A32 Without Magnet / CLK2GA32 Built-in Standard Magnet Type



38

Series CLK2

NA

WA

MA

F

45°


GA

310

1017

14

N52 L + Stroke

W

10øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke

2713

35

øIA



+0.0270


–0.050–0.093

3 x Rc1/4Retraction portM


40

57

40

BY

BX

4 x M6 x 12

Clevis widthCLK2GA: 16.5CLK2GB: 19.5

+0.30

+0.40

WA

NA

MADust cover




F

45°

+0.0270


–0.050–0.093

3

30

GA10

1017

14

L + Stroke

W

10

øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke27

1335

øIA



M

N52

T

40

57

40

BY

BX

4 x M6 x 12


+0.30

+0.40

Bore size

SymbolBX

56

64

74

BY

54

64

74

D

16

20

20

F

44

55

69

GA

77

78.5

82

IA

47

58

72

K

14

17

17

L

55

58

58

N

86

87.5

91

T

57

60

67

WA

12.5

14

19

NA

59

59.5

61

Z

114

118.5

122

W

5

5.5

5.5

ZZ

226

230.5

234

M

M12 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7

M4 x 7

M5 x 7

40

50

63


(mm)

Bore size


SymbolBX

56

64

74

BY

54

64

74

D

16

20

20

F

44

55

69

GA

77

78.5

82

IA

47

58

72

K

14

17

17

L

55

58

58

N

86

87.5

91

W

5

5.5

5.5

NA

51.5

52.5

53.5

WA

12.5

14

19

Z

114

118.5

122

M

M12 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7

M4 x 7

M5 x 7

40

50

63

(mm)

ZZ

226

230.5

234

Dimensions: CLK240/50/63 Without Magnet / CLK2G40/50/63 Built-in Standard Magnet Type



CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

39


Dimensions: CLK1GA32 Example:Built-in Standard Magnet Type + Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch D-P4DW Type (Band mounting)

Dimensions: CLK1G40/50/63 Example:Built-in Standard Magnet Type + Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch D-P4DW Type (Band mounting)

Bore size

SymbolHs

43

48

55

Ht

46

51.5

58.5

θ

45° 36° 33°

40

50

63

(mm)

≈ Ht

≈ Hs

θ°θ°

45°45°

≈ 38

≈ 41.5

12

432

12

32 4

40

Series CLK2

Series CLK2Accessories

Single Knuckle Joint

CLK-I03

For ø32 For ø32

For ø40, ø50, ø63 For ø40, ø50, ø63

Double Knuckle Joint

CLK-Y03

C7

24

1330

1226

41.2

48

36

26

Shaft: ø10d9

Press-fit spring pin hole

–0.040–0.076

Hole: ø10H8

ø3 x 22 lø3 x 22 l

+0.0220

+0.

5+

0.2

Part no. Rod end bracket symbol

I (M6 without tap)

IA (M6 with tap)

I (M6 without tap)

IA (M6 with tap)

Applicable clamp cylinder

CLK2A40 seriesCLK2B40 series

CLK2A50 to 63 seriesCLK2B50 to 63 series

CLK-I04

CLK-IA04

CKB-I04

CKB-IA04

Part no.

10

12

D L

41.2

57


CLK2A32 series

CLK240 to 63 series

CDP-2

CK-P04

–0.040–0.076–0.050–0.093

Pin (for Clevis/Double Knuckle Joint)

Part no. Rod end bracket symbol

Y (M6 without tap)

YA (M6 with tap)

Y (M6 without tap)

YA (M6 with tap)

Y (M6 without tap)

YA (M6 with tap)


CLK2A40 series

CLK2A50 to 63 series

CLK2B50 to 63 series

CLK-Y04

CLK-YA04

CKA-Y04

CKA-YA04

CKB-Y04

CKB-YA04

20

17 ø30

15

20

17

35

1545

60

2 x M6 thread depth 11 (for YA type)

40

19

20

2 x M6 thread depth 11 (for YA type)

A

L4 4

18

Press-fit spring pin holeø3 x 38 l

Shaft: ø12d9 –0.050–0.093

øD

d92 x ø3

Hole: ø12H8 +0.0270

Note) The conventional model (the CLK1 series) is equivalent to the component part no. CLK-IA04, CKB-IA04 (rod end bracket symbol IA).

Note) Cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard.

20

17 ø30

15

20

17

15

4560

2 x M6 thread depth 11 (for IA type)

19 Press-fit spring pin holeø3 x 38 l

25

20

2 x M6 thread depth 11 (for IA type)

19.5

–0.2

–0.5

ø12H8+0.027

0

Press-fit spring pin hole

ø10H8 +0.0220

C7

48

36

18

2424

13

12–0

.1–0

.3

16.5

19.5

A

+0.30

+0.40

Note 1) Pin (for knuckle), cotter pin and flat washer are attached to the double knuckle joint as a standard.

Note 2) The conventional model (the CLK1 series) is equivalent to the component part no. CLK-YA04, CKA-YA04, CKB-YA04 (rod end bracket symbol YA).

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

41

PedestalKZZ

KL2KS

KY

KQ 3545

95

8015

5030

KL15

KX 152550KCKZ57

34

16

17Auto switch mounting bracket

75

58.75

45°

ø40

4517

9730

20

604.

51520

50

30.2

42.5

4 x M5

Dog fitting

Series CLK2Accessories

Limit Switch Mounting Base/Dog Fitting

When you attach a dog fitting, be sure to use a knuckle joint, M6 with tap (rod end bracket symbol IA or YA). The dog fitting cannot be attached to the knuckle joint, M6 without tap (rod end bracket symbol I or Y).

Note 1) Limit switch mounting base and dog fitting can be repositioned by removing the hexagon socket head cap screw.

Note 2) When ordering the limit switch base and the dog bracket individually, a spring washer for the mounting bolt (hexagon socket head cap screw) will be attached as a standard.

Part no. Name Applicable clamp cylinder

CK-B04CK-D04

Option symbol

BD

CLK2A40 to 63 seriesCLK2B40 to 63 series


Dog fitting

Foot

Type Applicable cylinder

CLK2A40-75Y, CLK2A50-75Y, CLK2A63-75Y



CKA-K075

CKA-K100

CKA-K150

KL1

167

177

202

KL2

75

75

85

KX

132

142

167

KZ

222

232

267

KY

35

45

70

KS

70

90

140

KC

0

0

10

50

400.5

435.5

520.5

63

404

439

524

40

396 (406)

431 (441)

516 (526)

KQ

69° 59'

83° 58'

108° 55'

KZZ

Bore size

Note) Mounting bolts (hexagon socket head cap screws) and spring washers are attached to the foot as standard.

Part no. Applicable clamp cylinder

CK-L04 CLK2A40 to 63 seriesCLK2B40 to 63 series

Optionsymbol

L

Note) ( ) denotes the dimensions for CLK2PA40.

49

6

12 60

48

ø9

45

60

40

42

Besides the models listed in “How to Order,” the following auto switches are applicable.∗ For magnetic field resistant 2-color indication solid state switches,

auto switches with pre-wired connector (D-P4DWDPC type) are also available.Refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (for Stroke End Detection) and Its Mounting Height

Rod mountingD-P4DW type

Note) The above drawing is the auto switch rod mounting example for the D-P4DWS type.

Unit: mm

Auto switch model

Rod mounting

Band mounting

Rod mounting

—

4.5

—

4

5

8

4

5

9

Bore size

D-P4DW

D-P79WSED-P74

32 40 50

4.5

5.5

9.5

63

Operating Range

Note) The above drawing is the auto switch rod mounting example for the D-P79WSE type.

Band mountingD-P4DW type

Note) The above drawing is the auto switch band mounting example for the D-P4DWS type.

∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.

D-P7 type

B

A

12

≈ Ht

≈ Hs

θ°θ°

32 4

B

532A

≈ Hs

B432A

≈ Hs

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height: Rod Mounting Unit: mm

Auto switchmodel

D-P4DW

D-P79WSED-P74

Symbol

ABHsABHs


63

4.5

27.5

58.5

0

26

58

50

4.5

27.5

51

0

26

51

40

8

20.5

45.5

5.5

27.5

46



Note 3) The auto switch mounting position is temporarily set at the time of shipping from our factory. Change it to the desired position in accordance to your facility.

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height: Band Mounting / D-P4DW Type Unit: mm

Auto switchmodel

D-P4DW

Symbol

ABHsHtθ


50

4.5

27.5

48

51.5

36°

63

4.5

27.5

55

58.5

33°

40

8

20.5

43

46

45°

32

0

27.5

38

41.5

45°Note 1) The mounting position should be referred for reference only for the

auto switch mounting position at the stroke end detection. Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operation to set actually.


Note 3) As for the D-P4DW type, band mounting style, the auto switch mounting bracket and the auto switch have to be ordered separately. For details, refer to page 34.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

43


Auto Switch Mounting Bracket / Part No.


CLKG40-R050

CLKG40-R075

CLKG40-R100

CLKG40-R125

CLKG40-R150

CLKP40-R050

CLKP40-R075

CLKP40-R100

CLKP40-R125

CLKP40-R150

CLKG50-R050

CLKG50-R075

CLKG50-R100

CLKG50-R125

CLKG50-R150

CKG40-R050

CKG40-R075

CKG40-R100

CKG40-R125

CKG40-R150


CLK2G40-50

CLK2G40-75

CLK2G40-100

CLK2G40-125

CLK2G40-150

CLK2P40-50

CLK2P40-75

CLK2P40-100

CLK2P40-125

CLK2P40-150

CLK2G50-50/CLK2P50-50

CLK2G50-75/CLK2P50-75

CLK2G50-100/CLK2P50-100

CLK2G50-125/CLK2P50-125

CLK2G50-150/CLK2P50-150

CLK2G63-50/CLK2P63-50

CLK2G63-75/CLK2P63-75

CLK2G63-100/CLK2P63-100

CLK2G63-125/CLK2P63-125

CLK2G63-150/CLK2P63-150

Dedicated toCLK2G40series

Dedicated toCLK2P40series

CLK2G50seriesCLK2P50series

Common

CLK2G63seriesCLK2P63series

Common

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Assembly / Part No.Applicablecylinder series

CLK2G series



635040


CLK2P series

BK1T-040

BAP1T-040D-P79WSED-P74L/Z

Switch mounting rod assembly / Auto switch mounting bracket assembly

Auto switch Mounting Bracket (Band Mounting) / Part No.

Mountingbracketpart no.

Applicable auto switch Clamp cylinder withapplicable lock

BA8-032

BA8-040

BA8-050

BA8-063


CLK2G32CLK2G40CLK2G50CLK2G63

Auto switch mounting bracket (Band mounting)

(Collar)∗ Used for ø63 only

Switch

mounting rod

assembly Hexagon socket

button head screw(M4 tighteningtorque: 1.0 to 1.2 N m)



bracket assemblyAuto switch mounting bracket

Auto switch


Switch mounting rod

Collar

Auto switch mounting band

Round headPhillips screw

(M4 tightening torque:1.0 to 1.2 N·m)

Auto switch mountingbracket D



Spring washer

Auto switch mountingbracket B

Auto switch

44

Series CLK2

Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting Unit: mm

Autoswitch

D-M9BD-M9BWD-B54

D-A93

1 pc. 2 pcs.(Different surfaces)

50

50

50

50

50

75

2 pcs.(Same surface)

As for the precautions on the auto switches and product specifications, refer to the general catalog (Best Pneumatics) or individual catalog.

Caution

D-A93/M9B(W)

D-B54

Mounting Allowable Auto Switch: Band Mounting / Standard Auto Switch


Applicableload

Lead wire length (m)

Relay,PLC

—

TypeLoad voltage

Wiring(Output)

—

5(Z)

3(L)

100 V100 V200 V

0.5(Nil)

Auto switch model

Band mountingDC AC

12 V24 V2-wire

Indicatorlight

Yes

Electricalentry

GrommetReed switch

CLK2Gseries

Note 1) Lead wire length symbol 0.5 m ................ Nil M9BW 1 m ................ M M9BWM 3 m ................ L M9BWL 5 m ................ Z M9BWZ

Note 2) Auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.Note 3) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position for Stroke End Detection and Its Height

Auto Switch Mounting Position and Its Height Unit: mm

Autoswitch

D-M9BD-M9BW

D-B54

D-A93

Symbol

AB

HsAB

HsAB

Hs

Auto switch set value and its height50

7.530.540 11.534.540 2

25 43.5

63 7.530.547 11.534.547 2

25 50.5

4011 23.534.515 27.534.5 5.518 38

32 3 30.530 7 34.530

0 25 33.5

BA

24.5

33

12

≈ Hs

BA

10.5

16.5

8.5

22≈ Hs

—

—

1(M)

—

A93

B54

M9BM9BW

—5 V12 V24 V2-wireYesGrommet

Solid stateswitch

Series CLK2Made to Order 1Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and lead times.

Band Mounting / Standard Auto Switch

The built-in standard magnet clamp cylinder / the CLK2G series can be attached to the band mounting / standard auto switch as shown below.

1

The standard auto switch cannot be used in a magnetic field environment.For information on our cylinders that can be fitted with a magnetic field resistant auto switch, please refer to page 34.

Caution

CLK2 G Enter the standard model no.Built-instandard magnet

2 pcs.1 pc.

NilS


Without auto switchNote) Select applicable auto switch models from the below table.

Nil

Auto switch type: Band mounting / Standard auto switchBuilt-in standard magnet

M9BW



Note 3) The auto switch mounting position is temporarily set at the time of shipping from our factory. Change it to the desired position in accordance to your facility.

Unit: mm

Auto switchmodel

8459

8 3.5 5.510

8 4

6.510

Bore size


32 40 50 9 4 711

63

Operating Range

∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guar-anteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.

Auto switch

Note) Note) Note) Note)

qBMA2-032wBJ3-1

qBMA2-040wBJ3-1

qBMA2-050wBJ3-1

qBMA2-063wBJ3-1

BA-32 BA-04 BA-05

Mounting bracket part no.


32


40 50

BA-06

63

Note) Two kinds of mounting brackets are required.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

45

Series CLK2Made to Order 2Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and lead times.

Unlock-port Separate Piping Type 2

Built-in standard magnet type with magnetic field resistant auto switch (D-P4DW type)

CLK2G A 50 100 Y B 2 L X1604P4DWSC

Clevis width: 16.5 mm

40 mm50 mm63 mm

405063

Bore size

50, 75, 100, 125, 150

Cylinder stroke

NoneDouble knuckle joint (M6 without tap)Double knuckle joint (M6 with tap)

NilY

YA

End bracket


BF

Locking direction

Note 1) Unlock-port cannot be placed on the top of the cylinder when the retraction locking type is selected.

Note 2) The cylinder actuating port is mounted on the top of the cylinder at the time of shipment from the factory.Although the position of the cylinder actuating port can be changed from [top] to [left or right] in the extension locking type by changing the plug position, it cannot be changed from [top] in the retraction locking type.

Position(Viewed from rod side)

Top

Left

Right

Locking directionRetraction locking

—

Extension lockingSymbol

Nil

2

3

Unlock-port position

TopLeftRight

NilLR

Switch mounting rod position

2 pcs.1 pc.“n” pcs. (n = 3, 4, 5···n)

NilSn


Without auto switch,Without switch mounting rod

Without auto switch,With switch mounting rod

With auto switch,With switch mounting rod

Nil

Auto switchmodel

P

Auto switch

Unlock-port separate piping

Note) Pin (for knuckle), cotter pin and flat washer are provided as a standard for Y and YA.

∗ Please contact SMC representatives for details about piping the unlock-port separately.

3-position valves (closed center) can be used by piping the unlock- port separately.

Symbol

Unlock-port

Cylinderretractionport

Cylinderextensionport

Unlock-port

Cylinderretractionport

Cylinderextensionport



Note 1) PLC: Programmable Logic ControllerNote 2) There are other applicable auto switches other than the listed above. For details, refer to page 43.Note 3) Refer to page 44 when ordering the auto switch mounting bracket assembly or switch mounting rod assembly.

Type

P4DWSC

P4DWSE

P4DWL

P4DWZ

Auto switchmodel



magnetic field)

Loadvoltage

24 VDCRelay,

PLC Note 1)

Applicableload


Electrical entry

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Indicatorlight

2-colordisplay

2-wire(3–4)2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

Wiring(Pin no. in use)

Solid stateswitch


CLK2G series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

46

Bore size

SymbolBX

566474

BY

546474

D

162020

F

445569

GA

77 78.582

IA

475872

K

141717

L

555858

N

86 87.591

T

576067

Hs

45.551 58.5

WA

12.514 19

NA

59 59.561

Z

114 118.5122

W

5 5.55.5

ZZ

226 230.5234

M

M12 x 1.5M16 x 1.5M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7M4 x 7M5 x 7

405063

(mm)

Bore size

SymbolBX

566474

BY

546474

D

162020

F

445569

GA

77 78.582

IA

475872

K

141717

L

555858

N

86 87.591

W

5 5.55.5

Hs

45.551 58.5

WA

12.514 19

NA

51.552.553.5

Z

114 118.5122

ZZ

226 230.5234

M

M12 x 1.5M16 x 1.5M16 x 1.5

MA

M4 x 7M4 x 7M5 x 7

405063

(mm)

Dimensions: CLK2G40/50/63-X1604 / With Magnetic Field Resistant Solid State Switch (D-P4DW type)



øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke27

1335

øIA

GA

310

1017

14

N52 L + Stroke

W10




Shaft: ø12H8Hole: ø12d9

M


NAW

A

Dust cover

MA

Rc1/4 Unlock-portUnlocked when pressured

Rc1/4 Unlock-portUnlocked when pressured

Rc1/4Retraction port

F

45°


≈ Hs

40

57

40

BY

BX


4 x M6 x 12

≈ Hs

40

57

40

BY

BX

4 x M6 x 12

WA

NA

MA

Dust cover

3 x Rc1/4 Unlock-portUnlocked when pressured


F

45°


30

GA

3

10

1017

14

N52 L + Stroke

W10

øD

ø30

ZZ + Stroke

97

36

R15

Z + Stroke27

1335

øIA



M


+0.30

+0.40


+0.30

+0.40

–0.050–0.093+0.027+0

Shaft: ø12H8Hole: ø12d9 –0.050

–0.093+0.027+0

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

47


Marking Fully closed state(Non-adjustment range)


Cushion valve in the head end

Fully closed stateFully opened state

Cushion AdjustmentThe CLK2 series has an integrated air cushion in the head end. The cushion is pre-adjusted at the time of shipping. However, please re-adjust the cushion valve in the tube cover, depending on operating speed and load before use.The diameter of throttle will be smaller when the cushion valve is turned clockwise, resulting in stronger cushion reaction.Shown below is the fully opened state, although the cushion valve can rotate 360 degrees.The adjustment range is about 225 degrees from the fully opened state. The range between 225 and 360 degrees is the fully closed state.

Cushion Adjustment

Series CLK2Specific Product Precautions 1Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A).

48


1. Do not use 3 position valves.The lock may be released due to the inflow of the unlocking pressure. When 3-position valves are used, please use the un-lock-port separate-piping type shown on page 46 and 47.

2. Install speed controllers for meter-out control.Malfunction may occur if meter-in control is used or speed controllers are not used.

3. Be careful of reverse exhaust pressure flow from a common exhaust type manifold.Since the lock may be released due to reverse exhaust pres-sure flow, use an individual exhaust type manifold or single type valve.

Selection

Warning

Pneumatic Circuits

Warning

1. When shipped from the factory, an unlocked condi-tion is maintained by the unlocking bolt. Be sure to remove this bolt before operating. (The unlocking bolt can be stored in tap A after it is removed.)Since the unlocking bolt is required to maintain the unlocked condition during maintenance, pay attention not to lose it. Step 1) With no air pressure in the cylinder, retraction locking

operates when the piston rod is retracted, and exten-sion locking operates when it is extended.

Step 2) Remove the dust proof cover 1.Step 3) Supply air pressure of 0.2 MPa or more to port 2 in the

figure below.Step 4) Remove the unlocking bolt 3 using a hexagon wrench.

Preparing for Operation

Warning

1. Be sure to connect the load to the rod end with the cylinder in an unlocked condition.If this is done when in a locked condition, it may cause dam-age to the lock mechanism.

Mounting

Caution

Preparing for Operation

2. Adjust the speed controller and the retraction side air cushion.If there is excessive impact or collision noise at the stroke end, the connection may become loose and cause damage to ma-chinery.

3. Before restarting operation from the locked posi-tion, be sure to restore air pressure to the B port in the figure below.It is very dangerous to apply pressure to the A port with the B port in an unpressurized state, because the cylinder will move suddenly when unlocked.

Warning

A

B



B

A

1. Since the holding force (max. static load) indicates a cylinder’s ability to hold a static load without be-ing affected by vibration or impact, max. load (workpiece weight) should be 50% or less of the holding force (max. static force).

2. Do not perform intermediate stops while the cylin-der is operating. This cylinder is designed to lock inadvertent movement in the static condition. If the locking mechanism is used to stop the cylinder at an intermediate position during operation, the cylin-der or unlocking mechanism may fail or the product's service life may be significantly shorten.

3. Select the correct locking position, as this cylinder does not generate holding force opposite to the locking direction.The extension locking type does not generate holding force in the cylinder’s retracting direction, and the retraction locking type does not generate holding force in the cylinder's extend-ing direction.

4. Even when locked, there may be stroke movement of maximum 1 mm in the locking direction due to external forces such as the weight of the work piece.Even when locked, if air pressure drops, stroke movement of maximum 1 mm may be generated in the locking direction of the lock mechanism due to external forces such as the work piece weight.

5. When locked, do not apply impact loads, strong vi-bration or rotational force, etc.This will lead to lock mechanism damage, reduced service life, malfunction of unlocked condition etc.

Extension locking typeRetraction locking type

1 2

3

A

13

2A

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

49


1. Piping port position, switch mounting rod position, and by-pass piping position can be selected by the part number. However, if there is an error in order-ing and changes to the positions are required, please note the following.a. Move all the parts that are aligned in a straight line in

the stroke direction by 90° or 180° around the circum-ference of the cylinder.Never move parts in the stroke direction, as this will cause malfunction.

b. Do not operate with any parts removed. When the cy-linder is operated with any part removed, malfunction will occur and it is very dangerous.

c. Although fittings with sealant are used for pipe fittings and plugs, wind them with pipe tape to prevent air leakage when reassembling after position changes.

Piping Port / Switch Mounting Rod (by-pass piping) Position Change

Warning

1. In order to maintain good performance, use with clean unlubricated air.If lubricated air, compressor oil or drainage, etc., enters the cylinder, there is a danger of sharply reducing the locking per-formance.

2. Do not apply grease to the piston rod.There is a danger of sharply reducing the locking perfor-mance.

3. Never disassemble the lock unit.It contains a heavy duty spring which is dangerous. There is also a danger of reducing the locking performance.

2. When the locking mechanism is to be used again, be sure to remove the unlocking bolt.The locking mechanism will not work when the unlocking bolt is screwed in. Remove the unlocking bolt following the steps shown in the section on preparing for operation.

Maintenance

Caution

1. To maintain an unlocked condition, be sure to fol-low the steps shown below.Step 1) After carefully confirming safety, operate a switching

valve (solenoid valve, etc.) so that retraction locking operates when the piston rod is retracted, and exten-sion locking operates when it is extended. Further-more, air pressure of 0.2 MPa or more is required when this is done.

Step 2) Remove the dust proof cover.Step 3) Screw in the accessory unlocking bolt (hexagon sock-

et headcap screw (ø32: M3 x 5 l, ø40: M4 x 6 l, ø50: M4 x 6 l, ø63: M5 x 6 l).

Maintaining an Unlocked Condition

Warning

Extension locking typeRetraction locking type

Unlocking bolt

Dust cover

Unlocking bolt

Dust cover

Top

Left Right

By-passpiping

Piping portCollar

Switch mounting rod


Auto switch



bracket assemblyHexagon socket head cap screw(M4 tightening torque: 1.0 to 1.2 N m)

Hexagon socket head button bolt(M4 tightening torque: 1.0 to 1.2 N m)

Switchmounting rod

assembly

(Collar)∗ Only used for ø63

50

Handling


Mounting1. The minimum stroke for mounting magnetic field

resistant auto switches is 50 mm.2. In order to fully use the capacity of magnetic field



the cylinder, change the auto switch position to fall within the operational ranges shown in the graphs on Back page 6, or move the welding cable away from the cylinder.


4) Please consult with SMC when a welding cable and weld-ing gun electrodes (something energized with secondary current) are near multiple switches.

3. In an environment where spatter directly hits the lead wire, cover the lead wire with protective tub-ing. Use protective tubing with a bore size of ø8 or more that has excellent heat resistance and flexibil-ity.

4. Be careful not to drop objects, make dents, or apply excessive impact force when handling.

5. When built-in strong magnet type cylinders are closely positioned to each other, please pay atten-tion to the following items. 1) When more than 2 pcs. cylinders with general purpose auto

switches are juxtaposed, leave the distance of 40 mm or more between the cylinder tubes.

2) Separate a reed magnetic field resistant auto switch from the tube surface of a closely mounted built-in strong mag-net type cylinder by 30 mm or more.

3) When a built-in strong magnet type cylinder and a cylinder with a general-purpose auto switch are closely positioned, separate the cylinder tubes 50 mm or more.

4) Separate a general-purpose auto switch from the tube sur-face of a closely mounted built-in strong magnet cylinder by 50 mm or more away.

6. Avoid wiring in a manner in which repeated bend-ing stress or tension is applied to lead wires.

7. Please consult with SMC regarding use in an envir-onment with constant water and coolant splashing.

8. Please be careful of the mounting direction of the magnetic field resistant auto switch D-P79WSE type.Be sure to face the molded surface with soft-resin to the auto switch mounting bracket side for mounting. (Please refer to page 43 for mounting example and page 106 for soft-resin mold surface.)

Wiring/Current and Voltage1. Always connect the auto switch to the power supply

after the load has been connected.2. Series connection

When auto switches are connected in series as shown below:Note that the voltage drop due to the internal resistance of the LED increases.


Load


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

51




0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l1

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l2

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l2

Dangerous range

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

10

20

30

40

50

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

l1

l1

l2

l1

l1

l1

l2

l2l2


Operational range

Dangerous range

Operational range

Dangerous range

Operational range

Operational range

52

Series C(L)KQG/C(L)KQPPin Clamp Cylinder

Adjustable height for clamping a workpiece reduces interference with the body!

55 types of guide pinsCompatible with a broad range ofworkpiece configurations Applicable Guide Pin Diameter

Applicable holediameter of workpiece

17.5 17.7 17.8

For ø18

17.9 18.0

Guide pin diameter (mm)

Round type, Diamond type

19.5 19.8

For ø20

19.7 19.9 20.0 24.5 24.7 24.8

For ø25

24.9 25.0 29.5 29.7 29.8

For ø30

29.9 30.0

Round typeDiamond type

Applicable holediameter of workpiece

Guide pin shape

Guide pin shape

12.5 12.7 12.8

For ø13

12.9 13.0

Guide pin diameter (mm)

For ø15

Round type

14.814.5 14.7 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.7 15.8

For ø16

15.9 16.0Round type

Round type

Guide pin diameter

Diamond type

Guide pin diameter

Positioning and

clamping at one time!

60

90

Body shape: D type40

70

Body shape: U, K, M type∗∗ See page 54 for further details.

Clamping HeightWorkpiece

Guide pin

Clamp arm

ClampClamp

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

53

4 body types for a broad range of installation conditions

4 body types for a broad range of installation conditions

U seriesMounting tap : 2 x M10 x 1.5

Pin hole : 2 x ø8H7

K seriesMounting tap : 2 x M10 x 1.5


M seriesMounting tap : 2 x M12 x 1.75


D seriesMounting tap : 4 x M10 x 1.5


Mounting tap

Pin hole

Optional locking mechanismis available.Optional locking mechanismis available.

Workpiece

Clamp arm

The clamping heightcan be held even if the air supply is shut off.

Workpiece

Locking mechanism

LOCK

A total shim height of 3 mm consists of 2 shims with a thickness of 1 mm eachand 2 shims with a thickness of 0.5 mm each. (assembled before shipping)

Precision adjustment of clampingheight is possible by choosingthe with-shim type.[Adjustment range: 0.5 to 3 mm]

Precision adjustment of clampingheight is possible by choosingthe with-shim type.[Adjustment range: 0.5 to 3 mm]

Shim

54

K

M

D

U

Pin Clamp Cylinder Mounting VariationsSeries C(L)KQG/C(L)KQP

A

B

A

B

C

D

E

F

C

D

E

F

P.76

P.86

P.56

P.66

Series MountingBody shapesymbol

Dimen-sion

Mounting hole (tap, pinhole) arrangement

Mounting surface (viewed from top)Port locationSymbol

C(L)KQG(Built-in standard

magnet)

C(L)KQP(Built-in strong

magnet)

Mounting tap: 4 x M10 x 1.5Pin hole: 2 x ø8H7




66

Taps are parallel.

: Mounting tap : Pin hole

Taps diagonal(top right and bottom left)

Taps diagonal(top right andbottom left)

Taps diagonal(top left andbottom right)

Taps diagonal(top right andbottom left)

Taps diagonal(top left andbottom right)




Mounting surface

Mounting surface

Mounting surface

Port

Port

Mounting surface

Port

Mounting surface with the taps diagonal (top right and bottom left)

Mounting surface with the taps diagonal (top left and bottom right)

Port



Port



Port



Port



Port



Port



Port



Port

Port

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

55

Series CKQ D/CLKQ DGP

GP

Pin Clamp Cylinder D series

Clamp arm position (clockwise viewed from top)

A

B

C

D

Clamp arm Guide pin

Same direction as port

90° from port

180° from port

270° from port

Clamp arm Guide pin

Clamp arm

Guide pinPort

Clamp arm Guide pin

Port

Port Port

Round type Diamond type

KQGBuilt-in standard magnet

With magnetic fieldresistant auto switch

KQP

C

CBuilt-in strong magnet

With magnetic fieldresistant auto switch

With lock on the clamp side

LNil Without lock

With lock

Body shape

D

Dimen-sion

MountingMounting hole (tap, pin hole) arrangement

Mountingsurface (viewedfrom top)

Mounting surface(Two facing sides)

66


50 50 mm

Bore size

Port thread type

TNTF

Nil RcNPT

G

RD

Round typeDiamond type∗

Guide pin shape

∗ Diamond type guide pindiameter is ø17.5 or more.


SNil 2 pcs.

1 pc. (Unclamp side)

∗ The D-P4/P7 type is different-surface mounting. (Refer to page 96.)

Auto switch type

NilWithout auto switch(Built-in magnet)

∗ For applicable auto switch models,refer to page 57.

∗ Auto switches are included, (but not assembled).

Shim

SNil Without shims

With 3 mm shims∗

∗ When a model includes shims, two 1 mm shims and two 0.5 mm shims are attached.

Clamping height (Refer to the below figure.)

LH

LOW type (60 mm)HIGH type (90 mm)

Clamping height

LOW type HIGH typeGuide pin diameter

Table 1. Guide Pin Diameter

Guide pin diameterApplicable hole diameter of workpieceGuide pin shape Round type

For ø15 For ø16For ø1312.5 12.7 12.8 12.9 13.0 14.5 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.7 15.8 15.9 16.0

Symbol 125 127 128 129 130 145 147 148 149 150 155 157 158 159 160

Guide pin diameterApplicable hole diameter of workpieceGuide pin shape Round type, Diamond type

For ø20 For ø25For ø1817.5 17.7 17.8 17.9 18.0 19.5 19.7 19.8 19.9 20.0 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0

Symbol 175 177 178 179 180 195 197 198 199 200 245 247 248 249 250

For ø3029.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0295 297 298 299 300

Mounting surface (viewed from top)

A

B

Port locationSymbol

Port

Mounting surface

Port

∗ For guide pin diameter, refer to Table 1 below.

D A 50 177 R A L P4DWSC

D A 50 198 R A L P79WSE

60

90

: Mounting tap: Pin hole

Mounting surface

How to Order

56

Table 2. Applicable Auto Switches / For detailed specifications about an auto switch for itself, refer to page 104 through to 108.


D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL

D-P4DWZ

D-P79WSE

D-P74L

D-P74Z


Auto switchmodel


Electrical entry


magnetic field)

DC/ACmagnetic field

Indicatorlight

Loadvoltage

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC100 VAC

Relay,PLC Note 1)

Applicableload

Grommet

2-colordisplay

2-colordisplay

1-colordisplay

Wiring(Pin no inuse)

Solid stateswitch

Reed switch

C(L)KQG series

C(L)KQP series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Pre-wired connector

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

57

Pin Clamp Cylinder Series CKQ D/CLKQ DGP

GP

Basic Specifications

ActionBore size (mm)FluidMinimum operating pressureAmbient and fluid temperatureCushionLubricationPiston speed (Clamp speed)Port size (Cylinder port)

Double acting50Air

–10 to 60°C (No freezing)None

Non-lube50 to 150 mm/sec1/4 (Rc, NPT, G)

CLKQ (With lock): 0.15 MPa∗CKQ: 0.1 MPa

Lock Specifications

Locking actionUnlocking pressureLock starting pressureLocking directionPort size (Lock release port)

Holding force (N) (Maximum static load)

Spring locking (Exhaust locking)0.2 MPa or more0.05 MPa or less

Lock at extended direction (Clamp holding)1/8 (Rc, NPT, G)

982

Maintenance Parts

Kit No.

CQ2B50-PS

ContentPiston sealRod sealTube gasket

Weight

Clamp Specifications

Guide pindiameter


ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

Model

CKQ

CLKQ

164.9

164.9

82.4

82.4

329.8

329.8

247.3

247.3

494.7

494.7

412.2

412.2

659.6

659.6

577.1

577.1

824.5

824.5

742.0

742.0

989.4

989.4

906.9

906.9

—

1154.3

—

—

1319.2

—

—

1484.1

—

1.661.661.671.711.721.781.82

ø12.5 to 13.0ø14.5 to 15.0ø15.5 to 16.0ø17.5 to 18.0ø19.5 to 20.0ø24.5 to 25.0ø29.5 to 30.0

Model

Guide pindiameter (mm)

Without lock With lock

1.831.831.831.881.891.982.02

C(L)KQ D

2.182.182.182.222.232.292.33

2.342.342.352.42.412.52.54

L H L H


Unit: kg

(N)


Clamp stroke

Clamp armGuide pin shape

Without shims With shims10 to 13 mm

1 pc.Round type, Diamond type

∗ Refer to the below “Clamp Specifications” and Selection regarding detailed specifications of the clamping force, etc.

∗ Diamond type guide pin diameter is ø17.5 or more.

10 mm

∗ Minimum operating pressure is 0.2 MPa when cylinder part and locking part use the same piping.

Proof Pressure/Maximum Operating Pressure

Guide pin diameterø12.5 to ø13.0ø14.5 to ø30.0

Proof pressure1.0 MPa1.5 MPa

Max. operating pressure0.7 MPa1.0 MPa

Kit No.

GR-S-010

Content

Grease 10 g

Replacement Parts: Grease Pack

∗ Consult SMC when replacing the actuating cylinders.

Note 1) Lock holding force of the CLKQ is 982 N. Design the circuit such that the lock holding force is taken into consideration when the operating pressure exceeds 0.75 MPa.The operating pressure should be not greater than the lock holding force as it may cause wear-ing out and/or damage of the locking part and shorten lock life and may lead to possible failure if applied with a load larger than the lock holding force.

Note 2) It takes approximately 0.3 seconds for the cylinder to operate to generate clamping force from an unclamping state (when no speed controller is installed). Design circuit taking into consider-ation the time before the clamping force is generated.

Note 3) Determine the clamping force according to the strength of the workpiece. It can be damaged if the clamping force is too large.

0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Note 1)1236.7

Note 1)1401.6

Note 1)1071.8

GP

∗ Consult SMC for maintenance service. Seal kit for maintenance of the CLKQ series is not available.G

P

GP

GP

58


GP

#1

!3

!2

q

t

!6

#0

@9

@8

@7

@6

@5@4

@3

@2

@1

@0

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0

o

u

i

r

e w

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CKQGD50-RLS

Clamping height: LOW typeWith shims

!7

!8

CKQGD50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part

!7

!8

CKQGD50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

Description MaterialNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note

Component Parts Component Parts

Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin

Hexagon socket head set screw


17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

CKQGDA50∗ The below figures indicate the CKQGDA50-RAL.

Construction

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

59


GP

60

Section A-A

@3

CLKQGD50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


!7

!8

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CLKQGD50-RLS


!7

!8

CLKQGD50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

A

A

#0#1

$8

!3

!2

q

@9

@0

@2

@1

#8

$5

$6

@8

$4

$2

$2

$0

#9

$6

@7

@6

@5

#4

#3

$7 #7

@4

$3

!9

$1

#5

#2

#6

!0

i

o

!5

u

!4

w

t

!1

!6

r

e


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note

Component Parts Component Parts Component Parts

Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon boltHexagon socket headcap screw

Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pinHexagon socket headset screw


17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover

Dust cover holding bolt

Unit holding bolt

Piston

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm


33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

Lead-bronze casted

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Bushing

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket

ScraperHex. socket counter-sunk head screw

Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

CLKQGDA50∗ The below figures indicate

the CLKQGDA50-RAL.

Construction


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

61


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin


CKQPDA50


17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Magnet holder

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQPDA50-RAL.

#1

!3

!2

q

CKQPD50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


!8

!7

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CKQPD50-RLS


!8

!7

CKQPD50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

@0

@3

t

!6

#1

@5

@9

@8

@7

@6#0

@4

@2

@1

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0 o

u

i

r

e

w


GP

Construction

62

Section A-A

@3

CLKQPD50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


!8

!7

CLKQPD50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CLKQPD50-RLS


!8

!7

A

A

#1

$9

!3

!2

q

#0

@9

#2

@2

@1

@7

$6

@8

$0

$7

#9

@5

#8

@4

$2

#6

#3

o

!5

u

!4

w

@0

$7

$5

$3

$3

$1

@6

#5

#4

$8

$4

!9

#7

!0

i

t

!1

!6

r

eCLKQPDA50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin


Shim A


18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Lead-bronze casted

Note

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

Magnet holder

Bushing

t = 0.5 mm


35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQPDA50-RAL.

t = 1 mm

Construction


GP

(66)

38

38

C

33±0.05 33±0.05

3333

(66)

72

K

10.5

øD

(L)

ø65(Guide tube O.D.)

G6

5177

67.5

10.5

64

PHead end cylinder port

(Port on the unclamp side)

PRod end cylinder port

(Port on the clamp side)

9

10(C

lam

p st

roke

)

øZ

71

32

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

40 [Dimension between M10]40±0.05 [Dimension between ø8](Same measurement on 2 sides)

2 sides x 2 x ø8H7Depth 13

2 sides x 4 x M10 x 1.5Depth 15

40 (

Sam

em

easu

rem

ent

on 2

sid

es)

(21)

(6)

33

t =

1 m

m x

2t =

0.5

mm

x 2

With shims(Clamping height: LOW type)

EE

120°

120°

W W

SRSR

(Guide pin dia.: ø17.5 or more)

Diamond typeRound type

Guide pin shape

0 ød–0.050 ød–0.05

(51)

(6)

33

With shims(Clamping height: HIGH type)

t =

1 m

m x

2t =

0.5

mm

x 2

216

G(L

)

HClamping height: LOW type

(Sam

e m

easu

rem

ent

on 2

sid

es)

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR

Withoutshims60±0.05

Withshims

60Withoutshims60±0.05

Withshims


Withshims

60


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

90

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30

ø12.5ø12.7ø12.8ø12.9ø13.0ø14.5ø14.7ø14.8ø14.9ø15.0ø15.5ø15.7ø15.8ø15.9ø16.0

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

204.5

205.5

205.5

234.5

235.5

235.5

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

60


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

90

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40

ø17.5ø17.7ø17.8ø17.9ø18.0ø19.5ø19.7ø19.8ø19.9ø20.0ø24.5ø24.7ø24.8ø24.9ø25.0ø29.5ø29.7ø29.8ø29.9ø30.0

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

208.5

210.5

210.5

210.5

238.5

240.5

240.5

240.5

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

63

CKQ DA50(CKQ DB50 The angle of the cylinder port location against the mounting surface is 90°.)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 56 for relationship between the

mounting surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CKQ DA50-RAH.

GP

GP

GP

Dimensions


GP

(66)

72 (66)

33±0.0533±0.05

38

38C

K

3333

Clamping height: LOW type

216

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

G(L

)

Round type

Guide pin shape

EE

120°

120°

W W

SR0 ød–0.05 SR0 ød–0.05



(21)

(6)

33

(51)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

64

10.5

47

13

G6

5177

(L)

102.

5

øD


Extension locking

LOCK

P1

Lock release port(Unlocked when pressurized)





10(C

lam

p st

roke

)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

9

øZ

40 (

Sam

em

easu

rem

ent

on 2

sid

es) 40 [Dimension between M10]

40±0.05 [Dimension between ø8](Same measurement on 2 sides)

71

32


2 sides x 4 x M10 x 1.5Depth 15 (Guide pin dia.:

ø17.5 or more)

Diamond type

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

P1

NilRc1/8

TNNPT1/8

TFG1/8

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

60


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

90

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

239.5

240.5

240.5

269.5

270.5

270.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

60


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

90

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

243.5

245.5

245.5

245.5

273.5

275.5

275.5

275.5

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

64

CLKQ DA50(CLKQ DB50 The angle of the cylinder port location against the mounting surface is 90°.)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 56 for relationship between the

mounting surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQ DA50-RAH.

GP

GP

Dimensions

GP


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

65


A

B

C

D


KQG

KQP

C

CWith lock on the clamp side

LNil Without lock

With lock

50 50 mm

Bore size

Port thread type

TNTF

Nil RcNPT

G

RD


Guide pin shape



SNil 2 pcs.



Auto switch type




Shim

SNil Without shims

With 3 mm shims∗



LH


Clamping height




For ø15 For ø16For ø1312.5 12.7 12.8 12.9 13.0 14.5 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.7 15.8 15.9 16.0

Symbol 125 127 128 129 130 145 147 148 149 150 155 157 158 159 160


For ø20 For ø25For ø1817.5 17.7 17.8 17.9 18.0 19.5 19.7 19.8 19.9 20.0 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0

Symbol 175 177 178 179 180 195 197 198 199 200 245 247 248 249 250

For ø3029.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0295 297 298 299 300


A

B

Port locationSymbol

Port

Mounting surface

Port

Body shape


AU 50 177 R A L P4DWSC

AU 50 198 R A L P79WSE

40

70

U series

Series CKQ U/CLKQ UGP

GP

Pin Clamp Cylinder

U

Dimen-sion

MountingMounting hole (tap, pin hole) arrangement



Symbol

66



Clamp arm Guide pin


90° from port

180° from port

270° from port

Clamp arm Guide pin

Clamp arm

Guide pinPort

Clamp arm Guide pin

Port

Port Port

Mounting surface

Built-in standard magnetWith magnetic field

resistant auto switch

Built-in strong magnetWith magnetic field


How to Order

66



D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL

D-P4DWZ

D-P79WSE

D-P74L

D-P74Z


Auto switchmodel


Electrical entry


magnetic field)

DC/ACmagnetic field

Indicatorlight

Loadvoltage

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC100 VAC

Relay,PLC Note 1)

Applicableload

Grommet

2-colordisplay

2-colordisplay

1-colordisplay


Solid stateswitch

Reed switch

C(L)KQG series

C(L)KQP series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Pre-wired connector

Pin Clamp Cylinder Series CKQ U/CLKQ UGP

GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

67

68



Double acting50Air




Maintenance Parts

Kit No.

CQ2B50-PS




ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

164.9

164.9

82.4

82.4

329.8

329.8

247.3

247.3

494.7

494.7

412.2

412.2

659.6

659.6

577.1

577.1

824.5

824.5

742.0

742.0

989.4

989.4

906.9

906.9

—

1154.3

—

—

1319.2

—

—

1484.1

—

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit(N)






Kit No.

GR-S-010

Content

Grease 10 g






0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Note 1)1236.7

Note 1)1401.6

Guide pindiameter

Model

CKQ

CLKQ

GP

GP Note 1)

1071.8

Weight

1.671.671.681.721.731.791.83


Model



1.841.841.851.91.9122.04

C(L)KQ U

2.192.192.192.242.242.32.35

2.362.362.362.412.422.512.55

L H L H

Unit: kgGP

Lock Specifications





982


Clamp stroke






10 mm


P


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

69

t

!6

#0

@9

@8

@7

@6

@5@4

@3

@2

@1

@0

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0

o

u

i

r

e w

CKQGU50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!7

!8

CKQGU50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!7

!8

CKQGU50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

#1

!3

!2

q

CKQGUA50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQGUA50-RAL.


GP

Construction

70

Section A-A

@3

A

A

@0

@2

@1

#8

$5

$6

@8

$4

$2

$2

$0

#9

$6

@7

@6

@5

#4

#3

$7 #7

@4

$3

!9

$1

#5

#2

#6

!0

i

o

!5

u

!4

w

t

!1

!6

r

e

#0

@9

!3

!2

#1

$8

q

CLKQGU50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


!7

!8

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CLKQGU50-RLS


!7

!8

CLKQGU50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

CLKQGUA50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm


33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

Lead-bronze casted

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Bushing

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQGUA50-RAL.


GP

Construction

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

71

CKQPU50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


!8

!7

CKQPU50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!8

!7

CKQPU50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

@0

@3

t

!6

#1

@5

@9

@8

@7

@6#0

@4

@2

@1

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0 o

u

i

r

e

w

#1

!3

!2

q

CKQPUA50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Magnet holder

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQPUA50-RAL.

Construction


GP


72

Section A-A

@3

A

A#2

@2

@1

@7

$6

@8

$0

$7

#9

@5

#8

@4

$2

#6

#3

o

!5

u

!4

w

@0

$7

$5

$3

$3

$1

@6

#5

#4

$8

$4

!9

#7

!0

i

t

!1

!6

r

e

#0

@9

q

#1

$9

!3

!2

CLKQPU50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


!8

!7

CLKQPU50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CLKQPU50-RLS


!8

!7

CLKQPUA50

MaterialNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin


Shim A

MaterialNo.

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Lead-bronze casted

Note

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

Magnet holder

Bushing

t = 0.5 mm

MaterialNo.

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQPUA50-RAL.

Description Description Description


GP

Construction

t = 1 mm

(66)

38

38

C

33±0.05 33±0.05

(66)

72

K

3333


216

G(L

)


(21)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2(Guide pin dia.: ø17.5 or more)


Guide pin shape

EE

120°

120°

W W

SR0 ød–0.05 SR0 ød–0.05


(51)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

64


øD

6G

5177

67.5

(L)

10.5

10.5






øZ

10(C

lam

p st

roke

)9

71

32

40 [D

imen

sion

bet

wee

n M

10]

40±0

.05

[Dim

ensi

on b

etw

een

ø8]

(Sam

e m

easu

rem

ent o

n 2

side

s)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)



H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

CKQ UA50(CKQ UB50 The angle of the cylinder port location against the mounting surface is 90°.)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 66 for relationship between the

mounting surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CKQ UA50-RAH.

GP

GP

Dimensions

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

204.5

205.5

205.5

234.5

235.5

235.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

208.5

210.5

210.5

210.5

238.5

240.5

240.5

240.5

GP

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

73

(66)

72 (66)

33±0.0533±0.05

38

38C

K

3333

Extension locking

LOCK


216

G(L

)



Guide pin shape

SR0 ød–0.05 SR0 ød–0.05

120°

120°

EE

W W



t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

(51)

(6)

33

(21)

(6)

33

40 [D

imen

sion

bet

wee

n M

10]

40±0

.05

[Dim

ensi

on b

etw

een

ø8]

(Sam

e m

easu

rem

ent o

n 2

side

s)


10(C

lam

p st

roke

)9

øZ

71

32



10.5

47

13

G6

5177

(L)

102.

5

øD


64

P1






H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

P1

NilRc1/8

TNNPT1/8

TFG1/8

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

239.5

240.5

240.5

269.5

270.5

270.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

243.5

245.5

245.5

245.5

273.5

275.5

275.5

275.5

CLKQ UA50(CLKQ UB50 The angle of the cylinder port location against the mounting surface is 90°.)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 66 for relationship between the

mounting surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQ UA50-RAH.G

P

GP

GP

Dimensions

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece


GP

74

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

75


KQG

KQP

C


LNil Without lock

With lock

Body shape

K

Dimen-sion Mounting

Mounting hole (tap, pin hole)arrangement



Symbol

66


50 50 mm

Bore size

Port thread type

TNTF

Nil RcNPT

G

RD


Guide pin shape



SNil 2 pcs.



Auto switch type




Shim

SNil Without shims

With 3 mm shims∗



LH


Clamping height




For ø15 For ø16For ø1312.5 12.7 12.8 12.9 13.0 14.5 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.7 15.8 15.9 16.0

Symbol 125 127 128 129 130 145 147 148 149 150 155 157 158 159 160


For ø20 For ø25For ø1817.5 17.7 17.8 17.9 18.0 19.5 19.7 19.8 19.9 20.0 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0

Symbol 175 177 178 179 180 195 197 198 199 200 245 247 248 249 250

For ø3029.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0295 297 298 299 300


A

B

C

D


Port


K C 50 177 R A L P4DWSC

K C 50 198 R A L P79WSE

40

70

K series

Series CKQ K/CLKQ KGP

GP

Pin Clamp Cylinder





How to Order

Clamp arm Guide pin


90° from port

180° from port

270° from port

Clamp arm Guide pin

Clamp arm

Guide pinPort

Clamp arm Guide pin

Port

Port Port


C

D

Port locationSymbol

Port

PortE

F

Port locationSymbol

Port









76



D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL

D-P4DWZ

D-P79WSE

D-P74L

D-P74Z


Auto switchmodel


Electrical entry


magnetic field)

DC/ACmagnetic field

Indicatorlight

Loadvoltage

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC100 VAC

Relay,PLC Note 1)

Applicableload

Grommet

2-colordisplay

2-colordisplay

1-colordisplay


Solid stateswitch

Reed switch

C(L)KQG series

C(L)KQP series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Pre-wired connector

Pin Clamp Cylinder Series CKQ K/CLKQ KGP

GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

77

78







Double acting50Air




Lock Specifications





982



Clamp stroke






10 mm

Maintenance Parts

Kit No.

CQ2B50-PS


Weight



ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

164.9

164.9

82.4

82.4

329.8

329.8

247.3

247.3

494.7

494.7

412.2

412.2

659.6

659.6

577.1

577.1

824.5

824.5

742.0

742.0

989.4

989.4

906.9

906.9

—

1154.3

—

—

1319.2

—

—

1484.1

—

1.671.671.681.721.731.791.83


Model



1.841.841.841.891.91.992.03

C(L)KQ K

2.192.192.192.232.242.32.34

2.352.352.362.412.422.512.55

L H L H


Unit: kg

(N)

Kit No.

GR-S-010

Content

Grease 10 g






0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Note 1)1236.7

Note 1)1401.6

Note 1)1071.8

GP

Guide pindiameter

Model

CKQ

CLKQ

GP

GP


P


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

79

t

!6

#0

@9

@8

@7

@6

@5@4

@3

@2

@1

@0

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0

o

u

i

r

e w

CKQGK50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!7

!8

CKQGK50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!7

!8

CKQGK50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

!3

!2

#1

q

CKQGKC50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQGKC50-RAL.


GP

Construction

80

Section A-A

@3

A

A

@0

@2

@1

#8

$5

$6

@8

$4

$2

$2

$0

#9

$6

@7

@6

@5

#4

#3

$7 #7

@4

$3

!9

$1

#5

#2

#6

!0

i

o

!5

u

!4

w

t

!1

!6

r

e

#0

@9

#1

$8

q

!3

!2

CLKQGK50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

CLKQGK50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!7

!8

!7

!8

CLKQGK50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

CLKQGKC50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm


33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

Lead-bronze casted

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Bushing

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQGKC50-RAL.

Construction


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

81

CKQPK50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!8

!7

CKQPK50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!8

!7

CKQPK50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

@0

@3

t

!6

#1

@5

@9

@8

@7

@6#0

@4

@2

@1

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0 o

u

i

r

e

w

!3

!2

#1

q

CKQPKC50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Magnet holder

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQPKC50-RAL.


GP

Construction

82

Section A-A

@3

A

A#2

@2

@1

@7

$6

@8

$0

$7

#9

@5

#8

@4

$2

#6

#3

o

!5

u

!4

w

@0

$7

$5

$3

$3

$1

@6

#5

#4

$8

$4

!9

#7

!0

i

t

!1

!6

r

e

!3

!2

q

#1

$9

#0

@9

CLKQPK50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

CLKQPK50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!8

!7

CLKQPK50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!8

!7

CLKQPKC50

MaterialNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin


Shim A

MaterialNo.

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Lead-bronze casted

Note

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

Magnet holder

Bushing

t = 0.5 mm

MaterialNo.

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQPKC50-RAL.


Construction


GP

(66)

3838

C33±0.05 33±0.05

(66)

72

K

3333


216

G(L

)

EE

W W



Guide pin shape

SR0 ød–0.05SR0 ød–0.05

120°

120°

(21)

(6)

33

(51)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2



t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2


øZ

10(C

lam

p st

roke

)9

71

32



64


øD

6G

5177

67.5

(L)

10.5

10.5

PRod end

cylinder port(Port on the clamp side)

PHead end

cylinder port(Port on the unclamp side)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)45

[Dim

ensi

on b

etw

een

M10

]45

±0.0

5 [D

imen

sion

bet

wee

n ø

10]

(Sam

e m

easu

rem

ent o

n 2

side

s)

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

CKQ KC50(CKQ KD50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CKQ KE50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CKQ KF50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 76 for relationship between the mounting

surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CKQ KC50-RAH.G

P

GP

GP

GP

GP

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

204.5

205.5

205.5

234.5

235.5

235.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

208.5

210.5

210.5

210.5

238.5

240.5

240.5

240.5

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece


GP

Dimensions

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

83

(66)

72 (66)

33±0.0533±0.05

3838C

K

3333

Extension locking

LOCK


216

G(L

)



Guide pin shape

W W

120°

120°

EE

SR0 ød–0.05SR0 ød–0.05



(21)

(6)

33

(51)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2


45 [D

imen

sion

bet

wee

n M

10]

45±0

.05

[Dim

ensi

on b

etw

een

ø10

](S

ame

mea

sure

men

t on

2 si

des)

71

32

10(C

lam

p st

roke

)9

øZ



10.5

47

13

G6

5177

(L)

102.

5

øD


64

P1


PRod end


PHead end


H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

P1

NilRc1/8

TNNPT1/8

TFG1/8

CLKQ KC50(CLKQ KD50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CLKQ KE50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CLKQ KF50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 76 for relationship between the mounting

surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQ KC50-RAH.

GP

GP

GP

GP

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

239.5

240.5

240.5

269.5

270.5

270.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

243.5

245.5

245.5

245.5

273.5

275.5

275.5

275.5

GP

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece


GP

Dimensions

84

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

85


KQG

KQP

C


LNil Without lock

With lock

Body shape

50 50 mm

Bore size

Port thread type

TNTF

Nil RcNPT

G

RD


Guide pin shape



SNil 2 pcs.


∗ The D-P4/P7 type is different-surface mounting. (Refer to page 96)

Auto switch type




Shim

SNil Without shims

With 3 mm shims∗



LH


Clamping height




For ø15 For ø16For ø1312.5 12.7 12.8 12.9 13.0 14.5 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.7 15.8 15.9 16.0

Symbol 125 127 128 129 130 145 147 148 149 150 155 157 158 159 160


For ø20 For ø25For ø1817.5 17.7 17.8 17.9 18.0 19.5 19.7 19.8 19.9 20.0 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0

Symbol 175 177 178 179 180 195 197 198 199 200 245 247 248 249 250

For ø3029.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0295 297 298 299 300

M

Dimen-sion Mounting

Mounting hole (tap, pin hole)arrangement



Symbol

66




A

B

C

D

Clamp arm Guide pin


90° from port

180° from port

270° from port

Clamp arm Guide pin

Clamp arm

Guide pinPort

Clamp arm Guide pin

Port

Port Port


C

D

Port locationSymbol

Port

PortE

F

Port locationSymbol

Port

Port









Series CKQ M/CLKQ MGP

GP

Pin Clamp Cylinder


M C 50 177 R A L P4DWSC

M C 50 198 R A L P79WSE

40

70

M series





86



D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

D-P4DWL

D-P4DWZ

D-P79WSE

D-P74L

D-P74Z


Auto switchmodel


Electrical entry


magnetic field)

DC/ACmagnetic field

Indicatorlight

Loadvoltage

2-wire(3–4)

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

2-wire(1–4)

2-wire

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC100 VAC

Relay,PLC Note 1)

Applicableload

Grommet

2-colordisplay

2-colordisplay

1-colordisplay


Solid stateswitch

Reed switch

C(L)KQG series

C(L)KQP series

Lead wirelength

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

0.3 m

3 m

5 m

Pre-wired connector

Grommet

Pre-wired connector

Pin Clamp Cylinder Series CKQ M/CLKQ MGP

GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

87

88





Maintenance Parts

Kit No.

CQ2B50-PS




ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

ø12.5 to ø13.0

ø14.5 to ø30.0

164.9

164.9

82.4

82.4

329.8

329.8

247.3

247.3

494.7

494.7

412.2

412.2

659.6

659.6

577.1

577.1

824.5

824.5

742.0

742.0

989.4

989.4

906.9

906.9

—

1154.3

—

—

1319.2

—

—

1484.1

—

1.671.671.671.721.721.781.83


Model



1.841.841.841.891.91.992.03

C(L)KQ M

2.182.182.192.232.242.32.34

2.352.352.362.412.422.512.55

L H L H


Unit: kg

(N)

Kit No.

GR-S-010

Content

Grease 10 g






0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Note 1)1236.7

Note 1)1401.6

Note 1)1071.8

GP

Guide pindiameterModel

CKQ

CLKQ

GP

GP



Double acting50Air




Lock Specifications





982



Clamp stroke






10 mm

Weight


P


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

89

t

!6

#0

@9

@8

@7

@6

@5@4

@3

@2

@1

@0

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0

o

u

i

r

e w

CKQGM50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!7

!8

CKQGM50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!7

!8

CKQGM50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

!3

!2

#1

q

CKQGMC50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQGMC50-RAL.


GP

Construction

90

Section A-A

@3

A

A

@0

@2

@1

#8

$5

$6

@8

$4

$2

$2

$0

#9

$6

@7

@6

@5

#4

#3

$7 #7

@4

$3

!9

$1

#5

#2

#6

!0

i

o

!5

u

!4

w

t

!1

!6

r

e

#0

@9

!3

!2

#1

$8

q

CLKQGM50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6

t

y

CLKQGM50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims


Enlargeddrawing ofshim part CLKQGM50-RLS


!7

!8

!7

!8

CLKQGMC50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm


33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

Lead-bronze casted

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Bushing

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQGMC50-RAL.

Construction


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

91

CKQPM50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!8

!7

CKQPM50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

!8

!7

CKQPM50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

@0

@3

t

!6

#1

@5

@9

@8

@7

@6#0

@4

@2

@1

!9

!5

!4

!1

!0 o

u

i

r

e

w

!3

!2

#1

q

CKQPMC50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover

Hexagon bolt


Spring washer

Parallel pin

Cotter pin



17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Lead-bronze casted

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

Bronze

PET

Note

Shim A

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Piston

Piston rod

Collar

Magnet holder

Retaining ring

Bushing

Magnet

Wear ring

Piston seal

Rod seal

Tube gasket

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

t = 0.5 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CKQPMC50-RAL.


GP

Construction

92

Section A-A

@3

A

A#2

@2

@1

@7

$6

@8

$0

$7

#9

@5

#8

@4

$2

#6

#3

o

!5

u

!4

w

@0

$7

$5

$3

$3

$1

@6

#5

#4

$8

$4

!9

#7

!0

i

t

!1

!6

r

e

q

#1

$9

#0

@9

!3

!2

CLKQPM50-RHClamping height: HIGH type

Without shims

!6 y

t

CLKQPM50-RHSClamping height: HIGH type

With shims



!8

!7

!8

!7

CLKQPM50-RLSClamping height: LOW type

With shims

CLKQPMC50

MaterialNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Structural steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Tough pitch copper

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Stainless steel

Note


Body

Guide pin

Clamp arm

Seat

Guide tube

Ring

Pin A

Pin B

Cover assembly

Spatter cover


Spring washer

Parallel pin


Shim A

MaterialNo.

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Stainless steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Tool steel

Steel wire

Aluminum alloy

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Structural steel

Structural steel

Steel strip

Structural steel

Structural steel

Aluminum alloy

Aluminum alloy

Lead-bronze casted

Note

Shim B

Cylinder tube

Lock body

Intermediate collar

Lock ring

Brake spring

Collar

Piston rod

Lever

Pivot pin

Pivot key

Dust cover


Unit holding bolt

Piston

Magnet holder

Bushing

t = 0.5 mm

MaterialNo.

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Tool steel

—

Resin

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

NBR

Structural steel

Tool steel

Stainless steel

Bronze

PET

Note

Retaining ring

Magnet

Wear ring

Rod seal A

Rod seal B

Rod seal C

Piston seal A

Piston seal B

Tube gasket


Spring pin

Parallel pin

Coil scraper

Seal

t = 1 mm

∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQPMC50-RAL.


Construction


GP

(66)

3838

33±0.05 33±0.05

(66)

72

K

C

3333


216

G(L

)

EE

W W



Guide pin shape

SR0 ød–0.05SR0 ød–0.05

120°

120°

(21)

(6)

33

(51)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2



t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

45 [D

imen

sion

bet

wee

n M

12]

45±0

.05

[Dim

ensi

on b

etw

een

ø10

](S

ame

mea

sure

men

t on

2 si

des)


øZ

10(C

lam

p st

roke

)9

71

32



64


øD

6G

5177

67.5

(L)

10.5

10.5

PRod end


PHead end


H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

CKQ MC50(CKQ MD50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CKQ ME50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CKQ MF50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 86 for relationship between the mounting

surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CKQ MC50-RAH.G

P

GP

GP

GP

GP

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

204.5

205.5

205.5

234.5

235.5

235.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

208.5

210.5

210.5

210.5

238.5

240.5

240.5

240.5

Dimensions

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece


GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

93

(66)

72 (66)

33±0.0533±0.05

3838C

K

3333

Extension locking

LOCK

45 [D

imen

sion

bet

wee

n M

12]

45±0

.05

[Dim

ensi

on b

etw

een

ø10

](S

ame

mea

sure

men

t on

2 si

des)


71

32

10(C

lam

p st

roke

)9

øZ



10.5

47

13

G6

5177

(L)

102.

5

øD


64

P1


PRod end


PHead end


216

G(L

)


EE

120°

120°

W W



Guide pin shape

SR0 ød–0.05SRSR



(21)

(6)

33

(51)

(6)

33

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

t = 1

mm

x 2

t = 0

.5 m

m x

2

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

H(S

ame

mea

sure

men

ton

2 s

ides

)

0 ød–0.05

PNil

Rc1/4TN

NPT1/4TF

G1/4

P1

NilRc1/8

TNNPT1/8

TFG1/8

CLKQ MC50(CLKQ MD50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CLKQ ME50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)

(CLKQ MF50 Relationship between the mounting surface and a port location is .)∗ Refer to “How to Order” on page 86 for relationship between the mounting

surface and a port location.∗ The below figures indicate the CLKQ MC50-RAH.

GP

GP

GP

GP

—

—

—

W

ø36

ø36

ø36

øZ

4

5

5.5

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

6

7

7

33

34

34

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø13

ø15

ø16

9

11

11

ø30

ø30

ø30


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7≈9≈8≈8≈7≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

239.5

240.5

240.5

269.5

270.5

270.5

6

7

7

9

W

ø40

ø40

ø47

ø47

øZ

6

7

9.5

11

SR


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

40


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims


Withshims

70

LOWtype

HIGHtype

HøD

7

8

8

8

37

39

39

39

HIGHtype

LOWtype

LKC GEød

ø18

ø20

ø25

ø30

12

13

16

18

ø35

ø35

ø40

ø40


≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

≈10≈9≈8≈8≈7

243.5

245.5

245.5

245.5

273.5

275.5

275.5

275.5

GP

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece

Hole

diame

terof

workp

iece


GP

Dimensions

94

Besides the models listed in “How to Order,” the following auto switches are applicable.∗ For magnetic field resistant 2-color indication solid state switches, auto switches with pre-wired connector (D-P4DWDPC type)

are also available.Refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

95

Magnetic fieldresistant auto switch

Auto switch mounting screwHexagon socket head cap screw

M3 x 0.5 x 14 L


With switch, M3 x 0.5 x 14 L


Auto switch mounting nut


M3 x 0.5 x 14 L


With switch, M3 x 0.5 x 14 L

Magnetic fieldresistant auto switch


Auto switch mounting nut

For D-P4DW, D-P7 and P79WSE models1. Mount the auto switch mounting bracket onto the auto switch

mounting nut by tightening bracket fixing screw lightly through the mounting hole on the top of bracket.

2. Insert the auto switch mounting bracket assembly (bracket + nut) into the mounting groove and set it at the auto switch mounting position.

3. Push the auto switch mounting screw lightly into the auto switch through the mounting hole to secure.

4. After reconfirming the detecting position, tighten the auto switch mounting screw to secure the auto switch mounting bracket and the auto switch. (Tightening torque should be 0.5 to 0.7 N·m.) (See Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.)

∗ Be aware that the D-P79WSE should be installed in the speci-fied direction shown when installed to the auto switch mounting bracket. Be sure to mount it so that the soft resin mold surface is in contact with the auto switch mounting bracket. (See Fig. 2.)

Auto switchmounting bracketpart number

Items and number of each item

BQP1T-050

• Switch mounting bracket x 1• Switch mounting nut x 1• Hexagon socket head cap screw x 2• Hexagon socket head cap screw x 2 (with switch)

Figure 1

Figure 2

Auto Switch Mounting

Pin Clamp Cylinder Series CKQ /CLKQ GP

GP

96

A 742——

B A——

5.540.5

17 or more52 or more

——

——

20.5 or more55.5 or more

BCKQGCLKQGCKQPCLKQP

Model

EnvironmentMounting Rail mounting

Welding

D-P4DWSED-P4DWSCD-P4DWLD-P4DWZ

D-P74LD-P74ZD-P79WSE

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Height

D-P4DWSED-P4DWSCD-P4DWLD-P4DWZ

D-P74LD-P74ZD-P79WSE

≈U

Model

EnvironmentMounting Rail mounting

Welding

C(L)KQGC(L)KQP

50—

—50

Rail mounting type (Different-surface mounting)

[CKQG] [CLKQG]• Applicable auto switch: D-P4DW

[CKQP] [CLKQP]• Applicable auto switch: D-P74/D-P79WSE

Operating rangeAuto switch modelCylinder model

D-P4DWSD-P4DWD-P74D-P79WSE

C(L)KQG

C(L)KQP

6.5

10

Operating Range

∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position and Its Mounting Height

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position

Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operation to set actually.

≈ U≈ U

B

A

B

A

A

B

≈ U ≈ U

A

B

Series CKQ /CLKQ GP

GP

1. There is a possibility of dangerous sudden ac-tion by cylinders if sliding parts of machinery are twisted due to external forces, etc.In such cases, human injury may occur; e.g., by catching hands or feet in the machinery, or damage to the machinery it-self may occur. Therefore, the machine should be adjusted to operate smoothly and designed to avoid such dangers.

2. A protective cover is recommended to mini-mize the risk of personal injury.If a stationary object and moving parts of a cylinder are in close proximity, personal injury may occur. Design the struc-ture to avoid contact with the human body.

3. Securely tighten all stationary parts and con-nected parts so that they will not become loose.Especially when a cylinder operates with high frequency or is installed where there is a lot of vibration, ensure that all parts remain secure.

4. Design the equipment so that the maximum theoretical force is not applied to the cylinder.If the cylinder becomes damaged there is a danger of human injury and or equipment damage.

5. Select the mounting base by taking into con-sideration its rigidity because the cylinder ap-plies a large amount of force.Otherwise there is a danger of human injury and or equipment damage.

6. Consider the possibility of a decrease in circuit pressure when power is turned off.If the cylinder is used for a clamping application there is a danger of the workpiece being released since the circuit pres-sure decreases when the power is turned off. Install safety equipment to prevent human injury and damage to machine and or equipment. The same consideration should be given for hanging or lift applications to prevent dropping of a work-piece.

7. Consider a possible loss of power source.Measures should be taken to protect against bodily injury and equipment damage in the event that there is a loss of power to equipment controlled by pneumatics, electricity, or hydraul-ics.

8. Consider emergency stops.Design so that human injury and/or damage to machinery and equipment will not be caused when machinery is stopped by a safety device under abnormal conditions, a power outage or a manual emergency stop.

9. Consider the action when operation is restar-ted after an emergency stop or abnormal stop.Design the machinery so that human injury or equipment damage will not occur upon restart of operation.When the cylinder has to be reset at the starting position, in-stall manual safely equipment.

10. Intermediate stopIn the case of 3-position closed center of a valve, it is difficult to make a piston stop at the required position as accurately and precisely as with hydraulic pressure due to compressibility of air.Furthermore, since valves and cylinders, etc. are not guaran-teed for zero air leakage, it may not be possible to hold a stopped position for an extended period of time. Contact SMC in the case it is necessary to hold a stopped position for an extended period. Do not intermediately stop the CLKQ cylin-der during a locking operation because it will shorten the life of the cylinder.

Design

Warning

Selection

1. Confirm the specifications.The products featured in this catalog are designed for use in industrial compressed air systems. If the products are used in conditions where pressure and/or temperature are outside the range of specifications, damage and/or malfunctions may oc-cur. Do not use in these conditions. (Refer to the specifica-tions.)Consult SMC if you use a fluid other than compressed air.

2. Do not use for applications other than clamping.Since the cylinder performs both positioning and clamping simultaneously, any other application may cause an accident or damage to the cylinder.

3. Do not modify the cylinder.Do not modify the cylinder because it may cause damage to it, shorten the protect life, and or cause an accident.

4. The following table shows the maximum thick-ness of workpieces that be clamped.

Workpieces to be clamped should not be thicker than those shown in the table.

5. Clamp only the flat side of a workpiece.6. If a workpiece is transferred three dimension-

ally and at high speed by a robot after it is clamped, the work weight must be 1/10 or less of the theoretical thrust (clamping force), or stoppers should be installed as a preventive measure for the movement of the workpiece.

7. Do not clamp without setting the workpiece on a work surface.If the clamp arm makes contact with the seat surface without clamping a workpiece, the surface flatness condition of the seat surface and the clamp arm (the clamping surface) will be adversely effected.

8. Do not apply an impact load, strong vibrations or rotating force to the product.Since the cylinder is composed of precisely manufactured parts, they may be damaged and the life may be shortened if a strong impact load, strong vibration or rotating force are applied.

Warning

CKQGCLKQGCKQPCLKQP

Without shims10 mm10 mm10 mm10 mm

Model With shims10 to 13 mm10 to 13 mm10 to 13 mm10 to 13 mm

Series CKQ /CLKQ Specific Product Precautions 1Be sure to read this before handling.

GP

GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

97

[For the CLKQG/P series only]

9. Do not use for intermediate cylinder stops.This cylinder is designed to lock in a clamped condition to prevent unwanted movement. Do not perform any intermediate stops while the cylinder is operating, since it will shorten the product life.

10. Select the correct locking position since this cylinder does not generate a holding force opposite to the locking direction.The forwarded lock type (F type) clamp does not generate a holding force in the opposite direction (clamping direction). In addition the locking direction can not be changed.

11. Even when locked, there may be a stroke movement of approximately 1 mm in the locking direction due to external forces, such as the weight of the workpiece.Even when locked, if air pressure drops, a stroke movement of approximately 1 mm may occur in the locking direction. This is caused by external forces, such as, the workpiece weight due to the general characteristics of the locking mechanism.

Warning

1. To adjust the cylinder speed, attach a speed controller and begin to adjust the speed by setting it to a low speed first. Gradually increase the set speed till the required speed is reached.

Caution

Selection

Applicable Guide Pin DiameterGuide pin diameter (mm)

Model

Round type

12.5 12.7 12.8 12.9 13.0 14.5 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.7 15.8 15.9 16.0

For ø13 For ø15 For ø16

Guide pin diameter (mm)Model

Round type, Diamond type

17.5 17.7 17.8 17.9 18.0 19.5 19.7 19.8 19.9 20.0 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0 29.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0

For ø18 For ø20 For ø25 For ø30

Clamping Force (N)

CKQGCKQPCLKQGCLKQP

Guide pin diameter(mm)

ø12.5 to ø13.0ø14.5 to ø30.0ø12.5 to ø13.0ø14.5 to ø30.0

Operating pressure (MPa)0.2

164.9164.9 82.4 82.4

0.3329.8329.8247.3247.3

0.4494.7494.7412.2412.2

0.5659.6659.6577.1577.1

0.6824.5824.5742.0742.0

0.7989.4989.4906.9906.9

0.8

Note 1)

0.9

Note 1)

1.01154

—1071.8

—

1319 —

1236.7 —

1484 —

1401.6—

Note 1)

Model

Note 1) When designing a circuit with an operating pressure that exceeds 0.75 MPa, consider the holding force of the lock since the holding force for the CLKQG/P lock is 982 N. The cylinder should be used below the maximum theoretical holding force because damage, shortening of life, and or an accident may occur due to friction in the lock section or damage from a load which exceeds the lock holding force.

Note 2) Design a circuit taking into consideration that it takes approximately 0.3 seconds from the time an unclamped cylinder starts to operate to the time that the clamping force is generated.

Note 3) Take into consideration the durability of a workpiece because it may be damaged if the clamping force is too great.

Applicable holediameter of workpieceGuide pin shape

Applicable holediameter of workpieceGuide pin shape


GP

GP

98

7) It is possible to use the pneumatic circuit shown below. However, unlock the cylinder before operating. Also, unlock the cylinder first before operating the cylinder in any direc-tion.In the event that unlocking is initially delayed, it will cause product damage and drastic shortening of product life. It is also highly dangerous because there is possibility of the cylinder lurching at high speed. The cylinder must be un-locked before operating it in free direction, as well.

8) When the pneumatic circuit indicated below is used, please remember that the work displacement at the locked posi-tion of the cylinder to the direction that the stroke advances may be a large degree.Depending on the piping length and the exhaust time, the activation of the locking function may be delayed, resulting in a large degree of work displacement in the direction of the advancing stroke.

1. Do not use the cylinder until it is confirmed that the equipment is operating correctly.

After installation, maintenance or replacement, connect the compressed air or electricity and verify that the installation is correct by performing appropriate function and/or leakage tests.

2. Do not dent the cylinder tube or the guide pin parts.Slight deformation will cause a malfunction since the tube I.D. is manufactured with a tight tolerance. Excessive impact will cause damage to the guide pin because it is heat treated.

3. Prevent any foreign materials, such as machin-ing chips, from entering into internal cylinder from the air supply port.When the mounting holes for the cylinder are made, machined chips may enter the cylinder from the air supply port if the cy-linder is left near the installation site. Prevent the machining chips from entering into the cylinder.

4. The opening part of a guide pin should not face in the same direction as oncoming spatter.If the spatter enters the cylinder from the opening part of the guide pin, it will shorten the product life and cause a malfunc-tion.

CautionMounting

Recommended pneumatic circuit

2. Recommended pneumatic circuit for the CLKQG/P series1) Do not use a 3-positioning valve (double check valve, ex-

haust center or pressure center types) for any application because the lock may fail due to unlocking pressure.

2) Install speed controllers for meter-out control.If it used in meter-in control, it may result in malfunction.

3) Be careful of reverse exhaust pressure flow from a com-mon exhaust type manifold.Since the lock may be released due to reverse exhaust pressure flow, use an individual exhaust type manifold or single type valve.

4) Branch off of the compressed air piping for the lock unit be-tween the cylinder and the speed controller.Branching off of another part may shorten the product life.

5) Construct piping so that the piping length from the bran-ched point to the lock unit is short. If it is long, unlocking may not function well, and it may shorten product life of the lock.

6) SMC recommends a 2-position double solenoid valve is used.

Warning1. Recommended pneumatic circuit for the

CKQG/P seriesThe following is an example of a basic meter-out control cir-cuit for operating a cylinder using an air filter, a regulator, a solenoid valve and a speed controller.

Pneumatic Circuit

Recommended pneumatic circuit


GP

GP

B

A

W

)(

)(

)(

)(

B

A

W

)(

)(

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

99

5. Consider the welding point of the guide pin when determining the direction of the clamp arm setting.The clamp arm will be damaged if clamping is performed at the welded point of the guide pin. Therefore, set the clamping direction as illustrated below, so that the welded point is not effected by clamping.

6. When assembling and adjusting the product, begin the task by applying pressure only to the unlocking port (for the CLKQG/P series only).

7. When attaching a cylinder to the equipment, use the tightening torque specified in the below table.

8. Check the auto switch operation when the product is used where welding is performed.

9. When installing a cylinder with an auto switch, secure enough space on the bottom side of the cylinder providing the minimum bending radius for the lead wire to permit better servi-ceability (such as replacement of groove mounting auto switches).

10. Operating manualInstall the products and operate them only after reading the operating manual carefully and understanding its contents. Also, keep the manual where it can be referred to as neces-sary.

1. Before pipingBefore piping, it should be thoroughly blown out with air (flush-ing) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and other debris from inside the pipe.

2. Wrapping of pipe tapeWhen screwing piping or fittings into ports, ensure that chips from the pipe threads or sealing material do not get inside the piping. Also, when the pipe tape is used, leave 1.5 to 2 thread ridges exposed at the end of the threads.

3. Piping length should be short.If the piping to the cylinder is too long, the volume of water va-por in the internal tubing increases beyond that of the internal cylinder due to the generation of water vapor by adiabatic ex-pansion. Since the water vapor stays inside of the tubing with-out being released into the air, repeated operation results in the generation of water. Grease in the cylinder is drained out as it flows away with the water. This action lowers the smooth-ness in the cylinder, resulting in air leakage due to worn out seals, and or malfunction due to increased friction resistance. Please do the following to prevent this problem:1) Tubing from a solenoid valve to a cylinder should be as

short as possible to assure the evacuation of the generated water vapor into the air.As a guide, the air capacity in the cylinder, which when converted to atmospheric pressure x 0.7 should be ≥70% of the piped tubing capacity.

2) Pipe a speed exhaust controller ASV and a quick exhaust valve to a cylinder to exhaust the exhaust pressure directly to the air.

3) Piping port should face downward so that the generated moisture inside tubing does not easily return to the cylin-der.

Caution CautionMounting Piping

Winding direction

Pipe tapeExpose approx. 2 threads

Thread size

M10

M12

Tightening torque (N·m)

20 to 25

35 to 42

Welded point

Welded point

Clamp arm

Clamping direction

Guide pin


GP

GP

100

1. If spatter enters the cylinder body, remove it by first detaching the covers. Do not scratch or make dents on the sliding parts of the pis-ton rod by striking it with other objects or grasping them with other objects. Since the outside diameter of a piston rod is manufactured with a tight tolerance, even a slight deformation can cause an operation malfunction.Any scratches and dents on the sliding parts of the piston rod can cause damage to the seals, resulting in air leakage.

2. To release the cover, insert a flat head screw-driver in the notch on the cover and apply force.If a finger is used to remove the cover, the edge of the cover’s notch may injure the finger.

Caution

3. Drain flushingRemove drainage from air filters regularly. (Refer to the specifications.)

1. Lubrication for the CKQG/P cylinderThe cylinder is lubricated at the factory, and can be used with-out further lubrication.In the event that lubricant is used, install a lubricator in the cir-cuit and use Class 1 turbine oil (without additives) ISO VG32. A malfunction can occur due to loss of the original lubricant if lubrication is stopped in the future. Therefore, once lubrication is applied, it must be used continuously.

2. Lubrication for the CLKQG/P cylinderDo not lubricate because it may considerably lower the lock-ing performance.

CautionLubrication

Maintenance

Handling


Mounting1. In order to fully use the capacity of magnetic field



the cylinder, change the auto switch position to fall within the operational ranges shown in the graphs on the back of page 102, or move the welding cable away from the cylin-der.


4) Consult SMC when a welding cable and welding gun elec-trodes (something energized with secondary current) are near multiple switches.

2. In an environment where spatter directly hits the lead wire, cover the lead wire with protective tub-ing. Use protective tubing I.D. ø8 or more that has excellent heat resistance and flexibility.


Contact CapacityNever operate a load that exceeds the maximum contact capacity of the auto switch.

Series CKQ /CLKQ Specific Product Precautions 5Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to the back of pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A).

GP

GP

Cover (4 sides)

Flat head screwdriver

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

101

Series CKQ /CLKQ Specific Product Precautions 6Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to the back of pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A).

GP

GP




0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

Dangerous range

l1

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

Dangerous range

l1

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

Dangerous range

l2

l2

l2

l1

l2

l1l1

l1

l2

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

0 5000 10000 15000 20000

Welding current (A)

Saf

ety

dist

ance

(m

m)

Dangerous range

l2

Operable range

Operable range

Operable range

Operable range

102

1. Do not unlock when an external force, such as a load or spring force is being applied.This is very dangerous because the cylinder will move sud-denly. Take the following steps.1) Restore the air pressure in the B line of the pneumatic cir-

cuit to operating pressure. Once restored, gradually let the air pressure drop.

2) If air pressure cannot be used, prevent cylinder movement with a lifting device such as a jack, then release the lock.

2. After all safety precautions have been con-firmed, perform the manual release by follow-ing the steps shown below.Carefully confirm that no one is inside the load movement range, that there is no danger even if the load moves suddenly, etc.

1) Remove the dust cover.2) Insert a flat head screwdriver on the rod end of the manual

unlocking lever as shown in the figure above, and lightly push the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (rod end) to unlock.

WarningOperation

How to unlock manually

Dust cover

Securing bolt for the dust coverFlat head screwdriver

Unlocking lever

Lock ring

Head endRod end

Locking direction


GP

GP

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

103

GrommetAuto Switch Specifications

It is possible to use in an en-vironment which generates a magnetic field disturbance (AC magnetic field).

The optimum operating posi-tion can be determined by the color of the light. (Red → Green ← Red)

PrecautionsCaution

For single-phase AC welding machinesNot applicable for DC inverter welding machines (including rectifying type) and or condenser type welding.

OFF

ON

D-P4DWSC

D-P4DWSE

Indicator light/Display method

Auto Switch Internal Circuit

PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load current

Internal voltage drop

Leakage current

Operating time

Indicator light

Standards

24 VDC relay, PLC

24 VDC (20 to 28 VDC)

6 to 40 mA or less

5 V or less

1 mA or less at 24 VDC

40 ms or less

CE marking

Operating position······Red LED illuminates when turned ON.Optimum operating position······Green LED illuminates when turned ON.

D-P4DWS (With indicator light)D-P4DWSC D-P4DWSE

• Lead wire — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable, ø6, 0.5 mm2, 2 cores, 300 mm• Impact resistance — Switch: 1000 m/s2, Connector: 300 m/s2

• Insulation resistance — 50 MΩ or more at 500 VDC Mega (between lead wire and case)• Withstand voltage — 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)• Ambient temperature — –10 to 60°C• Enclosure — IEC60529 standard IP67, JIS 0920 waterproof construction

Magnetic Field Resistance

Dimensions

If the current of the AC welding machine is 16000 A or lower, the switch can be used, even if the distance between the welding conductor (gun cable) and the cylinder or auto switch is 0 mm.Please contact SMC when the AC welding current exceeds 16000 A.

Connector pin

Unit: mm

13

30032 4

9.2

8.8

ø6

6

6

120

ø14

44

Most sensitive position

D-P4DW (DC24V)SMC

Connector size M12

2 x ø3.5 mounting hole

Indicator light

Heat shrink tube Note)

43

2 1

Note) D-P4DWSC = “SC 3-4”, D-P4DWSE = “SE 1-4”

Weight Unit: g

Auto switch model35 35

D-P4DWSC D-P4DWSE

Magnetic Field Resistant 2-Color Indication Solid State SwitchD-P4DWSC/D-P4DWSE(Lead wire connection: Pre-wired connector)

NO.3 (OUT ±)

NO.4 (OUT )

NO.1 (OUT ±)

NO.4 (OUT )

±

±

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

tS

witc

hm

ain

circ

uit

Operating range

RedIndication

Green Red

Optimum operating position

For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at www.smcworld.com.

104

Auto Switch Specifications

It is possible to use in an en-vironment which generates a magnetic field disturbance (AC magnetic field).


Grommet

PrecautionsCaution


OFF

ON

D-P4DWL/Z




Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Operating time

Indicator light

Standards

24 VDC relay, PLC

24 VDC (20 to 28 VDC)

6 to 40 mA or less

5 V or less


40 ms or less

CE marking


D-P4DWL/Z (With indicator light)D-P4DWL D-P4DWZ

• Lead wire — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable, ø6, 0.5 mm2, 2 cores (brown, blue), D-P4DWL: 3 m, D-P4DWZ: 5 m

• Impact resistance — 1000 m/s2

• Insulation resistance — 50 MΩ or more at 500 VDC Mega (between lead wire and case)• Withstand voltage — 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)• Ambient temperature — –10 to 60°C• Enclosure — IEC60529 standard IP67, JIS 0920 waterproof construction


Dimensions


Unit: mm

3000 (5000)

ø6

13

32 4

9.2

8.8

6

61

20

D-P4DW (DC24V0SMC

2 x ø3.5 mounting hole

Indicator light


Weight

Auto switch model

0.5

3

5

Unit: g

Lead wire length(m)

D-P4DW—

150

244

Magnetic Field Resistant 2-Color Indication Solid State SwitchD-P4DWL/Z

OUT (±) Brown

OUT ( ) Blue±

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t


Operating range

RedIndication

Green Red


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

105

Auto Switch SpecificationsGrommet

PrecautionsCaution

Cylinder with a strong integrated magnet must be used.


Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load current range

Contact protection circuit


Indicator light

PLC

24 VDC

8 to 20 mA

Built-in

6 V or less


D-P79WSE

Dimensions Unit: mm

• Lead wire — Oilproof, fire resistant heavy-duty vinyl cable, ø6, 0.75 mm2, 2 cores (300 mm)• Impact resistance — 300 m/s2

• Insulation resistance — 50 MΩ or more at 500 VDC Mega (between lead wire and case)• Withstand voltage — 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)• Ambient temperature — –10 to 60°C• Enclosure — IEC60529 standard IP67, waterproof (JIS C0920), oilproof construction

44

ø6

16

14.6

300532

5

4

20


Indicator light

Heat shrink tube Note)

SM

C

Note) D-P79WSE = “SE 1 4-”

2 x ø3.4 through

2 x 2 x ø6

MADE

IN JA

PAN

DC

24V

D-P7

9W

Counterbore depth 2.4

D-P79WSE

Connector size M12

ø14

Soft resin mold surface(Mounting surface for the auto switch mounting bracket side)

Connector pin

43

2 1

CautionPlease be careful of the mounting direction.The soft resin mold surface must be directed to the auto switch mounting bracket side.

D-P79WSE


NO.1 (+)Choke coil

Lead switch

NO.4 (–)

Zener diode

LED

OFF

ON

Standards CE marking


Weight

Auto switch model

Unit: g

D-P79WSE100


Magnetic Field Resistant 2-Color Indication Reed SwitchD-P79WSE(Lead wire connection: Pre-wired connector)


Ligh

t circ

uit


Operating range

RedIndication

Green Red

106

Grommet

PrecautionsCaution


D-P74L/ZAuto Switch Internal Circuit

• Lead wire — Oilproof, fire resistant heavy-duty vinyl cable, ø6.8, 0.75 mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue),D-P74L: 3 m, D-P74Z: 5 m

• Impact resistance — 300 m/s2

• Insulation resistance — 50 MΩ or more at 500 VDC Mega (between lead wire and case)• Withstand voltage — 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)• Ambient temperature — –10 to 60°C• Enclosure — IEC60529 standard IP67, waterproof (JIS C0920), oilproof construction∗ Indicate “L” for 3 m lead wire and “Z” for 5 m lead wire at the end of an auto switch part number.Note) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be

impossible to recognize it under 2.5 mA, but there would be no problem only with 1 mA or more in terms of the contact output.

Dimensions

Surge absorber

Leadswitch

Chokecoil

Resistor

LED

Zener diode

Brown(+)

Blue(–)

Auto switch model

Electrical entry

Application

Load voltage

Max. load voltage/Load current range


Internal voltage drop (internal resistance)

Leakage current

Indicator light

Standards

Grommet

Relay, PLC

Built-in

2.4 V or less

0

Red LED illuminates when turned ON.

CE marking

D-P74L/Z (With indicator light)D-P74L D-P74Z

24 VDC

5 to 40 mA

100 VDC

5 to 20 mA

Unit: mm

ø6.

8

13.6

532

16

20

4

5

Indicator light

2 x 2 x ø6


2 x ø3.4 through


SM

C


Weight Unit: g

Auto switch model

3

5

189

320

D-P74

Lead wire length(m)

Magnetic Field Resistant Reed SwitchD-P74L/D-P74Z

For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at www.smcworld.com.Auto Switch Specifications

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

107

Grommet

PrecautionsCaution


D-P74-376Auto Switch Internal Circuit

Dimensions

Auto switch model

Electrical entry

Application

Load voltage

Max. load voltage/Load current range


Internal voltage drop (internal resistance)

Leakage current

Operating time

Indicator light

Standards

Grommet

Relay, PLC

24 VDC

5 to 20 mA

Built-in

2 V or less

0

1.2 ms


CE marking


D-P74-376 (With indicator light)D-P74-376

Unit: mm

500

ø6

20

4

44.5

16

532

5

13.6


Indicator light


2 x 2 x ø6

SM

C

2 x ø3.4 through

Chokecoil

Leadswitch

LED

LED

Surge absorber

NO.3 (±) NO.4 (±)

Connector pin

43

2 1

Connector size M12

ø14

Weight Unit: g

Auto switch model60

D-P74-376

Magnetic Field Resistant Reed SwitchD-P74-376

Auto Switch SpecificationsFor details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at www.smcworld.com.

• Lead wire — Oilproof, fire resistant heavy-duty vinyl cable, ø6, 0.5 mm2, 2 cores, 0.5 m• Impact resistance — 300 m/s2

• Insulation resistance — 50 MΩ or more at 500 VDC Mega (between lead wire and case)• Withstand voltage — 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)• Ambient temperature — –10 to 60°C• Enclosure — IEC60529 standard IP67, waterproof (JIS C0920), oilproof constructionNote) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be


108

Series MK2T/MK2/MKRotary Clamp Cylinders

3 times the allowable moment of inertia∗ Comparison with our MK2 seriesø32, ø40

10-4

10-3

10-2

10-1

50 100 200Piston speed [mm/s]

Allo

wab

le m

omen

t of i

nert

ia [k

g·m

2 ]

Standard arm

MK (Standard)

MK2 (Heavy duty type)

MK2T (Double guide type)

Improved non-rotating accuracy and rotation angle!(Series MK2T)

Rotation mechanism uses 2 guide rollers.

Double Guide TypeSeries MK2Tø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

Heavy Duty TypeSeries MK2ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40ø50, ø63

StandardSeries MKø12, ø16, ø20, ø25ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

Interchangeable mounting pitch(MK, MK2)

Small auto switches mountable on 4 surfaces ∗ Bore size ø20, ø25

Guide roller

Piston rod

Rod cover

Horizontal mounting possibleHorizontal mounting possible

P.112

P.120

P.130

Non-rotating accuracy: ±0.9°⇒±0.5°(Clamp part)

Rotation angle: 90°±10°⇒90°±5°∗ Values for ø32, ø40. Comparison with our MK2 series

Rotation mechanism

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

109

Ι (Moment of inertia)

Series MK/MK2/MK2TModel Selection

SeriesItem

Max. piston speed Note) [mm/s]

Non-rotationg accuracy(Clamp part)

200

180

±1.4°

±1.2°

ø12, ø16

ø20, ø25

ø32 to ø63

ø12

ø16

ø20, ø25

ø32, ø40

ø50, ø63

±1.2°

±0.9°

±0.7°

90°±10°

Not allowed

200

MK MK2 MK2T

—

200

—

—

—

—

—

±1.0°

±0.5°

±0.5°

90°±5°

Allowed

Note) “Maximum piston speed” indicates the maximum speed possible when employing a standard arm.

Rotation angle Rotation angle

During unclamping(Extension end)

Counterclockwise


Clockwise

øDArm: Ι1

Arm weight: m1

Clamp jig: Ι2

Clamp jig weight: m2

Example) Find the moment of inertia of the arm.

Find the moment of inertia of the clamp jig.

(Calculation example) Cylinder bore size ø32 A = 0.07 m, B = 0.02 m, S = 0.012 m, L = 0.045 m, D = 0.02 m m1 = 0.16 kg, m2 = 0.15 kg

Find the actual moment of inertia.Ι = Ι1 + Ι2 = (1.6 + 3.0) x 10–4 = 4.6 x 10–4 kg·m2

Calculation Example (ø32, clamp stroke 10 mm)

AB

L

S

Ι1 = m1 · + m1 · – SA2 + B2

12A2

Ι1 = 0.16 x + 0.16 x = 1.6 x 10–4 kg·m2– 0.0120.072 + 0.022

12

2

0.072

Ι2 = 0.15 x + 0.15 x 0.0452 = 3.0 x 10–4 kg·m20.022

8

Ι2 = m2 · + m2 · L2D2

8

1.0 x 10–1

1.0 x 10–2

1.0 x 10–3

4.6 x 10–4

1.0 x 10–4

10 100

MK

MK2

MK2T

120 200

Bore size ø32, ø40

Maximum piston speed [mm/s]

Allo

wab

le m

omen

t of i

nter

tia [k

g·m

2 ]

1000

[Actual calculation example]

SeriesMKMK2

Max. piston speed120 mm/s200 mm/s

Average piston speed Note 1)

75 mm/s125 mm/s

Stroke total

25 mm

Stroke time Note 2)

0.35 sec.0.2 sec.

Note 1) Average piston speed = Maximum piston speed ÷ 1.6.Note 2) Please use the stroke speeds indicated above.

During clamping (Retraction end)Non-rotating accuracy

2

Rotation angle

Horizontal mounting

110

Moment of Intertia


Allo

wab

le m

omen

t of i

nter

tia [k

g·m

2 ]

ø20, ø25

10–5

10–4

10–3

10–2

10–1

50 100 200

MK

MK2

MK2T

ø20, ø25 Standard arm single unit


Allo

wab

le m

omen

t of i

nter

tia [k

g·m

2 ]

ø50, ø63

10–4

10–3

10–2

10–1

50 100 200

MK

MK2

MK2T



Allo

wab

le m

omen

t of i

nter

tia [k

g·m

2 ]

ø12, ø16

10–6

10–5

10–4

10–3

50 100 200

MK

ø12 Standard arm single unit

ø16 Standard arm single unit


Allo

wab

le m

omen

t of i

nter

tia [k

g·m

2 ]

ø32, ø40

10–4

10–3

10–2

10–1

50 100 200

MK

MK2

MK2T


Note) Maximum piston speed is equivalent to approximately 1.6x the average piston speed. (Rough indication)

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

111

Model Selection

Rotary Clamp Cylinder: Standard

ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63

How to Order

Series MK

M—

Body Option Manufacturable RangeBore size

ø12, ø16ø20 to ø63

Nil

F—

N

MF—

FN—

MK 10Rotary clamp cylinderStandard


R20A

NilS

2 pcs.1 pc.

F

Auto switch type

∗ For applicable auto switch models, refer to the below table.

Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)

Body optionNilMFN

Standard (Female thread)Rod end width across flats ∗

With boss on head end ∗

With arm

Rotary direction(Unclamp → Clamp)

ClockwiseCounterclockwise

RL

Bore size12162025


32405063


Clamp strokeApplicable bore size

ø12 to ø40ø12 to ø63ø50 to ø63

Clamp stroke10 mm20 mm50 mm

Symbol102050

Mounting bracketApplicable bore size (mm)Mounting

Through-hole/Both endstapped common (Standard)Both ends tappedThrough-holeHead end flange

Symbol

B ø12, ø16

ø20 to ø63ABG

∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) M9NW1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM3 m ·········· L (Example) M9NWL5 m ·········· Z (Example) M9NWZ

None ·········· N (Example) J79CN

∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.∗∗ For D-P4DW, ø40 to ø63 are available.∗∗ Only D-P4DW type is assembled at the time of shipment.

∗ Regarding body option manufacturable range, refer to the below table.

∗ Head end flange is equipped with a boss mounting. Be sure to specify body option “F”.

M9BW

M threadRc

NPTG

ø12 to ø25

ø32 to ø63

Port thread type

Nil

TNTF

∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 129 for details.∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.∗ When mounting models D-M9(V), M9W(V), M9A(V), and A9(V) with between ø32 and ø50 on sides other than the port side, please order a switch mounting bracket

separately as per the instructions on page 128.∗ Auto switches are included, (but not assembled).

Made to Order(Refer to page113 and 151.)

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to page 140 through to 150 for further information on auto switches.

Type Special functionElectrical

entryWiring

(Output)

Load voltage Lead wire length (m)0.5(Nil)

3(L)

5(Z)

None(N)

Applicableload

Pre-wiredconnector

1(M)

Auto switch model

Perpendicular In-lineDC AC

ø20 to ø63ø12, ø16 ø20 to ø63ø12, ø165 V,12 V

12 V

5 V,12 V12 V5 V,12 V12 V

5 V, 12 V—

—

———

————————

—

IC circuit

—

IC circuit

—

IC circuit

—IC circuit

—

————

——

—

M9NVM9PVM9BV

M9NWVM9PWVM9BWVM9NAVM9PAVM9BAV

——

J79C

——

M9NM9PM9B—

M9NWM9PWM9BWM9NAM9PAM9BA

F79FP4DW∗∗

Diagnostic indication(2-color indication)

Water resistant(2-color indication)

Yes

Connector

Grommet

Grommet

24 V —Relay,PLC

3-wire (NPN)3-wire (PNP)

2-wire


2-wire3-wire (NPN)3-wire (PNP)

2-wire4-wire

2-wire (No polarity)

—

Relay,PLC

—

200 V100 V

100 V or less—

24 V or less—

24 V

—3-wire

(NPN equivalent)

2-wireNoYesNoYes

YesGrommet

Connector

Grommet

5V

—12 V

5 V, 12 V12 V

5 V, 12 V—Diagnostic indication

(2-color indication)

Diagnostic output(2-color indication)

Magnetic field resistant(2-color indication)

—

———

—

—

———

—

—

——————

IC circuit

—

IC circuit—

IC circuit—

—

——————

A96V

A93VA90V

A96

A93A90———

—

———

A72

A73CA80CA79W

— A72H

Indica

tor lig

ht

Ree

d s

wit

chS

olid

sta

te s

wit

ch

112

XB6 Head resistant cylinder (150°C)Symbol Description

Made to Order(For details, refer to page 151.)

During unclamping(Extension end)80° to 100°(90°±10°)L type


80° to 100°(90°±10°)R type

Clamp part

During clamping (Retraction end)

Non-rotating accuracy±0.7° to 1.4°

Rotary Angle

Bore size (mm)1216202532405063

Part no.MK-A012MK-A016

MK-A020

MK-A032

MK-A050

Accessories

Clamp bolt,Hexagon sockethead cap screw,Hexagon nut,Spring washer

Option/Arm

ActionRotation angle Note 1)

Rotary direction Note 2)

Rotary stroke (mm)Clamp stroke (mm)Theoretical clamp force (N) Note 3)

FluidProof pressureOperating pressure range


LubricationPiping port sizeMountingCushionStroke length tolerancePiston speedNon-rotating accuracy (Clamp part) Note 1)

Bore size (mm)Double acting

90° ±10°Clockwise, Counterclockwise

Air1.5 MPa

0.1 to 1 MPaWithout auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)

With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)Non-lube

Rubber bumper

50 to 200 mm/s

12 16 20 25 32 40 50

7.5 9.5 15 1910, 20 20, 50

63

40 75 100 185 300

Through-hole/Bothends tapped common Both ends tapped, Through-hole, Head end flange

525 825

±1.4° ±1.2° ±0.9° ±0.7°

M5 x 0.8

1400

+0.6–0.4

Rc1/8, NPT1/8, G1/8 Rc1/4, NPT1/4, G1/4

Note 1) Refer to “Rotary Angle” figure.Note 2) Direction of rotation viewed from the rod end when the piston rod is retracting.Note 3) At 0.5 MPa.

Specifications

Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (cm2) x 100 Operating directionR: Rod end (Clamp)H: Head end (Unclamp)

Bore size(mm)

12

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

Rod size(mm)

Operatingdirection

6

8

12

12

16

16

20

20

RHRHRHRHRHRHRHRH

Piston area(cm2)

0.8 1.1 1.5

2 2 3

3.7 4.9

6 8

10.512.516.519.628 31.2

0.324 33 45 60

60.8 90.2112 149 182 243 319 380 502 596 851 948

0.5 40 55 75 100 100 149 185 245 300 400 525 625 825 98014001560

0.7 56 77 105 140 139 208 258 341 418 557 731 8701149136519502172

1.0 80 110 150 200 200 298 370 490 600 800105012501648196128013121


Unit: N

Theoretical Output

Clamp stroke(mm)102050

Bore size (mm)

Unit: g

127087—

16100123—

20250290—

25280320—

32500525—

40595640—

50—

11001350

63—

15201805

Weight/Through-hole Mounting

Bore size (mm)Both ends tappedRod end width across flatsWith boss on head endWith armHead end flange(including mounting bolt)

Unit: g

Calculation: (Example) MKG20-10RFN• Standard calculation: MKB20-10R• Extra weight calculation: Both ends tapped

Head end flangeWith boss on head endWith arm

250 g6 g

133 g2 g

100 g491 g

12———13—

16———32—

20 6 10 2100133

25 7 10 3100153

32 7 21 5200166

40 6 21 7200198

50 7 46 13350345

63 17 46 25350531

Additional Weight

Bore size (mm)202532405063

Part no.MK-F020MK-F025MK-F032MK-F040MK-F050MK-F063

Accessories

Centering location ring,Set pin,Bolt for cylinderbody

Mounting Bracket/Flange

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

113

Rotary Clamp Cylinder: Standard Series MK

No.12345

6

7891011121314

Description MaterialAluminum alloyAluminum alloyAluminum alloy

Copper bearing materialStainless steelStainless steelCarbon steel

UrethaneCopper alloy

Stainless steel—

Chromium molybdenum steelSpring steel

Stainless steelCarbon tool steel

NoteHard anodizedHard anodized

ø32 to ø63 onlyNitrided

ø12 to ø25 Nitridedø32 to ø63 Heated, Nickel plated

ø20 to ø32 onlyExcept ø12, ø16

Sharp end section: 90°

Used at ø12, ø16, ø32 to ø63

Rod coverCylinder tubePistonBushingGuide pin

Piston rod

BumperRing nutScraper pressureMagnetHexagon socket head set screwRound R-type retaining ringParallel pinC-type retaining ring

Component PartsNo.15161718192021

22

232425262728

Description MaterialRolled steel

Chromium molybdenum steelRolled steel

Chromium molybdenum steelHard steel

Aluminum alloyRolled steel

Aluminum alloyPhosphor bronze

NBRNBRNBRNBR

Chromiummolybdenum steel

Note

Except ø12, ø16Except ø12, ø16

ø12, ø16 only

Except ø12, ø16

ArmClamp boltHexagon nutHexagon socket head cap screwSpring washerCentering location ringFlangeHexagon socket head cap screw

Spacer for switch typeCoil scraperPiston sealGasketRod sealO-ring

Component Parts

ø20, ø25: 2ø32 to ø63: 4

Qty.

Replacement Parts: Seal Kitø12

MK-12-PSø16

MK-16-PSø20 to ø32

Not able to disassembleSet of nos. above @4 @5 @6 @7 @8

ø40MK-40-PS

ø50MK-50-PS

ø63MK-63-PS

Bore size (mm)Kit no.Content

∗ Seal kit includes @4 to @8. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size (except ø20 to ø32).

Name plate

@3

@7 r i !1 t q @6 u !0 @5 w ey !2 @4 o

!6

!7

!5

!8

!9

@8

!4@1 @2

@0

y

!3

Construction

MK12, 16 MK20, 25

MK32

MK40 to 63

With arm (N)

Rod end width across flats (M)

With boss on head end (F)

Head end flange (G)

114

Series MK

115

Note) Maximum piston speed (mm/s)

Mom

ent o

f ine

rtia

(kg

·m2 )

Operatingrange

Operatingrange

MK50/63

MK32/40

MK20/25

MK12/16

MK50/63

MK32/40

MK20/25

MK16

Cylinder model C D8 8 8 8

10

9

10.5

7

6.511.5

10.5

50 60 50 60 75 85 75 85 85 95 75 85 95130100130

Mounting bolt sizeM3 x 50 LM3 x 60 LM3 x 50 LM3 x 60 LM5 x 75 LM5 x 85 LM5 x 75 LM5 x 85 LM5 x 85 LM5 x 95 LM5 x 75 LM5 x 85 LM6 x 95 LM6 x 130 LM8 x 100 LM8 x 130 L

MKB12-10MKB12-20MKB16-10MKB16-20MKB20-10MKB20-20MKB25-10MKB25-20MKB32-10MKB32-20MKB40-10MKB40-20MKB50-20MKB50-50MKB63-20MKB63-50

Precautions

Clamp Arm Mounting

Precautions for Designing and Mounting Arms

1. Use a clamp arm that is available as an option.To fabricate a clamp arm, make sure that the allowable bending moment and the inertial moment will be within the specified range.If a clamp arm that exceeds the specified value is installed, the internal mechanism in the cylinder could become damaged.

Caution

Ensuring Safety1. If one side of the piston is pressurized by sup-

plying air with the clamp arm attached, the piston will move vertically while the clamp arm rotates. This operation could be hazardous to personnel, as their hands or feet could get caught by the clamp arm, or could lead to equipment damage. Therefore, it is important to secure as a danger zone a cylindrical area with the length of the clamp arm as its radius, and the stroke plus 20 mm as its height.

Installation and Adjustment/Clamp Arm Removal and Reinstallation

1. During the removal or reinstallation of the clamp arm, make sure to use a wrench or a vise to secure the clamp arm before remov-ing or tightening the bolt.This is to prevent the bolt tightening torque from being applied to the piston rod, which could damage the cylinder’s internal mechanism.

Mounting Bolt for MKB

Note) Be sure to use a flat washer to mount ø12 and ø16 cylinders via through-holes.

When arms are to be made separately, their length and weight should be within the following range.

1. Allowable bending momentUse the arm length and operating pressure within Graph (1) for allowable bending mo-ment loaded piston rod.

2. Moment of inertiaWhen the arm is long and heavy, damage of internal parts may be caused due to iner-tia. Use the inertia moment and cylinder speed within Graph (2) based on arm require-ments.

Graph (1)

Graph (2)

When arm length is 8 cm, pressure should be less thanMK20/25: 0.45 MPaMK32/40: 0.55 MPaMK50/63: 0.8 MPa.

When arm’s moment of inertia is 3 x 10–4 kg·m2, cylinder speed should be less thanMK20/25: 65 mm/sMK32/40: 150 mm/s.For calculating moment of inertia, refer to page 110, 111, 154.Note) Maximum piston speed is equivalent to

approximately 1.6x the average piston speed. (Rough indication)

• To attach and detach the arm to and from the piston rod, fix the arm with a wrench or vise and then tighten the bolt.(If an excessive force is applied in the rotary direction, it may bring about the damage to the internal mechanism.)Refer to the following table for the tightening torque for mounting.

Bore size (mm)1216

20, 2532, 4050, 63

Proper tightening torque0.4 to 0.6 2 to 2.4

4 to 6 8 to 1014 to 16

(N·m)

Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety In-structions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Com-mon Precautions.

Arm

leng

th l

(cm

)


Hexagon wrenchkey

Arm

Wrench

Mounting bolt

Mounting: Mounting bolt for through-hole type is available.Ordering: Add the word “MKB” to the mounting bolt size.Example) M5 x 75 L (MKB)

Flatwasher

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l


U

3

Q + 2 x Clamp stroke

4

3 5.5

R + Clamp stroke

S

øO

h9

ø12

2 x M5 x 0.8(Piping port)

8 to 18

E F25

K

A

LB

C

–0.110–0.2

2 x ø5.5 through2 x 2 x ø9 counterbore depth 7

M8 x 1.25Effective thread depth 11

K

L

R + Clamp stroke(Basic)

1010

M6 x 1.0

Auto switchMinimum bending radiusof lead wire 10

E effective thread depth F2 x 4 x M4 x 0.7Effective depth 7

2 x M5 x 0.8

4 x

ø3.

5

Flat washer4 pcs.

35.5 + Clamp stroke

48 + 2 x Clamp stroke2 x 4 x ø6.5Counterbore depth 4

R thread

M + Clamp stroke

øB

D

øG

H9

øH

C

A

N

S

O PQ

Model

MKB20MKB25

A36

40

B46.8

52

C36

40

E49

54.5

F25.5

28.5

K L Oh9 Q72.5

73.5

R62

63

S31

32

U4

5

0–0.052

0–0.052

20

23

13.5

16

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

7.5

8

Note) Dimension when the rod is extended is to be added to clamp stroke plus rotary stroke.

(mm)

A B C D E F G H25

29

32

38

15.5

20

5

7

M3 x 0.5

M5 x 0.8

5.5

6.5

11h9

14h9

6

8

MKB12MKB16

Model0

–0.043

0–0.043

(mm)

Model M18.5

21.5

N 8

11

O29

36

P20

25

Q4

5

RM3 x 0.5

M4 x 0.7

S 8

11

MKB12-NMKB16-N

(mm)

Through-hole (Basic): MKB

Both ends tapped: MKA

ø12

ø20, ø25

ø16

With arm: MK -N1216

Dimensions: ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

2 x ø3.3 depth 3+0.15+0.05

116

Series MK

ø

ø

Model

MKG20MKG25

B60

64

C39

42

D E±0.1

±0.1

25.5

28

±0.15

±0.15

48

52

(mm)

Model

MK20-FMK25-F

Ah90

–0.043

0–0.043

13

15

(mm)

12 to 22

R + Clamp stroke

+0.152 x ø6.3+0.05

(Special cap bolt)2 x M6 x 1.0

2 x ø6.6

42.5 + Clamp stroke

D

C

E B

Head end flange: MKG With boss on head end

Rod end width across flats: MK -M2025With arm: MK -N20

25

22 + Clamp stroke

2 x ø5.2

M6 x 1.0C

K

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

117


Model

MKAMKA50MKA63

AM6 x 1.0

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

B10

14

18

3240

Note 1) Above figures are for the D-M9, M9W, M9A, A9.Note 2) Dimension when the rod is extended is to be added to clamp stroke plus rotary stroke.


(mm)

(mm)

MKB32MKB40MKB50MKB63

45

52

64

77

60

69

86

103

34

40

50

60

M6 x 10

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

10

14

18

5.5

5.5

6.6

9

9 depth 7

9 depth 7

11 depth 8

14 depth 10.5

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

M12 x 1.75

M12 x 1.75

12

12

15

15

14

14

19

19

4.5

5

7

7

71.5

65

76.5

80

37

29.5

34

35

7.5

8

10.5

10.5

16

16

20

20

3

3

3.5

3.5

6.5

6.5

7.5

7.5

–0.1–0.2

–0.1–0.2

–0.1–0.2

–0.1–0.2

14

14

17

17

0–0.062

0–0.062

30

30

37

48

0–0.062

0–0.062

±0.15

±0.15

20

24

30

35

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

7

7

8

9

±0.15

±0.15

93.5

94.5

112

115

A B C D M NG H I J K L O P Q R S T UV

TN— TFX Yh9 ZModel

Rc1/8

Rc1/8

Rc1/4

Rc1/4

NPT1/8

NPT1/8

NPT1/4

NPT1/4

G1/8

G1/8

G1/4

G1/4

K

L

(ø3.3)TS


R + Clamp stroke

øU

Z

øY

h9

5.5

X

Minimum lead wire bending radius 10

Auto switch

2 x V

K

CO

P

L

A

øB

I thread effective depth J

2 x 4 x øH counterbore

4 x øG through

2 x ø3.3 depth 3+0.15+0.05

DC

R + Clamp stroke(Basic)

Through-hole (Basic): MKB

Both ends tapped: MKA

Series MK

118

GC H

+0.152 x ø6.3+0.05

F + Clamp strokeC + Clamp stroke

2 x øG

øB

A

D

F E

Model

MKG32MKG40MKG50MKG63

A8

8

9

9

B 65

72

89

108

C48

54

67

80

F5.5

5.5

6.6

9

D E GM6 x 1.0

M6 x 1.0

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

±0.1

±0.1

34

40

50

60

±0.1

±0.1

±0.15

±0.15

56

62

76

92

±0.15

±0.15

Model

MK32-FMK40-FMK -F

Ah90

–0.052

0–0.052

0–0.062

21

28

355063

A18

18

22

22

B67

67

88

88

C20

20

22

22

D45

45

65

65

F35.5

43

53

52.5

G

15 to 25

30 to 40

Model

MK32-NMK40-NMK50-NMK63-N

HM8 x 1.25

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

A6

6

8

8

B14

14

18

18

C53.5

61

77

76.5

D36

36

46

46

E18

18

23

23

F 9

9

11.5

11.5

G6.2

6.2

8.2

8.2

Model

MK32-MMK40-MMK50-MMK63-M

(mm) (mm)

(mm) (mm)

Head end flange: MKG With boss on head end

With arm Rod end width across flats


4 x G (Special cap bolt)

4 x øFR + Clamp strokeE B

B D

øA

h9

D

CA

A

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

119

Rotary Clamp Cylinder: Heavy Duty Type

ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63Series MK2

MK2 10Rotary clamp cylinderHeavy duty type


R20B

NilS

2 pcs.1 pc.

F

Auto switch type


Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)

Body optionNilFN

Standard (Female thread)With boss on head endWith arm



RL

Bore size202532

20 mm25 mm32 mm

405063

40 mm50 mm63 mm

Clamp strokeClamp stroke

10 mm20 mm50 mm

Applicable bore sizeø20 to ø40ø20 to ø63ø50 to ø63

Symbol102050

Mounting bracketThrough-hole/Both ends tapped common (Standard)Head end flange

BG

M9BW

M threadRc

NPTG

ø20, ø25

ø32 to ø63

Port thread type

Nil

TNTF

∗ Head end flange is equipped with a boss mounting. Be sure to specify body option “F”.


—

Relay,PLC

—

200 V100 V

100 V or less—

24 V or less—

24 V

—3-wire

(NPN equivalent)

2-wireNoYesNoYes

Yes

Connector

5 V

—12 V

5 V, 12 V12 V

5 V, 12 V—

—

———

—

—

———

—

—

——————

IC circuit

—

IC circuit—

IC circuit—

—

——————

A96V

A72A93VA90VA73CA80CA79W

A96

A72HA93A90———Grommet

Type Special function Electricalentry

Wiring(Output)

Load voltage

DC AC

Lead wire length (m)0.5(Nil)

3(L)

5(Z)

None(N)

Applicableload

Pre-wiredconnector

1(M)

Auto switch model

PerpendicularIn-line

ø40 to ø63ø20 to ø32

Yes

Connector


2-wire



2-wire4-wire


24 V —Relay,PLC

P4DW∗∗—

5 V,12 V

12 V

5 V,12 V12 V5 V,12 V12 V

5 V, 12 V—

—

———

————————

—

IC circuit

—

IC circuit

—

IC circuit

—IC circuit

—

————

——

M9NVM9PVM9BVJ79C


——

M9NM9PM9B

—M9NWM9PWM9BWM9NAM9PAM9BAF79F

How to Order



Grommet

Grommet

Grommet




Indica

tor lig

ht

Ree

d s

wit

chS

olid

sta

te s

wit

ch




∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 129 for details.∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.∗ When mounting models D-M9(V), M9W(V), M9A(V), and A9(V) with between ø32 and ø50 on sides other than the port side, please order a switch mounting bracket

separately as per the instructions on page 128.∗ Auto switches are included, (but not assembled).

120

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

121



80° to 100°(90°±10°)R type

Clamp part



Bore size (mm)202532405063

Part no.MK2-F020MK2-F025MK2-F032MK2-F040MK2-F050MK2-F063

Accessories

Centering location ring,Set pin,Bolt for cylinderbody


Bore size (mm)202532405063

Part no.

MK-A020

MK-A032

MK-A050

Accessories


Option/Arm

Action

Rotation angle Note 1)


Rotary stroke (mm)

Clamp stroke (mm)

Theoretical clamp force (N) Note 3)

Fluid

Proof pressure

Operating pressure range


Lubrication

Piping port size

Mounting

Cushion


Piston speed

Non-rotating accuracy (Clamp part)

Bore size (mm)

Double acting


Air

1.5 MPa

0.1 to 1 MPa

Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)

With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)

Non-lube

Through-hole/Both ends tapped common, Head end flange

Rubber bumper

50 to 200 mm/s

20 25 32 40 50 63

9.5 15 19

20, 5010, 20

100 185 300 525 825 1400

±1.2° ±0.9° ±0.7°

M5 x 0.8

+0.6–0.4

Rc1/8, NPT1/8, G1/8 Rc1/4, NPT1/4, G1/4


Specifications


Bore size(mm)

20

25

32

40

50

63

Rod size(mm)

Operatingdirection

12

12

16

16

20

20

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

Piston area(cm2)

2

3

3.7

4.9

6

8

10.5

12.5

16.5

19.6

28

31.2

0.3

60.8

90.2

112

149

182

243

319

380

502

596

851

948

0.5

100

149

185

245

300

400

525

625

825

980

1400

1560

0.7

139

208

258

341

418

557

731

870

1149

1365

1950

2172

1.0

200

298

370

490

600

800

1050

1250

1648

1961

2801

3121


Unit: N

Theoretical Output

Clamp stroke(mm) 20

260

300

—

25295

335

—

32353

555

—

40635

680

—

50—

1170

1420

63

—

1620

1890

102050

Bore size (mm)

Unit: g


20 2

100

133

25 3

100

153

32 5

200

166

40 7

200

198

50 13

350

345

63 25

350

531

Bore size (mm)

With boss on head end

With arm

Head end flange (including mounting bolt)

Unit: g

Additional Weight

Calculation: (Example) MK2G20-10RFN• Standard calculation: MK2B20-10R• Extra weight calculation: Head end flange

With boss on head endWith arm

260 g133 g

2 g100 g495 g

Rotary Angle

Rotary Clamp Cylinder: Heavy Duty Type Series MK2

122

!6

!7

!5

!8

!9

!4

No.12345

6

789101112131415

DescriptionRod coverCylinder tubePistonBushingGuide pin

Piston rod

BumperRing nutScraper pressureMagnetHexagon socket head set screwRound R-type retaining ringName plateC-type retaining ringArm

MaterialAluminum alloyAluminum alloyAluminum alloy

Copper bearing materialStainless steelStainless steelCarbon steel

UrethaneCopper alloy

Stainless steel—

Chromium molybdenum steelSpring steelAluminum

Carbon tool steelRolled steel

Note

ø32 to ø63 onlyNitrided

ø20, ø25 Nitridedø32 to ø63 Heated, Nickel plated

ø20 to ø32 only

Sharp end section: 90°

ø40 to ø63 only


22

2324252627282930

DescriptionClamp boltHexagon nutHexagon socket head cap screwSpring washerCentering location ringFlangeHexagon socket head cap screwO-ringCoil scraperPiston sealGasketRod sealParallel pinWear ringBumper B

MaterialChromium molybdenum steel

Rolled steelChromium molybdenum steel

Hard steelAluminum alloy

Rolled steel

NBRPhosphor bronze

NBRNBRNBR

Stainless steelResin

Urethane

Chromiummolybdenum steel

Note

Component Parts

Qty.ø20, ø25: 2ø32 to ø63: 4

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit20 25

Not able to disassemble32 40

MK2-40-PS50

MK2-50-PS63

MK2-63-PSBore size (mm)

Kit no.Content

∗ Seal kit includes @3 to @7. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.

Set of nos. above @3 @4 @5 @6 @7

MK220, 25 With arm (N)

MK232 With boss on head end (F)

MK240 to 63 Head end flange (G)

Series MK2

Construction

y !2 @4 o @7 r i !1 t q @6 u !0 @5 w e

@3

!3 @9 #0

@0

@1 @2

@8

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

123

Arm

Wrench

Hexagon wrenchkey

Operating pressure (MPa)0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1

0.45 0.55 0.8

2

4

6

8

10

20MK250/63

MK232/40

MK220/25

Operatingrange

Arm

leng

th l

(cm

)


Clamp Arm Mounting1. Use a clamp arm that is available as an option.

To fabricate a clamp arm, make sure that the allowable bending moment and the inertial moment will be within the specified range.If a clamp arm that exceeds the specified value is installed, the internal mechanism in the cylinder could become damaged.

Caution





Mounting Bolt for MK2BMounting: Mounting bolt for through-hole type is available.Ordering: Add the word “MK2B” to the mounting bolt size.Example) M5 x 75 L (MK2B)




Graph (1)

Graph (2)

When arm length is 8 cm, pressure should be less thanMK220/25: 0.45 MPaMK232/40: 0.55 MPaMK250/63: 0.8 MPa.

When arm’s moment of inertia is 5 x 10–3 kg·m2, cylinder speed should be less thanMK232/40: 66 mm/sMK250/63: 120 mm/s.For calculating moment of inertia, refer to page 110, 111, 154.Note) Maximum piston speed is equivalent to



Cylinder model C

8.5

10.5

10

6

10.510.5

9

D 75 85 80 90 90100 80 90105135105135

Mounting bolt sizeM5 x 75 LM5 x 85 LM5 x 80 LM5 x 90 LM5 x 90 LM5 x 100 LM5 x 80 LM5 x 90 LM6 x 105 LM6 x 135 LM8 x 105 LM8 x 135 L

MK2B20-10MK2B20-20MK2B25-10MK2B25-20MK2B32-10MK2B32-20MK2B40-10MK2B40-20MK2B50-20MK2B50-50MK2B63-20MK2B63-50

l

Note) Be sure to use a flat washer to mount cylinders via through-holes.


10–4

10–3

10–2

2

4

6

2

4

6

2

3 MK250/63

MK232/40

MK220/25

Mom

ent o

f ine

rtia

(kg

·m2 )

50 100 20066 120

Bore size (mm)20, 2532, 4050, 63

Proper tightening torque4 to 6

8 to 1014 to 16

(N·m)

PrecautionsBe sure to read this before handling.Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety In-structions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Com-mon Precautions.

Mounting bolt

Flatwasher

Operatingrange


F

G

L

3

I + 2 x Clamp stroke

4

3 5.5(ø5.

5)

J + Clamp stroke

K

17

øH

h9

ø12

M6 x 1

2 x M5 x 0.8

D E25

F

A

G

BC

–0.110–0.2

2 x ø5.5 through2 x 2 x ø9 counterbore depth 7

M8 x 1.25Effective thread depth 11

Dimensions: ø20, ø25

Through-hole/Both Ends Tapped Common (Standard)

Note) Dimension when the rod is extended is to be added to clamp stroke plus rotary stroke.

(mm)

Model

MK2B20MK2B25

A36

40

B46.8

52

C36

40

D49

54.5

E25.5

28.5

I75.5

78.5

J62.5

65.5

K31

32

L4

5

F G±0.15

±0.15

13.5

16

±0.15

±0.15

7.5

8

øHh90

–0.052

0–0.052

20

23

Head End FlangeModel

MK2G20MK2G25

A60

64

B39

42

C D±0.1

±0.1

25.5

28

±0.15

±0.15

48

52

(mm)

With Boss on Head End

Model

MK220-FMK225-F

øAh90

–0.043

0–0.043

13

15

(mm)

12 to 22

2 x M6 x 1 (Special cap bolt)

+0.152 x ø6.3+0.05

2 x ø6.6

M6 x 1.0

24.5 + Clamp stroke

J + Clamp stroke

With arm

CB

D A

øA

h9

Series MK2

2 x ø3.3 depth 3+0.15+0.05

124

Note) The below figures illustrate auto switches D-M9, M9W, M9A, and A9.

Through-hole/Both Ends Tapped Common (Standard)

Note 1) The cylinder rod is retracted.Note 2) Rotary direction is viewed from the rod end when the piston rod is retracting.Note 3) Dimension when the rod is extended is to be added to clamp stroke plus rotary stroke.

(mm)

MK2B32MK2B40MK2B50MK2B63

45

52

64

77

60

69

86

103

34

40

50

60

54

61

73

86

31.5

35

41

47.5

5.5

5.5

6.6

9

12

12

15

15

9 depth 7

9 depth 7

11 depth 8

14 depth 10.5

14

14

17

17

–0.1–0.2

–0.1–0.2

–0.1–0.2

–0.1–0.2

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

M12 x 1.75

M12 x 1.75

M6 x 1.0

M6 x 1.0

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

20

24

30

35

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

±0.15

7

7

8

9

17

17

22

28.5

14

14

19

19

4.5

5

7

7

101.5

102.5

122

125

76

70

81.5

85

37

29.5

34

35

7.5

8

10.5

10.5

16

16

20

20

30

30

37

48

0–0.062

0–0.062

0–0.062

0–0.062

3

3

3.5

3.5

6.5

6.5

7.5

7.5

Rc1/8

Rc1/8

Rc1/4

Rc1/4

NPT1/8

NPT1/8

NPT1/4

NPT1/4

G1/8

G1/8

G1/4

G1/4

Model A B C E F øG JøHD I MK L N O P Q R S T øU X øYh9 ZV

TN TF—

With Arm (mm)

Model

MK232-NMK240-NMK250-NMK263-N

GA18

18

22

22

B67

67

88

88

C20

20

22

22

D45

45

65

65

E39

46

58

57.5

F

15 to 25

30 to 40

Head End Flange (mm)

Model

MK2G32MK2G40MK2G50MK2G63

A8

8

9

9

øF5.5

5.5

6.6

9

GM8 x 1.25

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

M6 x 1.0

M6 x 1.0

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

B 65

72

89

108

C48

54

67

80

D E±0.1

±0.1

34

40

50

60

±0.1

±0.1

±0.15

±0.15

56

62

76

92

±0.15

±0.15

(mm)

Model

MK232-FMK240-FMK2 -F

øAh90

–0.052

0–0.052

0–0.062

21

28

35

CO

P

L

D

K

A

C

øB

K

L

2 x 4 x N

Z X


S T

R + Clamp stroke

øY

h9

øU

5.5

2 x 4 x øHcounterbore

4 x øG through

I thread length J

2 x ø3.3 depth 3+0.15+0.05

(ø3.3)

Minimum bending radius of lead wire 10

Auto switch2 x 4 x M

2 x V


4 x G (Special cap bolt)

4 x øF

+0.152 x ø6.3+0.05

DC

CG F

E B

B D

R + Clamp stroke

E + Clamp stroke

5063

With Boss on Head End

øA

h9


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

125

126

≈≈

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and its Mounting Height

ø12 ø16

a) b)

When mounted

a) b)

When mounted

D-M9VD-M9WVD-M9AVLD-A9V

D-M9D-M9WD-M9ALD-A9

Note 1) ( ): D-A93Note 2) Size W is suitable for mounting models D-M9, D-M9W, D-M9AL, and D-A9.Note 3) When setting an auto switch, confirm the operation and adjust its mounting position.

Applicable Cylinders: MK Series

Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm)

12

16

D-A9VD-M9VD-M9WVD-M9AVL

Bore size

Auto switchmodel

Hs19

21

Hs17

19

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm)

12

16

BA W

1.5 (4)

2 (4.5)

BA W

0

0

7.5

8

4.5

4

11.5

12

5.5

6

D-A9D-A9V

Bore size

Auto switchmodel

D-M9/M9VD-M9W/M9WVD-M9AL/M9AVL

Series MK/MK2

BA

ø20, ø25D-M9D-M9VD-M9WD-M9WVD-M9ALD-M9AVLD-A9D-A9V

ø32 to ø63 ø20, ø25 ø32 to ø63

Auto switchmodel

Bore size

3.5

4.5

10

3.5

5

10

4

6.5

9.5

4

5.5

9.5

4

6.5

9.5

5

6.5

11.5

20 25 32 40 50 63

D-A9/A9V

D-M9/M9VD-M9W/M9WVD-M9AL/M9AVL

(mm)

∗ Since this is a guideline in-cluding hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially de-pending on an ambient en-vironment.

∗ Figures for models D-M9(V), M9W(V), M9A(V)L, and A9(V) with ø12 or ø16 (MK), or ø32 or more (MK, MK2) indicate the operating range when using the existing auto switch-mounting groove, without using auto switch mounting bracket BQ2-012.

Operating Range

5.5 5 6 6 6 6.5

D-F7/J79D-F7V/J79CD-F7W/F7WVD-J79WD-F79F/F7BALD-F7BAVL/F7NTL

— — — 5 5 5 D-P4DWL

12 12 12 11 10 12

13 13 13 14 14 16

D-A7/A80D-A7H/A80HD-A73C/A80CD-A79W

Auto switchmodel

Bore size

2

3.5

6

2.5

4

7.5

3.5

5

10

3.5

6

10

4

5.5

9.5

4

5

9.5

4

6

9.5

5

6.5

11.5

12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

D-M9W/M9WVD-M9AL/M9AVLD-A9/A9V

D-M9/M9V

(mm)

— — 5.5 5 6 6 6 6.5

D-F7/J79D-F7V/J79CD-F7W/F7WVD-J79WD-F79F/F7BALD-F7BAVL/F7NTL

— — — — — 5 5 5 D-P4DWL

— — 12 12 12 11 10 12

— — 13 13 13 14 14 16

D-A7/A80D-A7H/A80HD-A73C/A80CD-A79W

D-F7/J79D-F7VD-J79CD-F7W/J79WD-F7WVD-F7BAL/F7BAVLD-F79F/F7NTLD-A7/A80D-A73C/A80CD-A7H/A80HD-A79WD-P4DWL

MK MK2

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and its Mounting Height

Applicable Cylinders: MK, MK2 Series

Rotary Clamp Cylinder Series MK/MK2

Auto Switch Proper Mounting PositionApplicable Cylinders: MK Series

Note) When setting an auto switch, confirm the operation and adjust its mounting position.

D-A73D-A80

A26

26.5

31.5

22.5

27

27.5

B 3.5

4

5

7.5

10.5

13.5

A30

30.5

35.5

26.5

31

31.5

B 7.5

8

9

11.5

14.5

17.5

D-A72/A7HD-A80H/A73CD-A80C/F7/F79FD-J79/F7V/J79CD-F7BA/F7WD-J79W/F7WV

D-A79WD-A9D-A9V

D-M9D-M9VD-M9WVD-M9WD-M9ALD-M9AVL

D-P4DWL

Auto switchmodel

20

25

32

40

50

63

A—

—

—

19.5

24

24.5

B—

—

—

4.5

7.5

10.5

A26

26.5

30

21

25.5

26

B 3.5

4

3.5

6

9

12

A29

29.5

33

24

28.5

29

A34

34.5

38

29

33.5

34

B 6.5

7

6.5

9

12

15

B11.5

12

11.5

14

17

20

A28.5

29

32.5

23.5

28

28.5

B6

6.5

6

8.5

11.5

14.5

Bore size

D-F7NTL

Auto Switch Proper Mounting PositionApplicable Cylinders: MK2 Series

Note) When setting an auto switch, confirm the operation and adjust its mounting position.

D-A73D-A80

A30

31

36

27

31

31.5

B8

10

13

16

19.5

22.5

D-A79WD-F7NTLD-A9D-A9V

D-M9D-M9VD-M9WD-M9WVD-M9ALD-M9AVL

D-P4DWL

Auto switchmodel

20

25

32

40

50

63

A—

—

—

20

24

24.5

B—

—

—

9

12.5

15.5

A26

27

30.5

21.5

25.5

26

B4

6

7.5

10.5

14

17

A29

30

33.5

24.5

28.5

29

A34

34.5

38

29

33.5

34

B7

9

10.5

13.5

17

20

B12

14

15.5

18.5

22

25

A28.5

29.5

33

24

28

28.5

B 6.5

8.5

10

13

16.5

19.5

Bore size

D-A72/A7HD-A80H/A73CD-A80C/F7/F79FD-J79/F7V/J79CD-F7BA/F7WD-J79W/F7WV

A26

27

32

23

27

27.5

B4

6

9

12

15.5

18.5C

K

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

127

[Mounting screws set made of stainless steel]The set of stainless steel mounting screws (with nuts) described below is available and can be used depending on the operating environment. (Please order the auto switch spacer BQ-2, since it is not included.)The “D-F7BAL/F7BAVL” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when shipped.When only a switch is shipped independently, “BBA2” screw set is attached.

Bore size (mm)Auto switch model

20 25 32 40 50 63D-F7/J79D-F7VD-J79CD-F7W/J79WD-F7WVD-F7BAL/F7BAVLD-F79F/F7NTLD-A7/A80D-A73C/A80CD-A7H/A80HD-A79WD-P4DWL

BQ-1

— BQP1-050

BQ-2

Note 1) For ø32 to ø50 of each cylinder series, when mounting compact auto switches on one of the three sides other than the port side (above A, B, C side) in the figure above, a separate auto switch mounting bracket is necessary as shown in the table above, so please order one separately from the cylinder.(The same is true when mounting compact auto switches with the auto switch mounting rail, not using the compact auto switch mounting groove, for diameters ø63 to ø100.)Example MKA32-10R-M9BW ····· 1 unit BQ-2 ····· 2 pcs. BQ2-012 ····· 2 pcs.

Note 2) When the cylinder is shipped, an auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are included in the shipment.

Set screw (not used)


D-M9D-M9VD-M9WD-M9WVD-M9ALD-M9AVLD-A9D-A9V

Auto switchmounting

surface

Auto switchmodel

Bore size (mm)

Auto switch mounting surface

Port side

qBQ-2wBQ2-012Two types of auto switch mounting bracket are used as a set.

No auto switch mountingbracket necessary.


No autoswitchmountingbracketnecessary.

A, B, C side


Only on auto switch mounting rail side


A, B, C side


Port, A, B, C side


ø12, ø16 ø20, ø25 ø32, ø40, ø50 ø63Port side

B

C A

q

w

q

w

C

B

A

Port side

A

B

C

Port side

Note 4) When mounting D-M9A(V)L anywhere other than the port side of ø32, ø40, ø50, please order auto switch mounting brackets BQ2-012S, BQ-2, and the stainless steel screw set BBA2 separately.

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.

Series MK/MK2

Note 3) When the cylinder is shipped, an auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are included in the shipment. However, ø40 to ø63 with the D-P4DWL are assembled at the time of shipment.

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Weight

Weight (g)

1.5

1.5

5

16


BQ-1

BQ-2

BQ2-012

BQP1-050

Auto switch mounting screw

Auto switch mounting nut (Square nut)

Auto switch mounting nut (Convex type)

M3 x 0.5 x 8 l

M3 x 0.5 x 10 l

M3 x 0.5

M3 x 0.5

1

1

1

1

BQ-1

BQ-2

BQ-1

BQ-2

D-A7D-A8D-F7D-J7

Note) When using BQ-1, BBA2 may be used by itself.When using BQ-2, BQ-2 and BBA2 should be used together as a set, and used in combination with the auto switch spacer (black resin material) and stainless steel screws.

Detailed Contents of Stainless Steel Mounting Screw Set

Partno.

BBA2

Applicable autoswitch mountingbracket part no.


Content

Description Size Qty.

128

∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state switches, too. For details, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-F9G/F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

Type Model FeaturesElectrical entry

D-F7NV, F7PV, F7BV

D-F7NWV, F7BWV

D-F7BAVL

D-F79, F7P, J79

D-F79W, F7PW, J79W

D-F7BAL

D-F7NTL

D-P5DWL

D-A73

D-A80

D-A73H, A76H

D-A80H

—

Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)

Water resistant

—

Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)

Water resistant (2-color indication)

With timer

Magnetic field resistant

—

Without indicator light

—

Without indicator light

Applicable bore size

ø20 to ø63

ø40 to ø63

ø20 to ø63

Grommet (Perpendicular)

Grommet (In-line)


Grommet (In-line)

Reed switch

Solid state switch

Other than the models listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches are applicable.For detailed specifications, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

129

Rotary Clamp Cylinder Series MK/MK2

∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 137 for details.∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.∗ Auto switches are included, (but not assembled).





Rotary Clamp Cylinder: Double Guide Type

ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63Series MK2T

How to Order

MK2T 10Rotary clamp cylinderDouble guide type Number of auto switches

R20B

NilS

2 pcs.1 pc.

N

Auto switch type


∗ Arms are included when shipped, (but not assembled).

∗ Mounting bracket is included, (but not assembled). Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)

Body optionNilN

Standard (Female thread)With arm


Bore size202532

20 mm25 mm32 mm

405063

40 mm50 mm63 mm

Clamp strokeClamp stroke

10 mm20 mm50 mm

Applicable bore sizeø20 to ø40ø20 to ø63ø50 to ø63

Symbol102050

Mounting bracketThrough-hole/Both ends tapped common (Standard)Head end flange

BG

M9BW

M threadRc

NPTG

ø20, ø25

ø32 to ø63

Cylinder port

Nil

TNTF

Made to Order(Refer to page 131 and 151.)


RL

Type Special functionElectrical

entryWiring

(Output)

Load voltage

DC AC

Lead wire length (m)0.5(Nil)

3(L)

5(Z)

None(N)

Applicableload

Pre-wiredconnector

1(M)

Auto switch model

Perpendicular In-lineø32 to ø63ø20, ø25ø32 to ø63ø20, ø25

NoYesNoYes

YesGrommet

Connector

Grommet

—

200 V100 V

100 V or less—

24 V or less—

3-wire(NPN equivalent)

2-wire24 V

——

Relay,PLC

5 V

—12 V

5 V, 12 V12 V

5 V, 12 V—

—

———

—

—

———

—

—

——————

IC circuit

—

IC circuit—

IC circuit—

—

——————Diagnostic indication

(2-color indication)

A96V

A93VA90V

A96

A93A90———

—

———

A72

A73CA80CA79W

A72H

5 V,12 V

12 V

5 V,12 V12 V5 V,12 V12 V

5 V, 12 V—

—

———

————————

—

IC circuit

—

IC circuit

—

IC circuit

—IC circuit

—

————

——





M9NVM9PVM9BV


——

M9NM9PM9B

—M9NWM9PWM9BWM9NAM9PAM9BA

J79C

F79FP4DW∗∗

——

—

Yes

Connector

Grommet

Grommet


2-wire



2-wire4-wire


24 V —Relay,PLC

—

Indic

ator

light

Ree

d s

wit

chS

olid

sta

te s

wit

ch

130

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

131



85° to 95°(90°±5°)R type

Clamp part



Bore size (mm)202532405063

Accessories

Hexagon sockethead cap screw


Bore size (mm)202532405063

CQS-F020CQS-F025MK2T-F032MK2T-F040MK2T-F050MK2T-F063

MK-A020

MK-A032

MK-A050MK2T-A063

Accessories


Option/Arm

Action

Rotation angle Note 1)


Rotary stroke (mm)

Clamp stroke (mm)

Theoretical clamp force (N) Note 3)

Fluid

Proof pressure

Operating pressure range


Lubrication

Piping port size

Mounting

Cushion


Piston speed

Non-rotating accuracy (Clamp part)

Bore size (mm)

Double acting


Air

1.5 MPa

0.1 to 1 MPa

Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)

With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)

Non-lube

Through-hole/Both ends tapped common, Head end flange

Rubber bumper

50 to 200 mm/s

20 25 32 40 50 63

19 3329

20, 5010, 20

100 185 300 525 825 1300

±1.0° ±0.5°

M5 x 0.8

+1.00

Rc1/8, NPT1/8, G1/8 Rc1/4, NPT1/4, G1/4


Specifications

Bore size(mm)

20

25

32

40

50

63

Rod size(mm)

Operatingdirection

12

12

16

16

20

25

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

Piston area(cm2)

2

3

3.7

4.9

6

8

10.5

12.5

16.5

19.6

26

31.2

0.3

60.8

90.2

112

149

182

243

319

380

502

596

780

948

0.5

100

149

185

245

300

400

525

625

825

980

1300

1560

0.7

139

208

258

341

418

557

731

870

1149

1365

1820

2172

1.0

200

298

370

490

600

800

1050

1250

1648

1961

2600

3121


Unit: N

Theoretical Output

Clamp stroke(mm) 20

367

433

—

25448

520

—

32806

914

—

401008

1127

—

50—

2049

2672

63—

2609

3354

102050

Bore size (mm)

Unit: g


20100

133

25100

153

32200

166

40 200

198

50350

345

63600

531

Bore size (mm)

With arm

Head end flange (including mounting bolt)

Unit: g

Additional Weight

X1859 With head end pin holeSymbol Description

Made to Order(For details, refer to page 151.)

Rotary Angle


Calculation: (Example) MK2TG20-10RN• Standard calculation: MK2TB20-10R• Extra weight calculation: Head end flange

With arm

367 g133 g100 g600 g

Part no.

Part no.

Rotary Clamp Cylinder: Double Guide Type Series MK2T

No.123

4

5

6

7

8

9101112

DescriptionRod coverCylinder tubePiston

Bushing

Guide shaft

Guide roller

Retaining ring

Piston rod

BumperSeal retainerMagnetKey

MaterialStructural steelAluminum alloyAluminum alloy

Oil-impregnated sintered alloyBronze castedStainless steelStructural steelStructural steel

Steel for special applications

Stainless steelStructural steel

UrethaneAluminum alloy

—Structural steel

Note

ø20, 25ø32 to 63ø20, 25

ø32 to 63

ø20, 25ø32 to 63ø20, 25

ø32 to 63


26

DescriptionArmClamp boltHexagon nutHexagon socket head cap screwSpring washerFlangeGasketCoil scraperPiston sealRod sealWear ringBottom plateRetaining ringHexagon socket head cap screw (with SW)WasherHexagon socket head cap screw

MaterialStructural steelStructural steelStructural steelStructural steel

Steel wireStructural steel

NBRBronzeNBRNBRResin

Aluminum alloySteel for special applications

Note

Structural steel

Stainless steelStructural steel

ø25, ø32 only

Component Parts

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit20

MK2T20-PS25

MK2T25-PS32

MK2T32-PS40

MK2T40-PS50

MK2T50-PS63

MK2T63-PSBore size (mm)

Kit no.Content

∗ Seal kit includes !9, @0, @1, @2. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.

Set of nos. above !99 @0 @1 @2

MK2T20 to 63

In case of clamp stroke 50 mm

Head end flange (G)With arm (N)

!8

!6

@4!9 @5

!4

!5

!3

!7

!6

oe@3@1!1otyuwqr!9@2@5

@6

!0!2@0i

Series MK2T

Construction

132

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

133

Arm

Wrench

Mounting bolt

Flatwasher

Hexagonwrenchkey

Operating pressure (MPa)0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1

0.45 0.55 0.8

2

4

6

8

10

20MK2T50/63

MK2T32/40

MK2T20/25

Operatingrange

Arm

leng

th l

(cm

)


Mounting: Mounting bolt for through-hole type is available.Ordering: Add the word “MK2TB” to the mounting bolt size.Example) M5 x 115 L (MK2TB) 4 pcs.

Mounting Bolt for MK2TB




Graph (1)

When arm length is 8 cm, pressure should be less thanMK2T20/25: 0.45 MPaMK2T32/40: 0.55 MPaMK2T50/63: 0.8 MPa.

When arm’s moment of inertia is 1 x 10–2 kg·m2, cylinder speed should be less thanMK2T32/40: 85 mm/sMK2T50/63: 140 mm/s.For calculating moment of inertia, refer to page 110, 111, 154.Note) Maximum piston speed is equivalent to



Cylinder model C11 11 8.5 8.511.511.5 7.5 7.513.510 13 14

D115135115135145165145165185245185250

Mounting bolt sizeM5 x 115 LM5 x 135 LM5 x 115 LM5 x 135 LM5 x 145 LM5 x 165 LM5 x 145 LM5 x 165 LM6 x 185 LM6 x 245 LM8 x 185 LM8 x 250 L

MK2TB20-10MK2TB20-20MK2TB25-10MK2TB25-20MK2TB32-10MK2TB32-20MK2TB40-10MK2TB40-20MK2TB50-20MK2TB50-50MK2TB63-20MK2TB63-50

l

Bore size (mm)20, 2532, 40

5063

Proper tightening torque4 to 6

8 to 1014 to 16

106 to 127

(N·m)

Graph (2)


10–4

10–3

10–2

10–1

Mom

ent o

f ine

rtia

(kg

·m2

)

50 100 20014085

MK2T50/63

MK2T32/40

MK2T20/25

Operatingrange

Precautions

Clamp Arm Mounting1. Use a clamp arm that is available as an option.

To fabricate a clamp arm, make sure that the allowable bending moment and the inertial moment will be within the specified range.If a clamp arm that exceeds the specified value is installed, the internal mechanism in the cylinder could become damaged.

Caution





Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to pages 222 and 223 or Safety In-structions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Com-mon Precautions.

Note) Be sure to use a flat washer to mount cylinders via through-holes.


Dimensions: ø20, ø25

Head End FlangeModel

MK2TG20MK2TG25

A60

64

B39

42

C48

52

(mm)

Through-hole/Both Ends Tapped Common (Standard) (mm)

Clamp stroke 20 mmClamp stroke 10 mmBore size

36

40

47

52

25.5

28

116.5

119

110.5

113

59

59

A øB CQ R S

136.5

139

130.5

133

69

69

Q R S2025

17.5

14

51 357

1611 to 22

M6 x 1.0

ø12

4.5

QR

5.5S

1717

2 x M5 x 0.8

2 x 4 x M6 x 1.0

AC

10 –0.07–0.15

10–0

.07

–0.1

5

øB

CA

M8 x 1.25Thread length 11 4 x ø5.4 through

2 x 4 x ø9 counterbore depth 7

C8 B

A

2 x ø6.6

Series MK2T

134

BE

DC

A

4 x øF

F

EA

B D10

C G

K

QR

ST

NN

øU

2 x 4 x M thread 2 x V

A C D

øB

O

PACD

4 x øG through

2 x 4 x øH counterbore depth

I thread length J


With Arm (mm)

GM8 x 1.25

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

A18

18

22

32

B67

67

88

91

C20

20

22

32

D45

45

65

65

E21.5

21

29.5

34.5

F15 to 25

15 to 25

20 to 40

20 to 40

Head End Flange (mm)

Model

MK2TG32MK2TG40MK2TG50MK2TG63

A8

8

9

9

øF5.5

5.5

6.6

9

B 65

72

89

108

C48

54

67

80

D E34

40

50

60

56

62

76

92

Model

MK2T32-NMK2T40-NMK2T50-NMK2T63-N

Through-hole/Both Ends Tapped Common (Standard) (mm)

45

52

64

77

60

69

86

103

34

40

50

60

5.5

5.5

6.6

9

9 depth 7

9 depth 7

11 depth 8

14 depth 10.5

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

M12 x 1.75

M16 x 2

M6 x 1.0

M6 x 1.0

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

12

12

15

21

N

14

14

19

19

17

17

22

28.5

4.5

5

7

7

16

16

20

25

Rc1/8

Rc1/8

Rc1/4

Rc1/4

NPT1/8

NPT1/8

NPT1/4

NPT1/4

G1/8

G1/8

G1/4

G1/4

Nil TN TFV

A øB C D G H I J

6

6

7

8

K M

14

14

17

22 –0.07–0.15

–0.07–0.15

–0.07–0.15

–0.07–0.1532

405063

Bore size O P øU

148

151.5

—

—

140

144

—

—

74

75

—

—

7.5

8

—

—

Q R S T168

171.5

191

192

160

164

179

182

84

85

91.5

93

7.5

8

12.5

10.5

Q R S T—

—

254.5

256

—

—

242.5

246

—

—

121.5

123

—

—

14

15

Q R S T32405063

Bore sizeClamp stroke 50 mmClamp stroke 20 mmClamp stroke 10 mm


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

135

Operating Range (Dimensions) (mm)

Operating Range

D-A7/A80D-A7H/A80HD-A73C/A80C

Auto switch modelBore size

20

5.5 5.5 6.5 5.5 6.5 6.5

3 3.5 4.5 4.5 5 5

— — 6 6 6 6.5

25 32 40 50 63

D-F7/J79D-F7V/F79F/J79CD-F7W/F7WVD-F79F/F7BAL/F7BAVL/F7NTL

D-M9W/M9WVD-M9AL/M9AVL

D-M9/M9V

—

——

—

——

9.5

6 —

11.5

7 5

11

7 5

13.5

9.5 5

D-A79WD-P4DWL

9 9.5 9 9.5 9.5 11 D-A9/A9V

∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient en-vironment.

∗ Figures for models D-M9(V), M9W(V), M9A(V)L, and A9(V) with ø32 or more indicate the operating range when using the existing auto switch-mounting groove, without using auto switch mounting bracket (BQ2-012).

Other than the models listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches are applicable.For detailed specifications, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

Type Model FeaturesElectrical entryD-F7NV, F7PV, F7BVD-F7NWV, F7BWVD-F7BAVLD-F79, F7P, J79D-F79W, F7PW, J79WD-F7BALD-F7NTLD-P5DWLD-A73D-A80D-A73H, A76HD-A80H

—Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)

Water resistant—

Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)Water resistant (2-color indication)

With timerMagnetic field resistant

—Without indicator light

—Without indicator light

Applicable bore size

ø20 to ø63

ø40 to ø63

ø20 to ø63


Grommet (In-line)


Grommet (In-line)Reed switch

Solid state switch

∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state switches, too. For details, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-F9G/F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to “Best Pneumatics” catalog.

ø20 to ø63 ø32 to ø63B

A

Auto switch (Rail mounting)B

A

Auto switch (Direct mounting)D-M9D-M9VD-M9WD-M9WVD-M9ALD-M9AVLD-A9D-A9V

Mounting Rail mounting Direct mounting

Model

MK2T20MK2T25MK2T32MK2T40MK2T50-20stMK2T50-50stMK2T63-20stMK2T63-50st

D-A7D-A8

A——

73 (73.5)74 (74.5)89.5 (90)

119.5 (120)91.5 (92)

121.5 (122)

B——

10.5 (11)13 (13.5)18.5 (19)22 (22.5)19.5 (20)23.5 (24)

A——

73.5 74.590

120 92

122

B——

11 13.519 22.520 24

A——

70.5 71.587

117 89

119

B——8

10.516 19.517 21

A———70

85.5115.5 87.5117.5

B———9

14.518 15.519.5

A 60.5

61 76 77

92.5122.5 94.5124.5

B9

11 13.516 21.525 22.526.5

A 56.5

57 72 73

88.5118.5 90.5120.5

B5 7

9.512 17.521 18.522.5

A63

63.5 78.5 79.5

95 125

97 127

B11.513.516 18.524 27.525 29

D-A7H/A80HD-A73C/A80CD-F7/F79F/J79D-F7V/J79CD-F7BA/F7WD-J79W/F7WV

D-A79W D-P4DWL D-A9D-A9V

D-M9D-M9VD-M9WD-M9WVD-M9ALD-M9AVL

D-F7NTL

∗ ( ): D-A72Note) When setting an auto switch, confirm the operation and adjust its mounting position.

136

Series MK2T

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End)

D-F7/J79D-F7VD-J79CD-F7W/J79WD-F7WVD-F7BAL/F7BAVLD-F79F/F7NTLD-A7/A80D-A73C/A80CD-A7H/A80HD-A79WD-P4DWL

Note 4) When mounting D-M9A(V)L anywhere other than the port side of ø32, ø40, ø50, please order auto switch mounting brackets BQ2-012S, BQ-2, and the stainless steel screw set BBA2 separately.

[Mounting screws set made of stainless steel]The set of stainless steel mounting screws (with nuts) described below is available and can be used depending on the operating environment. (Please order the auto switch spacer BQ-2, since it is not included.)“D-F7BAL/F7BAVL” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when shipped.When only a switch is shipped independently, “BBA2” screws are attached.

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.

Note 3) When the cylinder is shipped, an auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are included in the shipment. However, ø40 to ø63 D-P4DWL are assembled at the time of shipment.

Bore size (mm)Auto switch model

32 40 50 63D-F7/J79D-F7VD-J79CD-F7W/J79WD-F7WVD-F7BAL/F7BAVLD-F79F/F7NTLD-A7/A80D-A73C/A80CD-A7H/A80HD-A79WD-P4DWL — BQP1-050

BQ-2

Note 1) For ø32 to ø50 of each cylinder series, when mounting compact auto switches on one of the three sides other than the port side (above A, B, C side) in the figure above, a separate auto switch mounting bracket is necessary as shown in the table above, so please order one separately from the cylinder.(The same is true when mounting compact auto switches with the auto switch mounting rail, not using the compact auto switch mounting groove, for diameters ø63.)Example MK2TB32-10R-M9BW ····· 1 unit BQ-2 ····· 2 pcs. BQ2-012 ····· 2 pcs.

Note 2) When the cylinder is shipped, an auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are included in the shipment.

D-M9D-M9VD-M9WD-M9WVD-M9ALD-M9AVLD-A9D-A9V

Auto switchmounting

surface

Auto switchmodel

Bore size (mm)


Port side





A, B, C side


A, B, C side


Port, A, B, C side

ø20, ø25 ø32, ø40, ø50 ø63

A

B

C

Port side

C

B

A

Port side


q

w

Port side

B

C A


Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Weight

Weight (g)

1.5

1.5

5

16


BQ-1

BQ-2

BQ2-012

BQP1-050

Auto switch mounting screw

Auto switch mounting nut (Square nut)

Auto switch mounting nut (Convex type)

M3 x 0.5 x 8 l

M3 x 0.5 x 10 l

M3 x 0.5

M3 x 0.5

1

1

1

1

BQ-1

BQ-2

BQ-1

BQ-2

D-A7D-A8D-F7D-J7

Note 5) When using BQ-1, BBA2 may be used by itself.When using BQ-2, BQ-2 and BBA2 should be used together as a set, and used in combination with the auto switch spacer (black resin material) and stainless steel screws.

Detailed Contents of Stainless Steel Mounting Screw SetPartno.

BBA2

Applicable autoswitch mountingbracket part no.


Content

Description Size Qty.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

137

Series MK/MK2/MK2TAuto Switch Specifications

Specifications

∗ Lead wire length Switch connection side 0.5 mLoad connection side 0.5 m

Part no.

Load voltage

Max. load current

CD-P11

100 VAC

25 mA

200 VAC

12.5 mA

CD-P12

24 VDC

50 mA

Auto Switch Common Specifications

Type

Leakage current

Operating time

Impact resistance

Insulation resistance

Withstand voltage

Ambient temperature

Enclosure

Reed switch

None

1.2 ms

300 m/s2

50 MΩ or more at 500 VDC Mega (between lead wire and case)

–10 to 60°CIEC60529 standard IP67

Solid state switch

3-wire: 100 µA or less 2-wire: 0.8 mA or less

1 ms or less ∗2)

1000 m/s2

1500 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case) ∗1) 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case)

Lead Wire Length

Lead wire length indication

(Example)

LM

0.5 m

3 m1 m

5 mZ

Nil

Lead wire length

LD-M9BW

(Example)

Flexible specification

61D-F79F-

Contact Protection Box: CD-P11/CD-P12<Applicable switch model> Internal Circuit

Dimensions

Connection

CD-P11

CD-P12

Note 4) Tolerance of Lead Wire LengthLead wire length Tolerance

0.5 m

1 m

3 m

5 m

± 15 mm

± 30 mm

± 90 mm

± 150 mm

Lead Wire Part No. with Connector (applicable to connector type only)

D-LC05

D-LC30

D-LC50

Model Lead wire length

0.5 m

3.0 m

5.0 m

Note 1) Applicable auto switch with 5 m lead wire “Z”Solid state switch: Manufactured upon receipt of order as standard.

Note 2) To designate solid state switch with flexible specifications, add “-61” after the lead wire length. Flexible cable is used for the D-M9(V), D-M9W(V), D-M9A(V), D-M9A(V) as standard. There is no need to place the suffix -61 to the end of part number.

Note 3) 1 m (M): D-M9W(V), M9A(V)L

∗1) For connector type D-A73C and A80C, 1000 VAC for 1 minute (between lead wire and case).∗2) Except solid state switch with timer D-F7NTL, and magnetic field resistant 2-color indication solid state switch D-P4DWL.

D-A9/A9V, A7(H)(C), A80(H)(C), A79W typeThe above auto switch type does not have a built-in contact protection circuit.q Where the operation load is an inductive load.w Where the wiring length to load is greater than 5 m. e Where the load voltage is 100/200 VAC.

Therefore, use a contact protection box with the switch for any of the above cases:The contact life may be shortened (due to permanent energizing conditions).(Where the load voltage is 110 VAC)When the load voltage is increased by more than 10% to the rating of applicable auto switches (except D-A73C/A80C/A79W) above, use a contact protection box (CD-P11) to reduce the upper limit of the load current by 10% so that it can be set within the range of the load current range, 110 VAC.

To connect a switch unit to a contact protection box, connect the lead wire from the side of the contact protection box marked SWITCH to the leadwire coming out of the switch unit. Keep the switch as close as possible to the contact protection box, with a lead wire length of no more than 1 meter.

Surge absorberChoke

coil

OUT Brown

OUT Blue

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue

Choke coil

Zener diode

138

Auto SwitchConnections and Examples

Basic Wiring

Solid state 3-wire, NPN

• Sink input specification3-wire, NPN

2-wire

• Source input specification3-wire, PNP

2-wire 2-wire

Solid state 3-wire, PNP

Connect according to the applicable PLC input specifications, since the connection method will vary depending on the PLC input specifications.

(Power supplies for switch and load are separate.)

Load

Example of AND (Serial) and OR (Parallel) Connection

Example of Connection to PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)

(Solid state)2-wire(Reed)

Switch main circuit

Brown

BlackLoad

Brown

Black

Blue

Load

Brown

Black

Blue

Load

Brown

Blue

Load

Brown

Blue

Indicator light protectivecircuitetc.

Brown

Blue

Load

Brown

BlueLoad

Switch main circuit

Switch main circuit

Switch main circuit

Switch main circuit

Indicator light protectivecircuitetc.

Blue

Switch

InputBlack

COM

Brown

Blue

Switch

Input

Blue COM

Brown

Switch

InputBlack

PLC internal circuitCOM

Brown

Blue

PLC internal circuit



Switch

InputBlue

COMBrown

• 3-wireOR connection for NPN output

2-wire with 2-switch AND connection 2-wire with 2-switch OR connection

AND connection for NPN output(using relays)

AND connection for NPN output(performed with switches only)

The indicator lights will illuminate when both switches are turned ON.

Switch 1

Switch 2

Load

BrownBlackBlue

BrownBlackBlue

Switch 1

Brown

Switch 2

BlackBlue

Relay

Relay

BrownBlackBlue

Load

Relay contact

Switch 1

Brown

Switch 2

BlackBlue

Load

BrownBlackBlue

Switch 1

Switch 2

Brown

Blue

Brown

Blue

LoadSwitch 1

Switch 2

Brown

Blue

Brown

Blue

Load

(Solid state) (Reed)When two switches are con-nected in series, a load may malfunction because the load voltage will decrease when in the ON state.The indicator lights will illu-minate if both of the switches are in the ON state.

When two switches are connected in par-allel, a malfunction may occur because the load voltage will increase when in the OFF state.

Because there is no current leakage, the load voltage will not in-crease when turned OFF. However, depend-ing on the number of switches in the ON state, the indicator lights may sometimes dim or not light because of the dispersion and reduc-tion of the current flow-ing to the switches.

Power supply ResidualLoad voltage at ON = voltage – voltage x 2 pcs.

= 24 V - 4 V x 2 pcs.= 16 V

Example: Power supply is 24 VDC. Internal voltage drop in switch is 4 V.

Load voltage at OFF = Leakage current x 2 pcs. x Load impedance= 1 mA x 2 pcs. x 3 kΩ= 6 V

Example: Load impedance is 3 kΩ.Leakage current from switch is 1 mA.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

139

ø2.

72

22(24.5)

2.8 4.5

4

10( ): D-A93

Indicator lightD-A90 type comes without indicator light.


Slotted set screwM2.5 x 4 l

4

9.1

5.1

ø2.7

10

4.5


2

22

6

Indicator lightD-A90 type comes without indicator light.

Slotted set screw

M2.5 x 4 l

Grommet PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

D-A90(V) (Without indicator light)Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Maximum load current


Internal resistance

Standards

D-A93(V)/D-A96(V) (With indicator light)Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage


Indicator light

Standards

Load current range and max. load current

Internal resistance

Lead wiresD-A90(V)/D-A93(V) — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7, 0.18 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 mD-A96(V) — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7, 0.15 mm2 x 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 0.5 m

Note 1) Refer to page 138 for reed switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.Note 3) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be


D-A90/D-A90V

IC circuit, Relay, PLC

24 VAC/DC or less

50 mA

None

1 Ω or less (including lead wire length of 3 m)

CE marking

48 VAC/DC or less

40 mA

100 VAC/DC or less

20 mA

D-A93/D-A93V

Relay, PLC

24 VDC

5 to 40 mA

None

D-A93 — 2.4 V or less (to 20 mA)/3 V or less (to 40 mA)D-A93V — 2.7 V or less


CE marking

100 VAC

5 to 20 mA

D-A96/D-A96V

IC circuit

4 to 8 VDC

20 mA

0.8 V or less

Note) q In a case where the operation load is an inductive load.

w In a case where the wiring load is greater than 5 m.

e In a case where the load voltage is 100 VAC.

Use the auto switch with a contact protection box in any of the above mentioned cases. (For details about the contact protection box, refer to page 138.)

Fix the auto switch with the existing screw installed on the switch body. The auto switch may be damaged if a screw other than the one supplied is used.

PrecautionsCaution

Model

Lead wire length(m)

0.5

3

D-A90

6

30

D-A90V

6

30

D-A93

6

30

D-A93V

6

30

D-A96

8

41

D-A96V

8

41

(g)

Weight


D-A90(V)

D-A93(V)

D-A96(V)

DimensionsD-A90/D-A93/D-A96

Note 3)

D-A90V/D-A93V/D-A96V

Unit: mm

Reed Switch: Direct Mounting StyleD-A90(V)/D-A93(V)/D-A96(V)


Contact protection box

CD-P11

CD-P12

OUT (±)Brown

OUT (±)Blue

Ree

d sw

itch

Blue

LED diode

Resistor

Zener diode

BrownContact protection box

CD-P11

CD-P12

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue

Ree

d sw

itch

LED diode

Resistor

Reverse current prevention diode

OUTBlack

DC (+)Brown

DC (–)Blue

Load

Ree

d sw

itch

(+)

(–)

DC powersupply

140


Dimensions

GrommetElectrical entry direction: Perpendicular

Reed Switch: Rail Mounting StyleD-A72

Weight

Auto switch model

0.5

3

10

47

D-A72

Unit: g

Unit: mm

Lead wire length(m)


Auto Switch Internal CircuitD-A72

Note) For D-A72, be sure to use the contact protection box. (For details about the contact protection box, refer to page 138).

D-A7 (With indicator light)Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load current range Note 3)


Internal resistance

Indicator light

Standards

D-A72

Relay, PLC

200 VAC

5 to 10 mA

None

2.4 V or less


CE marking

8.5 Most sensitive position

8

14

64

22

Indicator lightø3.2

6.2

3

ø3.4

11.7

Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø3.4, 0.2 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 mNote 1) Refer to page 138 for reed switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.Note 3) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be


Blue

LED diode

Resistor

Zener diode

Brown

OUTBlue

OUTBrownChoke

coil

Contact protection boxCD-P11

Surge absorber

Ree

d sw

itch

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

141

Auto Switch Internal CircuitD-A72H

Weight

Dimensions

Auto switch model

0.5

3

10

47

D-A72H

D-A72H

Unit: g

GrommetElectrical entry direction: In-line

Lead wire length(m)


Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: 0.2 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 mNote 1) Refer to page 138 for reed switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.Note 3) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be


Note) For D-A72H, be sure to use the contact protection box. (For details about the contact protection box, refer to page 138.)

D-A72H (With indicator light)Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Maximum load current and Load current range Note 3)


Internal resistance

Indicator light

Standards

D-A72H

Relay, PLC

200 VAC

5 to 10 mA

None

2.4 V or less


CE marking

2

ø3.

4

22


15

74

8

Indicator light

ø3.2

SMC

6.2

3.3

10.2

Unit: mm


Reed Switch: Rail Mounting StyleD-A72H

Blue

LED diode

Resistor

Zener diode

Brown

OUTBlue

OUTBrownChoke

coil


Surge absorber

Ree

d sw

itch

142

Indicator light

Lead wire withconnector

D-A80C type comes without indicator light.


Tightening ring

Sleeve

Connector


D-A73C

D-A80C

Dimensions

Weight Unit: g

Unit: mm

Precautions1. Confirm that the connector is appropriate-

ly tightened. If tightened insufficiently, the waterproof performance will deteriorate.

2. For how to handle a connector, refer to the below figures.

Caution

Auto switch model

0.5

3

5

12

54

84

12

54

84

D-A73C D-A80C

Lead wire length(m)

D-A73C (With indicator light)


Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load voltage Note 4)


Internal resistance

Indicator light

Standards

D-A73C

Relay, PLC

24 VDC

5 to 40 mA

None

2.4 V or less


CE marking

D-A80C

Relay, IC circuit, PLC

50 mA

None

1 Ω or less (including lead wire length of 3 m)

CE marking

D-A80C (Without indicator light)Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Maximum load current


Internal resistance

Standards

24 VAC/DC

Connector




How to Insert the Connector

Turn the connector so it faces in the direction shown in the figure, and after inserting it until the sleeve hits the auto switch, screw on the tightening ring.(Do not screw it on using pliers or other tools.)

Reed Switch: Rail Mounting StyleD-A73C/D-A80C



Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: 3.4 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 mNote 1) Refer to page 138 for reed switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.Note 3) Lead wire with connector may be shipped attached to the switch.Note 4) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be


LED diode

Resistor

Zener diode

Brown

BlueOUT (–)Blue

OUT (+)BrownChoke

coil


Zener diode

Ree

d sw

itch

Ree

d sw

itch OUT (+)

Brown

OUT (–)Blue

Contact protection box

CD-P11

CD-P12

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

143

1.8

36.

2

14

ø3.4


15

74

8

23.5

Indicator light

ø3.2

Operatingrange

Optimum operatingposition

DisplayRed Green Red


D-A79W

Weight

Dimensions

Unit: g

Unit: mm

Grommet The optimum operating

position can be determined by the color of the light. (Red → Green ← Red)

Indicator light / Display method

Auto switch model

0.5

3

11

53

D-A79W

Lead wire length(m)

D-A79W (With indicator light)


Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load current range Note 3)



D-A79W

Relay, PLC

24 VDC

5 to 40 mA

None

4 V or less

CE marking

Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø3.4, 0.2 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 mNote 1) Refer to page 138 for reed switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.Note 3) Under 5 mA, the visuality of an indicator light is worsen. Furthermore, although it could be


Standards

Indicator light



2-Color Indication Reed Switch: Rail Mounting StyleD-A79W

Operating position .......... Red LED illuminates.Optimum operating position .......... Green LED illuminates.

Reverse flowprevent diode

Reed switch

LED

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue

Switc

h m

ain

circ

uit




144


Auto switch model

Electrical entry direction

Wiring type

Output type

Applicable load

Power supply voltage

Current consumption

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Indicator light

Standards

D-M9NVD-M9N D-M9B D-M9BV

2-wire

—

24 VDC relay, PLC

—

—

24 VDC (10 to 28 VDC)

2.5 to 40 mA

4 V or less

0.8 mA or less

D-M9PVD-M9P


CE marking

3-wire


5, 12, 24 VDC (4.5 to 28 V)

10 mA or less

40 mA or less

0.8 V or less at 10 mA (2 V or less at 40 mA)

100 µA or less at 24 VDC

In-line Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular

NPN PNP

28 VDC or less —

D-M9(V) (With indicator light)

Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7 x 3.2 ellipse D-M9B(V) 0.15 mm2 x 2 coresD-M9N(V), D-M9P(V) 0.15 mm2 x 3 cores

Note 1) Refer to page 138 for solid state switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.

Dimensions

D-M9

D-M9V

M2.5 x 4 lSlotted set screw

Indicator light

2.7

22

2.6

4

2.8

3.2

6 Most sensitive position

4

2.6

9.5

2.7

4.62

20

M2.5 x 4 l

2.8

83.2

4

Indicator lightSlotted set screw


PrecautionsCaution

Fix the switch with appropriate screw installed on the switch body. If using other screws, the switch may be damaged. Unit: mm


Solid State Switch: Direct Mounting StyleD-M9N(V)/D-M9P(V)/D-M9B(V)

Weight

Auto switch model

0.5

3

5

D-M9N(V) 8

41

68

D-M9P(V) 8

41

68

D-M9B(V) 7

38

63

Unit: g

Lead wire length(m)

2-wire load current is reduced (2.5 to 40 mA).

Flexibility is 1.5 times greater than the conventional model (SMC comparison).

Using flexible cable as standard spec.

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

tS

witc

h m

ain

circ

uit

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t

Auto Switch Internal CircuitD-M9N(V)

D-M9B(V)

D-M9P(V)

DC (+)Brown

OUTBlack

DC (–)Blue

DC (+)Brown

OUTBlack

DC (–)Blue

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

145

Indicator light

mounting hole

Most sensi-tive position


D-J79C

Weight

Dimensions

Auto switch model

0.5

3

5

13

52

83

D-J79C

Unit: g

Unit: mm

Connector

Lead wire length(m)

D-J79C (With indicator light)


Auto switch model

Wiring type

Output type

Applicable load


Current consumption

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Indicator light

Standards

D-J79C2-wire

—

24 VDC Relay, PLC

—

—

24 VDC (10 to 28 VDC)

5 to 40 mA

4 V or less

0.8 mA or less at 24 VDC

Red LED illuminates when ON.

CE marking

Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø3.4, 0.2 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5 mNote 1) Refer to page 138 for solid state switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.Note 3) The lead wire with connector may be attached to the auto switch at the time of shipping.

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue

1. Confirm that the connector is appro-priately tightened. If tightened insuffi-ciently, the waterproof performance will deteriorate.

2. For how to handle a connector, refer to the below figure.

PrecautionsCaution

How to Insert the Connector


Solid State Switch: Rail Mounting StyleD-J79C

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t

Turn the connector so it faces in the direction shown in the figure, and after inserting it until the sleeve hits the auto switch, screw on the tightening ring.(Do not screw it on using pliers or other tools.)

Tightening ring

Sleeve

Connector

146

PrecautionsCaution

Fix the switch with appropriate screw installed on the switch body. If using other screws, the switch may be damaged.

Unit: mmDimensions


Auto switch model


Wiring type

Output type

Applicable load


Current consumption

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Indicator light

Standards

D-M9NWVD-M9NW D-M9BW D-M9BWV

2-wire

—

24 VDC relay, PLC

—

—

24 VDC (10 to 28 VDC)

2.5 to 40 mA

4 V or less

0.8 mA or less

D-M9PWVD-M9PW


3-wire


5, 12, 24 VDC (4.5 to 28 V)

10 mA or less

40 mA or less



CE marking


NPN PNP

28 VDC or less —

D-M9W(V) (With indicator light)

Lead wires — Oilproof flexible heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7 x 3.2 ellipse D-M9BW(V) 0.15 mm2 x 2 coresD-M9NW(V), D-M9PW(V) 0.15 mm2 x 3 cores


D-M9W

D-M9WV

M2.5 x 4 lSlotted set screw

Indicator light

2.7

22

2.6

4

2.8

3.2


4

2.6

9.5

M2.5 x 4 lIndicator light

Slotted set screw

2.8

4.6

4

20

28

3.2


2.7

D-M9NW(V)

D-M9BW(V)

D-M9PW(V)

OUTBlack

DC (+)Brown

DC (–)Blue

DC (+)Brown

OUTBlack

DC (–)Blue

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue



ON

OFFOperatingrange




2-Color Indication Solid State Switch: Direct Mounting StyleD-M9NW(V)/D-M9PW(V)/D-M9BW(V)

Weight Unit: g

Auto switch model

0.5

1

3

5

D-M9NW(V)8

14

41

68

D-M9PW(V)8

14

41

68

D-M9BW(V)7

13

38

63

Lead wire length(m)

2-wire load current is reduced (2.5 to 40 mA).

Flexibility is 1.5 times greater than the conventional model (SMC comparison).

Using flexible cable as standard spec. The optimum operating position can

be determined by the color of the light. (Red → Green ← Red)

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

tS

witc

h m

ain

circ

uit

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

147

Weight Unit: g

Auto switch model

0.5

1

3

5

D-M9NA(V)8

14

41

68

D-M9PA(V)8

14

41

68

D-M9BA(V)7

13

38

63

Lead wire length(m)


Auto switch model


Wiring type

Output type

Applicable load


Current consumption

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Indicator light

Standards

D-M9NAVD-M9NA D-M9BA D-M9BAV

2-wire

—

24 VDC relay, PLC

—

—

24 VDC (10 to 28 VDC)

2.5 to 40 mA

4 V or less

0.8 mA or less

D-M9PAVD-M9PA


CE marking

3-wire


5, 12, 24 VDC (4.5 to 28 V)

10 mA or less

40 mA or less




NPN PNP

28 VDC or less —

D-M9A(V) (With indicator light)

Lead wires — Oilproof flexible heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø2.7 x 3.2 ellipse D-M9BA(V) 0.15 mm2 x 2 coresD-M9NA(V), D-M9PA(V) 0.15 mm2 x 3 cores


Water (coolant) resistant type 2-wire load current is reduced (2.5 to

40 mA). Using flexible cable as standard spec. The optimum operating position can

be determined by the color of the light. (Red → Green ← Red)

2.7

6

2.6

9.3


4

SMC

22

3.2

4.6

2.8

4

28

M2.5 x 4 l

Slotted set screwIndicator light

4

0.2

3

SMC4

2.8

24 2.7

Indicator light

M2.5 x 4 l

Slotted set screw

Dimensions

D-M9A

D-M9AV

Unit: mm

6

3.2


PrecautionsCaution

D-M9NA(V)

D-M9BA(V)

D-M9PA(V)

OUTBlack

DC (+)Brown

DC (–)Blue

DC (+)Brown

OUTBlack

DC (–)Blue

OUT (+)Brown

OUT (–)Blue



ON

OFFOperatingrange



Water Resistant 2-Color Indication Solid State Switch: Direct Mounting StyleD-M9NA(V)/D-M9PA(V)/D-M9BA(V)


Fix the switch with appropriate screw installed on the switch body. If using other screws, the switch may be damaged.

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

tS

witc

h m

ain

circ

uit

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t

148

Indicator light


ø3.

4

ø3.2 Mounting hole

Weight

Auto switch model

0.5

3

5

13

56

90

D-F79F

Unit: g

Grommet

Lead wire length(m)


Since the output signal can be detected in an unsteady detecting area, the difference of detecting position can be confirmed by the side of PLC (Programmable Logic Controller).

The optimum operating position can be determined by the color of the light. (Red → Green ← Red)

D-F79F (With indicator light)Auto switch model

Wiring type

Output type

Diagnostic output type

Applicable load


Current consumption

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Indicator light

Standards

D-F79F

4-wire

NPN

Normal operation


5, 12, 24 VDC (4.5 to 28 VDC)

10 mA or less

28 VDC or less

50 mA or less at the total amount of normal output and diagnostic output

1.5 V or less (0.8 V or less at 5 mA)


Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø3.4, 0.2 mm2 x 4 cores (Brown, Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5 mNote 1) Refer to page 138 for solid state switch common specifications.Note 2) Refer to page 138 for lead wire lengths.

CE marking

2-Color Indication with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch: Rail Mounting StyleD-F79F



Diagnostic Output Operation

The diagnostic output is de-tected when detecting posi-tion remains at unsteady area only, not available at the optimum operating posi-tion, that is to say, diagnos-tic signal can be output only when the detecting position is far from the suitable posi-tion.

Indicator light

OUT(Normal output)

Diagnosis OUT(Diagnostic output)

Red Green Red Red

Dimensions Unit: mm


OUT (Normal output)Black

DC (+)Brown

DC (–)Blue

Diagnosis OUT(Diagnostic output)OrangeS

witc

h m

ain

circ

uit

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

149

It is possible to use in an environment which generates a magnetic field disturbance (AC magnetic field).

The optimum operating position can be determined by the color of the light. (Red → Green ← Red)

Grommet

PrecautionsCaution



Operatingrange OFF

ON


D-P4DWL/Z




24 VDC relay, PLC

24 VDC (20 to 28 VDC)

6 to 40 mA or less

5 V or less


40 ms or less


D-P4DWL/Z (With indicator light)D-P4DWL D-P4DWZ

Lead wires — Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable: ø6, 0.5 mm2 x 2 cores (Brown, Blue)D-P4DWL: 3 m, D-P4DWZ: 5 m



Dimensions


Unit: mm

OUT (±)Brown

ø6

13

32 4

9.2

8.8

6

61

20

D-P4DW (DC24V)SMC

2 x 3.5 mounting hole

Indicator light


CE marking

Weight

Auto switch model

0.5

3

5

Unit: g

Lead wire length(m)

D-P4DW

—

150

244

Magnetic Field Resistant 2-Color Indication Solid State SwitchD-P4DWL/Z


Auto switch model

Applicable load

Load voltage

Load current


Leakage current

Operating time

Indicator light

Standards

OUT ( )Blue

±

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t

150

L

K

Head end pin holeø3.3 depth 3+0.15

+0.05

Heat Resistant Cylinder (–10 to 150°C) XB61

Series MK/MK2TMade to Order

Symbol

Air cylinder which changed the seal material and grease, so that it could be used even at higher temperature up to 150°C from –10°C.

XB6

Heat resistant cylinder

With head end pin hole

MK series standard model no.

How to Order

With Head End Pin Hole X18592Symbol

X1859MK2T series standard model no.

How to Order

SpecificationsApplicable series MK

Same as standard product

Heat resistant grease

Fluoro rubber

–10 to 150°CAmbient temperature range

Seal material

Grease

Specifications other than above and external dimensions

SpecificationsApplicable series MK2T

Same as standard product

ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63Bore size

Specifications other than above

PrecautionsWarning

Note 1) Operate without lubrication from a pneu-matic system lubricator.

Note 2) Please contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for this cylinder, which differs from those of the standard cylinder.

Note 3) In principle, it is impossible to make built-in magnet type and/or with auto switch. Please contact SMC for availability with auto switch and/or heat resistant cylinder with heat resistant auto switch.

Note 4) Piston speed is ranged from 50 to 200 mm/s.

∗ Dimensions other than above are same as basic type.

9 ±0.15

8 ±0.15

7 ±0.15

7 ±0.15

L

35 ±0.15

30 ±0.15

6350

24 ±0.15

20 ±0.15

K

4032

Bore size(mm)

Dimensions

Be aware that smoking cigarettes, etc. after your hands have come into contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is hazardous to humans.

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

151

Fig. (1)

Hexagon wrenchSpanner

Arm

Series MK/MK2/MK2TSpecific Product Precautions 1Be sure to read this before handling.Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Common Precautions.

Speed Adjustment

Warning1. Make sure to connect a speed controller to

the cylinder and adjust it so that the cylinder speed will be within a range of 50 to 200 mm/s.If a clamp arm other than the available option is used, make sure to select an appropriate arm after calculating the inertial moment of the arm.To operate a speed controller, make sure that the valve is fully closed, and gradually open the valve to adjust the speed.

Fig. (2)

Operating Environment

Clamp Arm Removal and Reinstallation

Warning1. To remove and reinstall the arm on the piston

rod, instead of securing the cylinder body, use a wrench to secure the arm to loosen or to tighten the bolt (Fig. (1)).An excessive amount of rotational force will be applied to the piston rod if the bolt is tightened by securing the cylinder body, which could damage the internal parts.To fabricate an arm, make sure to machine a detect portion that corresponds to the parallel section at the rod end.

Warning1. Do not use the cylinder under following en-

vironments:1) An area in which fluids such as cutting oil splash on the pis-

ton rod.2) An area in which foreign matter such as particles, cutting

chips, dust, or spatter is present.3) An area in which the ambient temperature exceeds the oper-

ating range.4) An area exposed to direct sunlight.5) An environment that poses the risk of corrosion.

Mounting Arms for Width Across Flats (MK Only)

Warning1. When installing the arm for the parallel sec-

tion at the rod end, the strength of the piston rod might be insufficient depending on the direction in which the arm is installed. There-fore, make sure to install the arm in the direc -tion indicated in Figure A. (Fig. (2))

152


Operating Environment

Warning1. A cylinder could malfunction or the non-rotating accuracy could be affected if a rotational force is

applied to the piston rod. Therefore, observe the particulars given below before operating the cy-linder.1) Make sure to mount the cylinder vertically (Fig. (3)). (MK, MK2 only)2) Do not absolutely perform any work (such as clamping or acting as a stopper, etc.) in the rotary direction (Fig. (4)).3) To clamp, make sure to do so within the clamp stroke (straight-line stroke) range (Fig. (5)).4) Make sure that the clamping surface of the workpiece is perpendicular to the cylinder's axial line (Fig. (6)).5) Do not operate the cylinder in such a way that an external force causes the workpiece to move while being clamped (Fig. (7)).6) Furthermore, do not operate the cylinder in an application in which a rotational force will be applied to the piston rod.

1) Do not operate the cylinder horizontally.

(MK, MK2 only)

2) Do not perform any work in the rotary direction.

3) Do not clamp during the rotary stroke.

4) Do not clamp on a slanted surface. 5) Make sure that the workpiece does not move during clamping.

Fig. (3)

Fig. (5)

Fig. (4)

Rotary stroke

Clamp stroke

Rotary stroke

Fig. (6) Fig. (7)

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

153

Magnetic substance(Steel plate, etc.)

Magnetic substance(Steel plate, etc.)


• When a magnetic substrate surrounds the cylinder as shown in the figure below (including when the magnetic substrate is only on one side of the cylinder), the movement of the auto switch may become unstable, so please contact SMC.

• If welding cables or welding gun electrodes are in the vicinity of the cylinder, the magnets in the cylinder could be affected by the exter-nal magnetic fields. (Contact SMC if the welding amperage exceeds 16000 A.) If the source of strong magnetism comes in contact with the cylinder or an auto switch, make sure to install the cylinder away from the source of the magnetism.If the cylinder is to be used in an environment in which spatter will come in direct contact with the lead wires, cover the lead wires with a protective tube. For the protective tube, use a tube I.D. ø7 or more, which excels in heat resistance and flexibility.Contact SMC if an inverter welder or a DC welder will be used.

Ι = m1· + m2·a12

3a22

3

Ι = m·a2

12

Ι = m·a2

12

Ι = m1· + m2· 4a12 + b2

124a22 + b2

12

Ι = m·a2 + b2

12

Ι = m1· + m2·a22 + Ka12

3

k = m2·2r2

5

Calculation of Moment of Inertia

Mounting With Magnetic Field Resistant Auto Switch D-P4DWL

1. Thin shaftPosition of rotational axis: Vertical to the bar and through the end

4. Thin rectangular plate (Rectangular parallelopiped)Position of rotational axis: Vertical to the plate and through the end

2. Thin shaftPosition of rotational axis: Perpendicular to the shaft through the center of gravity

5. Thin rectangular plate (Rectangular parallelopiped)Position of rotational axis: Through the center of gravity and vertical to the plate (Same as also thick rectangular plate)

3. Thin rectangular plate (Rectangular parallelopiped)Position of rotational axis: Parallel to side b through the center of gravity

6. Load at the end of lever arm

Ι: Moment of inertia (kg·m2) m: Load mass (kg)

a

154

New

Series CKZ2N

Power Clamp CylinderConforming to the New NAAMS Standard

Compliant

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

155

∗ For additional formats, please log on to the SMC web site www.smcusa.com and click on the E-Tech icon.

Software

CATIA

UNIGRAPHICS

FIDES

AUTO CAD

SOLID WORKS

3D CAD Series Variations

Series

Bore size (mm)

Arm opening angle

Switch

Port thread type

ø63Equivalent

ø50Equivalent

ø80Equivalent

30°, 45°, 60°, 75°90°, 105°, 120°, 135°

TURCK/P&F

G/NPT

CKZ2N

Arm

External stopper

Toggle link mechanismMaintains secure and powerful support.

Proximity switchBoth TURCK and P&F switches are available.

SealPrevents the infiltration of spatter, dust and other contaminants.

Fulcrum stopperCoordinates with the external stopper and forms the toggle mechanism.

Seal (Equivalent to UL94 standard VO Flame resistant)Prevents the infiltration of spatter, dust and other contaminants.

BumperReduces the effects of impact from unclamping the cylinder.

156

Series CKZ2NModel Selection

1 Common precautions for each size1) Use air filtered through a 5-µm-element filter.2) Before piping is connected to the slim-line power clamp cylinder it should be thoroughly flushed with air.3) Only use the clamp arm in our catalog. Do not weld an arm to the cylinder.4) Make sure to use a speed controller and adjust it to more than 1sec. when changing from clamping to unclamping (or vice versa).

ProcedureA) Place the workpiece, supply air at clamp side without installing clamping block, operate the clamp arm to the end of clamp.B) Under the above conditions, adjust shim so that the space between the workpiece and the clamping block is about 0 mm.

Theoretically there is no clamping force for holding a workpiece under this condition.C) In order to generate clamping force from the state described in step B, insert additional shim. The thickness of the shim differs

depending on the arm length and pressure, so please refer to the graph on page 158 as a guide. About 10% error may occur due to the difference in tolerance of the power clamp cylinder body.

2 Slim-line power clamp cylinder mountingWhen clamping by using clamping force onlyExample)

Mounting process

Workpiece setting Air supplyOperate to theend of clamp

Shim adjustmentB

A

Install a blockat clamp side

Shim adjustmentC

Block contact adjustment(clamp side)

Clamp arm

Cylinder

Shim

Shim

Clamping block

Workpiece receptacle side block

Unclampingcylinder port

Clampingcylinder port

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

157

158

ø50

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

Arm length L: 150 mm

Shim thickness (mm)(Ex. Recommended shim thickness)

(Ex. Recommended shim thickness)

0.5

0.05

0.02 0.04 0.06

0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.350

0

2000

1500

1000

500

0

500

400

300

200

100

0

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

Arm length L: 6 in

Shim thickness (in)

1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0.7 MPa

Peak clamping force position

0.5 MPa0.3 MPa

Arm length LA


0.7 MPa0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

2 Slim-line power clamp cylinder mounting

Note) When a shim that exceeds the clamping force peak plotted on the graph is inserted, the self-locking mechanism doesn’t work.Insert a shim with appropriate thickness.

Relation between shim thickness and clamping force

∗ Arm length “L” indicates the distance between the clamp arm shaft and the clamping position.For distance “A” between knock positioning pinhole and clamp arm shaft, refer to the Table 1.

CKZ2N50CKZ2N63CKZ2N80

5

10

15

AModel

Table 1

Model Selection

ø63

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)



0

4000

3000

2000

1000

01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0.7 MPa0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

ø80

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)



0

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

01 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 7 8 9

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa0.3 MPa

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

Arm length L: 8 in

0

800

600

400

200

00.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35

0.7 MPa0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

Shim thickness (in)


0.04 0.08 0.12

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

Arm length L: 10 in

0

1600

1400

1200

1000

800

600

400

200

00.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35

Shim thickness (in)


0.04 0.10 0.14

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa0.3 MPa


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

159

Model Selection

160

2 Slim-line power clamp cylinder mountingWhen using a hard stop

ProcedureA) Supply air at clamp side without installation of upper hard stop, and operate the clamp arm to the end of clamp.B) Under the above conditions, adjust shim q so that the space between the upper hard stop and the lower hard stop is about 0

mm. Theoretically there is no clamping force to the lower hard stop under this condition.C) In order to generate clamping force from the state described in step B, insert additional shim. The thickness of the shim differs

depending on the arm length and pressure, so please refer to the graph on pages 158 and 159 as a guide. About 10% error may occur due to the difference in tolerance of the power clamp cylinder body.

D) Under the state described in step C, adjust shim w so there is contact between the clamping block and the workpiece.

PrecautionWhen using the side guide to the clamp arm to prevent lateral motion, make sure not to apply a lateral load or galling to the clamp arm.

Mounting process

When using the side guide

Air supplyHard stop

set

A

Operate to theend of clamp

Shim adjustmentB

Install theupper hard

stop

Shim adjustmentShim adjustmentC

Upper hardstop contactadjustment

Workpiecesetting

D

Block contactadjustment(clamp side)

Clamp arm

Clamp arm

Shim q

Shim q

Shim w

Cylinder

Clamping block

Hard stop section A

Upper hard stop



Arm length L(Distance to a hard stop)

Section A

Upper hard stop

Lowerhard stop

Clamp arm

Side guide

Model Selection

W

L

θ

Fulcrum

Max

imum

cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

Relation between clamp arm length and maximum clamping force(operating pressure 0.5 MPa)

Arm length L (mm)

450400

10000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0350300250200150100500

ø63

ø50

ø80

L

G

W2

W1

Fulcrum

Max

imum

cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)


Arm length L (in)

ø63

ø80

1000

500

1500

2000

2500

0 5 10 15 200

ø50

3 Clamp armUse the clamp arm in the catalog.

The length of the clamp arm “L” should be the length given below or less.

Allowable load for clamp arm endRefer to the graph on page 162 for parts weight of the arm.Note) The value shows parts weight only, it does not include arm weight.

Single-side-arm type (R/L)Use within the allowable arm end load range according to the distance “L” from the fulcrum to the mounting tool’s center position and the arm opening angle “θ”.

Two-side-arm type (D)Consider the weight of allowable arm end load according to the center position “G” of each arm end load (W1 + W2), the distance “L” to the fulcrum and the arm opening angle “θ”.Use within the allowable range of (W1 + W2), in this case.

CKZ2N50CKZ2N63CKZ2N80

150 mm

300 mm

400 mm

Arm length LModel

Relation between clamp arm length and clamping force

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

161

Model Selection

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

mm

)

Load capacity (N)D

ista

nce

from

piv

ot p

oint

(in

ches

)Load capacity (pounds)

6.0

5.5

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

2.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

3 Clamp arm

ø50

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

mm

)

Load capacity (N)

ø80

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

mm

)

Load capacity (N)

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

inch

es)

Load capacity (pounds)

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

inch

es)


ø63

12.0

11.0

10.0

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

4.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

17.0

16.0

15.0

14.0

13.0

12.0

11.0

10.0

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.00 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

30°45°60°75°

90°105°120°135°

Arm opening angle θ

150

140

130

120

110

100

90

80

70

60

500 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

300

280

260

240

220

200

180

160

140

120

1000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

400

380

360

340

320

300

280

260

240

220

200

180

160

1400 5 10 15 20 25 30 3540 45 50 55 60 6570 75 80 85 90 95100 105 110115 120125 130135

162

Model Selection

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

163

Space at manual release

Leave a space for wiring a proximity switch.

Leave a space in order to release by hitting with a plastic hammer.

150Min.

4 Space in designLeave a space in the below position.

Model Selection

164

A

Dog

120

Angle display

Stopperbolt

Seal washer

Angle display

Dog

5 Arm opening angle change8 types of arm opening angles (unclamping angles) 30°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 105°, 120° and 135° are available for each standard size.

Arm opening angle change procedure1) Make sure to completely exhaust the air in the cylinder.2) Remove the switch cassette

3) Remove the dog of the “A”part, and mount a different dog for other angles using the tightening torque below. (Confirm the direction of the angle display.) Then mount the switch cassette using the tightening torque below.

4) Remove the stopper bolt of the head cover, and mount a different stopper bolt for other angles using the tightening torque below. (Confirm the direction of the angle display.)

506380506380

Dog

Switchcassette

3.0 to 4.0

3.0 to 4.0

3.0 to 4.0

5.0 to 7.0

5.0 to 7.0

5.0 to 7.0

27 to 35

27 to 35

27 to 35

44 to 62

44 to 62

44 to 62

Tightening torque

N·m lbf · inDescription

Bore size(mm)

Stopperbolt

506380

130 to 150

160 to 200

480 to 520

1150 to 1327

1416 to 1770

4248 to 4600

Tightening torque

N·m lbf · inDescription

Bore size(mm)

Model Selection

How to Order

CKZ2NPower clamp cylinder

conforming to thenew NAAMS standard

63 TF 120 R T

Bore size506380

Equivalent to 50 mmEquivalent to 63 mmEquivalent to 80 mm

Cylinder portNilTF

NPTG

Switch typeTP

TURCKP&F

Arm opening angle3045607590

105120135

30°45°60°75°90°

105°120°135°

Arm mounting positionR

RightL

LeftD

Both sides

Clamp Cylinder (Without Arm)

CKZ

Arm code(Refer to page 167 and 171 through to 178.)

63 A002Bore size

Arm

506380

Equivalent to 50 mmEquivalent to 63 mmEquivalent to 80 mm

ø50, ø63, ø80Series CKZ2NPower Clamp CylinderConforming to the New NAAMS Standard

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

165

166

Cylinder Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Weight (Cylinder Without Arm)

Double acting

Air

1.2 MPa (174 psi)

0.8 MPa (116 psi)

0.3 MPa (44 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)

1.0 second to clamp, 1.0 second to unclamp

Clamping side: None Unclamping side: Rubber bumper

Bore size (mm)

Action

Fluid

Proof pressure

Max. operating pressure

Min. operating pressure


Min. operating time

Cushion

50 60 80

Switch Specifications

Note) Switch specifications are corresponding to manufacturer’s technical information.

2 mm ±10%

10 to 30 VDC

N.O., PNP

150 mA

30 Hz

PBT-GP30

2 mm ±10%

10 to 30 VDC

N.O., PNP

100 mA

25 Hz

PA6, PBT

Green

Clamping side: Red Unclamping side: Yellow

Green


Manufacturer

Operating range

Supply voltage

Output

Continuous load current

Response frequency

Housing material

Voltage indication

Output indication

TURCK P&F

Unit: kg (lbs)

Bore size(mm)

50

63

80

Armposition

Arm angle

R/L

D

R/L

D

R/L

D

30°

5.21 (11.46)

5.27 (11.54)

7.37 (16.21)

7.47 (16.36)

17.20 (37.84)

17.42 (38.15)

45°

5.19 (11.42)

5.25 (11.50)

7.34 (16.15)

7.44 (16.29)

17.13 (37.69)

17.35 (38.00)

60°

5.17 (11.37)

5.23 (11.45)

7.31 (16.08)

7.41 (16.23)

17.07 (37.55)

17.29 (37.87)

75°

5.15 (11.33)

5.21 (11.46)

7.28 (16.02)

7.38 (16.16)

17.00 (37.40)

17.21 (37.69)

90°

5.12 (11.26)

5.18 (11.34)

7.24 (15.93)

7.34 (16.07)

16.93 (37.25)

17.15 (37.56)

105°

5.09 (11.20)

5.15 (11.28)

7.21 (15.86)

7.31 (16.01)

16.86 (37.09)

17.08 (37.41)

120°

5.07 (11.15)

5.13 (11.23)

7.18 (15.80)

7.28 (15.94)

16.80 (36.96)

17.02 (37.27)

135°

5.06 (11.13)

5.12 (11.21)

7.16 (15.75)

7.26 (15.90)

16.76 (36.87)

16.98 (37.19)

Black

S2 Lood

S1 Lood

(–)

(+)Brown

White

Blue

2

3

1

4

Note) Both TURCK and P&F are common.

Series CKZ2N

Part Number (Arm)

Boresize

SMC PartNumber

CKZ-50A001CKZ-50A002CKZ-50A003CKZ-50A004CKZ-50A005CKZ-50A006CKZ-50A007CKZ-50A008CKZ-50A009CKZ-50A010CKZ-50A011CKZ-50A012CKZ-50A013CKZ-50A014CKZ-50A015CKZ-50A016CKZ-50A017CKZ-50A018CKZ-50A019CKZ-50A020CKZ-50A021CKZ-50A022CKZ-50A023CKZ-50A024CKZ-50A025CKZ-50A026CKZ-50A027CKZ-63A001CKZ-63A002CKZ-63A003CKZ-63A004CKZ-63A005CKZ-63A006CKZ-63A007CKZ-63A008CKZ-63A009CKZ-63A010CKZ-63A011

A001

A002

A003

A004

A005

A006

A007

A008

A009

A010

A011

A012

A013

A014

A015

A016

A017

A018

A019

A020

A021

A022

A023

A024

A025

A026

A027

A001

A002

A003

A004

A005

A006

A007

A008

A009

A010

A011

ACA201M

ACA202M

ACA203M

ACA206M

ACA207M

ACA208M

ACA211M

ACA212M

ACA213M

ACA216M

ACA217M

ACA218M

ACA221M

ACA222M

ACA223M

ACA226M

ACA227M

ACA228M

ACA236M

ACA237M

ACA238M

ACA246M

ACA247M

ACA248M

ACA256M

ACA257M

ACA258M

ACA001M

ACA002M

ACA003M

ACA004M

ACA005M

ACA006M

ACA007M

ACA008M

ACA009M

ACA010M

ACA011M

CodeNAAMS Ref No.

50

63

Boresize

SMC PartNumber

CKZ-63A012CKZ-63A013CKZ-63A014CKZ-63A015CKZ-63A016CKZ-63A017CKZ-63A018CKZ-63A019CKZ-63A020CKZ-63A021CKZ-63A022CKZ-63A023CKZ-63A024CKZ-63A025CKZ-63A026CKZ-63A027CKZ-63A028CKZ-63A029CKZ-63A030CKZ-63A031CKZ-63A032CKZ-63A033CKZ-63A034CKZ-63A035CKZ-63A036CKZ-63A037CKZ-63A038CKZ-63A039CKZ-63A040CKZ-63A041CKZ-63A042CKZ-63A043CKZ-63A044CKZ-63A045CKZ-63A046CKZ-63A047CKZ-63A048

A012

A013

A014

A015

A016

A017

A018

A019

A020

A021

A022

A023

A024

A025

A026

A027

A028

A029

A030

A031

A032

A033

A034

A035

A036

A037

A038

A039

A040

A041

A042

A043

A044

A045

A046

A047

A048

ACA012M

ACA013M

ACA014M

ACA015M

ACA016M

ACA017M

ACA018M

ACA019M

ACA020M

ACA021M

ACA022M

ACA023M

ACA024M

ACA025M

ACA026M

ACA027M

ACA028M

ACA029M

ACA030M

ACA031M

ACA032M

ACA033M

ACA034M

ACA035M

ACA036M

ACA037M

ACA038M

ACA039M

ACA040M

ACA041M

ACA042M

ACA043M

ACA044M

ACA045M

ACA046M

ACA047M

ACA048M

CodeNAAMS Ref No.

63

Boresize

SMC PartNumber

CKZ-80A001CKZ-80A002CKZ-80A003CKZ-80A004CKZ-80A005CKZ-80A006CKZ-80A007CKZ-80A008CKZ-80A009CKZ-80A010CKZ-80A011CKZ-80A012CKZ-80A013CKZ-80A014CKZ-80A015CKZ-80A016CKZ-80A017CKZ-80A018CKZ-80A019CKZ-80A020CKZ-80A021CKZ-80A022CKZ-80A023CKZ-80A024CKZ-80A025CKZ-80A026CKZ-80A027CKZ-80A028CKZ-80A029CKZ-80A030CKZ-80A031CKZ-80A032CKZ-80A033CKZ-80A034CKZ-80A035CKZ-80A036CKZ-80A037

A001

A002

A003

A004

A005

A006

A007

A008

A009

A010

A011

A012

A013

A014

A015

A016

A017

A018

A019

A020

A021

A022

A023

A024

A025

A026

A027

A028

A029

A030

A031

A032

A033

A034

A035

A036

A037

ACA100M

ACA101M

ACA102M

ACA103M

ACA104M

ACA105M

ACA106M

ACA107M

ACA108M

ACA110M

ACA111M

ACA112M

ACA113M

ACA114M

ACA115M

ACA116M

ACA117M

ACA118M

ACA120M

ACA121M

ACA122M

ACA123M

ACA124M

ACA125M

ACA126M

ACA127M

ACA128M

ACA130M

ACA131M

ACA132M

ACA133M

ACA134M

ACA135M

ACA136M

ACA137M

ACA138M

ACA140M

CodeNAAMS Ref No.

80

Boresize

SMC PartNumber

CKZ-80A038CKZ-80A039CKZ-80A040CKZ-80A041CKZ-80A042CKZ-80A043CKZ-80A044CKZ-80A045CKZ-80A046CKZ-80A047CKZ-80A048CKZ-80A049CKZ-80A050CKZ-80A051CKZ-80A052CKZ-80A053CKZ-80A054CKZ-80A055CKZ-80A056CKZ-80A057CKZ-80A058CKZ-80A059CKZ-80A060CKZ-80A061CKZ-80A062CKZ-80A063CKZ-80A064CKZ-80A065CKZ-80A066CKZ-80A067CKZ-80A068CKZ-80A069CKZ-80A070CKZ-80A071CKZ-80A072

A038

A039

A040

A041

A042

A043

A044

A045

A046

A047

A048

A049

A050

A051

A052

A053

A054

A055

A056

A057

A058

A059

A060

A061

A062

A063

A064

A065

A066

A067

A068

A069

A070

A071

A072

ACA141M

ACA142M

ACA143M

ACA144M

ACA145M

ACA146M

ACA147M

ACA148M

ACA150M

ACA151M

ACA152M

ACA153M

ACA154M

ACA155M

ACA156M

ACA157M

ACA158M

ACA160M

ACA161M

ACA162M

ACA163M

ACA164M

ACA165M

ACA166M

ACA167M

ACA168M

ACA170M

ACA171M

ACA172M

ACA173M

ACA174M

ACA175M

ACA176M

ACA177M

ACA178M

CodeNAAMS Ref No.

80

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

167

Series CKZ2NPower Clamp CylinderConforming to the New NAAMS Standard

168

Construction

Table 1

30°45°60°75°90°

105°120°135°

CodeOpening angle

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

At Top cover!3 Spacer!4 Short head cap screw

Replaceable Kits List

Switch cassette

Kits for changingopening angle of arm

Top cover kits

50

63

80

50

63

80

e Switch holdery Proximity switchu Parallel pini Sheet gasket!2 Cover cap screw

q Switch actuatoro Spring washer!0 Socket head cap screw

w Stopper boltw Bumper!1 Seal washer


w Stopper boltr Bumper!1 Seal washer



CKZN-D080CKZN-B080

CKZN-D063CKZN-B063

CKZN-D050CKZN-B050

ContentsKit no.Bore size (mm)Description

CKZ1N-S050 TP

Note 1)

CKZ1N-S063 TP

Note 1)

CKZ1N-S080 TP

Note 1)

CKZN-K050 Note 2)

CKZN-B050 Note 2)

CKZN-D050 Note 2)

CKZN-B063 Note 2)

CKZN-D063 Note 2)

CKZN-K063 Note 2)

CKZN-B080 Note 2)

CKZN-D080 Note 2)

CKZN-K080 Note 2)

506380

CKZ2N-T050

CKZ2N-T063

CKZ2N-T080

Switch actuator

Stopper bolt

Switch holder

Bumper

Top cover

Proximity switch

Parallel pin

Sheet gasket

Spring washer

Socket head cap screw

Seal washer

Cover cap screw

Spacer

Short head cap screw

q

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

!0

!1

!2

!3

!4

Note 1) T = TURCK, P = P&FNote 2) Please specify the opening angle by the

code in Table 1.

t

u!0oqe!2yi

w r!1

A-A

A

!4 !3

A

Series CKZ2N

Allowable Locking Moment

Maximum Clamping Moment

Cylinder Stroke

Bore size (mm)Allowable locking moment

N·m

800

1500

2500

lbf · in

7080

13274

22124

50

63

80

Unit: (mm)

Angle

Bore size

50

63

80

30°

31.1

34.1

47.3

45°

38.9

42.5

59.4

60°

46.4

50.5

71.1

75°

54.1

58.6

83.2

90°

61.9

66.8

95.7

105°

69.6

74.7

108.0

120°

76.4

81.5

119.1

135°

81.3

86.3

127.3

∗ The moment when the clamp arm is locked at the time of air release in the clamped state.

50

63

80

100

300

560

885

2655

4956

130

350

720

1150

3097

6372

160

400

880

1416

3540

7788

190

450

1040

1681

3982

9204

220

500

1200

1947

4425

10619

250

550

1360

2212

4867

12035

Bore size (mm)

Max. clamping force

N·m

0.3 MPa

Ibf · in N·m

0.4 MPa

Ibf · in N·m

0.5 MPa

Ibf · in N·m

0.6 MPa

Ibf · in N·m

0.7 MPa

Ibf · in N·m

0.8 MPa

Ibf · in


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

169

170

Release point

PD

±0.0

5P

B±0

.02

LA

±0.1

LB

L

B

E

PA±0.02 PC±0.05

2 x 2 x øPH7

Depth D

2 x 2 x MMDepth J

2 x 2 x NPT 1/4G

RD

RC (Left arm)

RA (Dual arm)

RB (Right arm)

Socketset screw

RR

R

GB

GC

N

GA

XC

XB

XA

C

RW

Pivot point with square flats Nh9

Dimensions

Bore size(mm)

506380

B

(mm)

95

112

154

C

48

54

76

D

12

15

12

E

13.7

16.6

19.6

GA

134.3

141.2

185.8

GB

138.5

147.5

199

GC

93

90.5

137.5

J

12

12

18

L

376.7

395.6

530.9

LA

149.5

158.5

214

LB

78.4

78

113.7

MM

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

M12 x 1.75

N

19

22

30

P

8

10

12

Bore size(mm)

506380

PA

45

55

70

PB

45

45

75

PC

5

10

15

PD

40

55

65

R

45

52

70

RA

88

104

140

RB

20

25

32

RC

20

25

32

RD

45

50

68

RR

48

54

76

W

78.4

78

113.7

XA

141.8

154.4

197.3

XB

137.3

150.4

192.8

XC

92.8

105.3

148.3

Series CKZ2N

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

171

53±0

.05

R45 33

19

R25

19

ø6.5

1810

R6

20±0

.03

AM6 x 1.0

30±0.02530±0.025

20±0

.03

10

3

R45

50±0

.05

25±0

.05

I

B

D

F

A

C

E

G

H19

R25

19

ø6.5

18

10

R6

ø11through

ø8F7through

+0.028+0.013

M6 x 1.0

30±0.02530±0.025

20±0

.03

10

3

R45

50±0

.05

25±0

.05

I

B

D

F

A

C

E

G

H

19

R25

19

ø6.5

18

10

R6

ø9 through

ø6F7through

+0.022+0.010

M6 x 1.0

B

D

30±0.02530±0.025

A

C

EF

G

I

20±0

.03

10

H

15±0

.03

15±0

.03

30319

R25

ø6.5

19

18

10

R6

ø11through

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

M6 x 1.0

1620

±0.0

3

18R6

32

R25

ø6.5

19

19

M6 x 1.0

10

A

B

D

30±0.02530±0.025

A

C

EF

G

I

20±0

.03

10

H

15±0

.03

15±0

.03

30319

R25

ø6.5

19

18

10

R6

ø9 through

ø6F7 through+0.022+0.010

M6 x 1.0

Dimensions

Arm / ø50Straight-Plain 20 mm Offset-Plain

25 mm Offset-Machined


Straight-Machined

Straight-Machined

Part no.

CKZ-50A004CKZ-50A005CKZ-50A006

NAAMScode

ACA206MACA207MACA208M

A

80.0110.0140.0

B

65.0 95.0125.0

C

50.0 80.0110.0

D

—65.095.0

E

—50.080.0

F

——

65.0

G

——

50.0

H

90.0120.0150.0

I

65.0 95.0125.0

Weightkg (lbs)0.5 (1.10)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

80.0110.0140.0

B

65.0 95.0125.0

C

50.0 80.0110.0

D

—65.095.0

E

—50.080.0

F

——

65.0

G

——

50.0

H

90.0120.0150.0

I

65.0 95.0125.0

Weightkg (lbs)0.5 (1.10)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

80.0110.0140.0

B

65.0 95.0125.0

C

50.0 80.0110.0

D

—65.095.0

E

—50.080.0

F

——

65.0

G

——

50.0

H

90.0120.0150.0

I

56.0 86.0116.0

Weightkg (lbs)0.5 (1.10)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

80.0110.0140.0

B

65.0 95.0125.0

C

50.0 80.0110.0

D

—65.095.0

E

—50.080.0

F

——

65.0

G

——

50.0

H

90.0120.0150.0

I

56.0 86.0116.0

Weightkg (lbs)0.5 (1.10)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)

Part no.CKZ-50A001CKZ-50A002CKZ-50A003

NAAMS codeACA201MACA202MACA203M

A 90.0120.0150.0

Weight kg (lbs)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)0.9 (1.98)



A 90.0120.0150.0

Weight kg (lbs)0.7 (1.54)0.8 (1.76)1.0 (2.20)


172

B

D

30±0.02530±0.025

F

1

1

I

R25

A

C

E

G 20±0

.03

10

R6

10

75±0

.05

J25

±0.0

5

H

19

R25

ø6.5

19

18

ø9 through

ø6F7 through+0.022+0.010

M6 x 1.0

45°

B

D

30±0.02530±0.025

F

I

R25

A

C

E

G 20±0

.03

10

75±0

.05

J

25±0

.05

H

19

R25

ø6.5

19

ø11 through

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

M6 x 1.0

45°

1

1

R6

10

18

1

1

R25

BA

78±0

.05

33

19

R25

ø6.5

1918

10

R6

20±0

.03

M6 x 1.0

45°

Dimensions

50 mm Offset-Machined 50 mm Offset-Machined

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

80.0110.0140.0

B

65.0 95.0125.0

C

50.0 80.0110.0

D

—65.095.0

E

—50.080.0

F

——

65.0

G

——

50.0

H

90.0120.0150.0

I J

60.0 90.0120.0

56.0 86.0116.0

Weightkg (lbs)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)0.8 (1.76)



A B 90.0120.0150.0

55.0 85.0115.0

Weight kg (lbs)0.8 (1.76)0.9 (1.98)1.1 (2.42)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

80.0110.0140.0

B

65.0 95.0125.0

C

50.0 80.0110.0

D

—65.095.0

E

—50.080.0

F

——

65.0

G

——

50.0

H

90.0120.0150.0

I J

60.0 90.0120.0

56.0 86.0116.0

Weightkg (lbs)0.6 (1.32)0.7 (1.54)0.8 (1.76)

45 mm Offset-Plain

Series CKZ2N

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

173

1925

±0.0

338

A

2012.5

R7

22

R27

22

ø8.5

M8 x 1.25

25±0

.03

R7

R50

57±0

.05

37

A

2012

.5

22

22

R27

ø8.5

M8 x 1.25

30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

Q

AB

C

J

D

K

E

L

F

M

G

N

H

O

I

R28

25±0

.03

12.5

P

433

15±0

.03

18±0

.03

22

20

R7

12.5

ø8.5

22

ø11 throughø8F7 through+0.028

+0.013

M8 x 1.25

12.5

R27

30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

30±0

.05

25±0

.03

AB

CD

FE

HG

IJ

KL

MN

O

PQ

55±0

.05

3

R50

ø8.5

22

R7

22

20

12.5

ø8F7 through

+0.028+0.013

M8 x 1.25

ø11 through

Dimensions

Arm / ø63Straight-Plain 20 mm Offset-Plain

Straight-Machined 25 mm Offset-Machined

Part no.CKZ-63A013CKZ-63A014CKZ-63A015CKZ-63A016CKZ-63A017CKZ-63A018

NAAMS codeACA013MACA014MACA015MACA016MACA017MACA018M

A135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Weight kg (lbs)1.4 (3.09)1.6 (3.53)1.8 (3.97)2.0 (4.41)2.2 (4.85)2.4 (5.29)



A135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Weight kg (lbs)1.2 (2.64)1.4 (3.09)1.6 (3.53)1.8 (3.97)2.1 (4.63)2.3 (5.07)

Part no.

CKZ-63A007CKZ-63A008CKZ-63A009CKZ-63A010CKZ-63A011CKZ-63A012

NAAMScode

ACA007MACA008MACA009MACA010MACA011MACA012M

A

125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0

B

110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0260.0

C

95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0

D

80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0

E

65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0

F

— 80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0

G

— 65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0

H

——

80.0110.0140.0170.0

I

——

65.0 95.0125.0155.0

Part no.


NAAMScode


KJ

———

65.0 95.0125.0

———

80.0110.0140.0

L

————

80.0110.0

M

————

65.095.0

N

—————

80.0

O

—————

65.0

P

135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Q

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

Weightkg (lbs)1.0 (2.20)1.2 (2.64)1.4 (3.09)1.5 (3.31)1.7 (3.75)1.9 (4.19)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0

B

110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0260.0

C

95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0

D

80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0

E

65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0

F

— 80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0

G

— 65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0

H

——

80.0110.0140.0170.0

I

——

65.0 95.0125.0155.0


Part no.


NAAMScode


K

———

65.0 95.0125.0

J

———

80.0110.0140.0

L

————

80.0110.0

M

————

65.095.0

N

—————

80.0

O

—————

65.0

P

135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Q

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

Weightkg (lbs)1.3 (2.86)1.5 (3.31)1.6 (3.53)1.7 (3.75)1.9 (4.19)2.1 (4.63)

174

152±

0.0512

2.7

R38 37

A

1

1

20

22

ø8.5

22

M8 x 1.25

25±0

.03

R28

12.5

R7

AB

CD

F

PQ R

E

HG

IJ

KL

MN

O

12.5

45°R38

22

2220

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

ø11 through

M8 x 1.25

R7

1

1

12.5 ø8.5

30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

R28

25±0

.03

100±

0.05

30±0

.05

3

PQ

R38

ø8.5

12.5

4.4

M8 x 1.25

R7

120.

8

2220

22A

BC

DE

F

HG

IJ

KL

MN

Oø11 through

ø8F7 through

+0.028+0.013

30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

25±0

.03

150±

0.05

30±0

.05

112

.5

R281

102±

0.05

25±0

.03

R7

R28

45°R38

AB

M8 x 1.25

ø8.512

.5

20

22

22

37

1

1

Dimensions

65 mm Offset-Plain115 mm Offset-Plain

70 mm Offset-Machined 120 mm Offset-Machined



A135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Weight kg (lbs)2.1 (4.63)2.3 (5.07)2.5 (5.51)2.7 (5.96)2.9 (6.40)3.1 (6.84)



B 81.3111.3141.3171.3201.3231.3

A135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Weight kg (lbs)1.7 (3.75)1.9 (4.19)2.1 (4.63)2.3 (5.07)2.5 (5.51)2.7 (5.96)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0

B

110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0260.0

C

95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0

D

80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0

E

65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0

F

— 80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0

G

— 65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0

H

——

80.0110.0140.0170.0

I

——

65.0 95.0125.0155.0

J

———

80.0110.0140.0

Part no.


NAAMScode


K

———

65.0 95.0125.0

L

————

80.0110.0

M

————

65.095.0

N

—————

80.0

O

—————

65.0

P

135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Q

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

R

84.0114.0144.0174.0204.0234.0

Weightkg (lbs)

1.4 (3.09)1.6 (3.53)1.8 (3.97)1.9 (4.19)2.1 (4.63)2.3 (5.07)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0

B

110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0260.0

C

95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0

D

80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0230.0

E

65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0

F

— 80.0110.0140.0170.0200.0

G

— 65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0

H

——

80.0110.0140.0170.0

I

——

65.0 95.0125.0155.0

J

———

80.0110.0140.0

Part no.


NAAMScode


K

———

65.0 95.0125.0

L

————

80.0110.0

M

————

65.095.0

N

—————

80.0

O

—————

65.0

P

135.0165.0195.0225.0255.0285.0

Q

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

Weightkg (lbs)

1.8 (3.97)2.0 (4.41)2.1 (4.63)2.3 (5.07)2.5 (5.51)2.6 (5.73)

Series CKZ2N

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

175

62±0

.05

42

M10 x 1.5

30

30

R37

R40

R9

16

ø10.5

26

32±0

.03

A

2532

±0.0

3

R37

50

A

ø10.5

30

30

M10 x 1.5

1626R9

Dimensions

Part no.

CKZ-80A001CKZ-80A002CKZ-80A003CKZ-80A004CKZ-80A005CKZ-80A006CKZ-80A007CKZ-80A008CKZ-80A009

NAAMS codeACA100MACA101MACA102MACA103MACA104MACA105MACA106MACA107MACA108M

A155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

Weight kg (lbs)

2.3 (5.07)2.7 (5.96)3.0 (6.62)3.4 (7.50)3.8 (8.38)4.2 (9.27)4.5 (9.93)4.9 (10.81)5.3 (11.69)

Part no.



A155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

Weight kg (lbs)

2.4 (5.29)2.7 (5.96)3.0 (6.62)3.3 (7.28)3.6 (7.94)3.9 (8.60)4.2 (9.27)4.6 (10.15)4.9 (10.81)

Arm / ø80Straight-Plain

20 mm Offset-Plain


176

32±0

.03

20±0

.03

24±0

.03

AB

CD

EF

GHI

JK

LM

NO

PQ

RS

TU 16

5.8

44

2616R9

R37

30 30

ø10.5

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

ø11 throughM10 x 1.530±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

WV

AB

CD

EF

GHI

JK

MN

OP

QR

ST

U

L

W

535

±0.0

5

60±0

.05

R60

30

R37ø10.5

30

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

ø11 through

M10 x 1.5

16

V

30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

32±0

.03

R926

16

Dimensions

Straight-Machined

Part no.


NAAMScode

ACA130MACA131MACA132MACA133MACA134MACA135MACA136MACA137MACA138M

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W

145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0385.0

130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0370.0

115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

—100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0

— 85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0

——

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0

——

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0

———

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0

———

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

————

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0

————

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0

—————

100.0130.0160.0190.0

—————

85.0115.0145.0175.0

——————

100.0130.0160.0

——————

85.0115.0145.0

———————

100.0130.0

———————

85.0115.0

————————

100.0

————————

85.0

155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

Weightkg (lbs)

2.1 (4.63)2.3 (5.07)2.6 (5.73)2.8 (6.18)3.0 (6.62)3.2 (7.06)3.5 (7.72)3.8 (8.38)4.0 (8.83)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W

145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0385.0

130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0370.0

115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

—100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0

— 85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0

——

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0

——

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0

———

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0

———

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

————

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0

————

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0

—————

100.0130.0160.0190.0

—————

85.0115.0145.0175.0

——————

100.0130.0160.0

——————

85.0115.0145.0

———————

100.0130.0

———————

85.0115.0

————————

100.0

————————

85.0

155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

Weightkg (lbs)

2.1 (4.63)2.4 (5.29)2.7 (5.96)3.0 (6.62)3.3 (7.28)3.6 (7.94)3.9 (8.60)4.2 (9.27)4.5 (9.93)


Series CKZ2N

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

177

B

45°R40

157 ±

0.05

42

A

30

ø10.5

R37

30

M10 x 1.5

16

1

1

26

R9

32±0

.03

B

32±0

.03

45° R40

107±

0.05

42

A

30

30R37

ø10.5

M10 x 1.5

26

1

1

R9

16

Dimensions

65 mm Offset-Plain

Part no.



B113.0143.0173.0203.0233.0263.0293.0323.0353.0

A155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

Weight kg (lbs)

2.7 (5.96)3.0 (6.62)3.3 (7.28)3.6 (7.94)3.9 (8.60)4.2 (9.27)4.5 (9.93)4.8 (10.59)5.1 (11.25)

Part no.



B 64.0 94.0124.0154.0184.0214.0244.0274.0304.0

A155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

Weight kg (lbs)

3.0 (6.62)3.3 (7.28)3.6 (7.94)3.9 (8.60)4.2 (9.27)4.5 (9.93)4.8 (10.59)5.2 (11.47)5.5 (12.14)

115 mm Offset-Plain


178

K

MN

OP

QR

ST

U

L

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJ

R40

45°

105±

0.05

5

16

VW

X

30

30

1

1R9

16

ø11 through

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

M10 x 1.5

ø10.5

26

R37

30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

32±0

.03

35±0

.05

K

MN

OP

QR

ST

U

L

AB

C

VW

X

DE

FG

HI

J

R4045°

5

1615

5±0.

05

116

1

30

R37

30

ø11 through

ø8F7 through+0.028+0.013

M10 x 1.5

35±0

.05 32

±0.0

330±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025 30±0.025

R9

26

ø10.5

Dimensions



Part no.


NAAMScode


A

145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0385.0

B

130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0370.0

C

115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0

D

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0

E

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

F

—100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0

G

— 85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0

H

——

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0

I

——

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0

J

———

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0

K

———

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

L

————

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0

M

————

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0

N

—————

100.0130.0160.0190.0

O

—————

85.0115.0145.0175.0

P

——————

100.0130.0160.0

Q

——————

85.0115.0145.0

R

———————

100.0130.0

S

———————

85.0115.0

T

————————

100.0

U

————————

85.0

V

155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

W

115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0

X

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

Weightkg (lbs)

2.4 (5.29)2.6 (5.73)2.8 (6.18)3.1 (6.84)3.3 (7.28)3.5 (7.72)3.8 (8.38)4.0 (8.83)4.3 (9.49)

Part no.


NAAMScode


A

145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0385.0

B

130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0370.0

C

115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0355.0

D

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0340.0

E

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

F

—100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0310.0

G

— 85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0

H

——

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0280.0

I

——

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0

J

———

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0250.0

K

———

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0

L

————

100.0130.0160.0190.0220.0

M

————

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0

N

—————

100.0130.0160.0190.0

O

—————

85.0115.0145.0175.0

P

——————

100.0130.0160.0

Q

——————

85.0115.0145.0

R

———————

100.0130.0

S

———————

85.0115.0

T

————————

100.0

U

————————

85.0

V

155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0335.0365.0395.0

W

85.0115.0145.0175.0205.0235.0265.0295.0325.0

X

65.0 95.0125.0155.0185.0215.0245.0275.0305.0

Weightkg (lbs)

2.7 (5.96)2.9 (6.40)3.2 (7.06)3.4 (7.50)3.6 (7.94)3.9 (8.60)4.1 (9.05)4.4 (9.71)4.6(10.15)

Series CKZ2N

Series CKZ2NMade to Order 1Contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and delivery.

Power clamp cylinder with metal cover1

Manual toggle releaseThe toggle link mechanism can be released easily by opening the metal cover and hitting the portion of the protrusion by using of plas-tic hammer (hammer made of soft material), etc.

• Applicable modelCKZ2N50, 63, 80

• Applicable to Arc-melting-resistant line• In addition to the existing rubber cover type, Opening/closing metal cover type is

available for releasing part of the toggle construction.

Cylinder SpecificationsBore size (mm) 50 63 80

Angle

Cushion



Minimum operating time

30°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 105°, 120°, 135°

Unclamping side: Rubber bumper

0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)

1.0 sec. to clamp, 1.0 sec. to unclamp

Metal cover

Protrusion

Power clamp cylinder front mounting type2


• Applicable to front mounting type conforming to the new NAAMS.

Mounting surface


Angle

Cushion




30°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 105°, 120°, 135°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

179

Series CKZ2NMade to Order 2Contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and delivery.

Unclamped opening angle 15° kit (for change of angle)3


• In addition to the standard unclamped opening angle, 15° specification is available.• Unclamped opening angle can be changed to 15° without disassembling the toggle

construction.


Angle

Cushion




15°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)


180

506380506380506380506380

5.0 to 7.05.0 to 7.05.0 to 7.03.0 to 4.03.0 to 4.03.0 to 4.0130 to 150160 to 200480 to 5202.5 to 3.02.5 to 3.03.0 to 5.0

Bore size(mm)

Tightening torque Description

Switch cassette kit

Switch actuator kit

Stopper bolt kit

Top cover kit

N·m44 to 6244 to 6244 to 6227 to 3527 to 3527 to 35

1150 to 13271416 to 17704248 to 4600

22 to 2722 to 2727 to 44

Ibf · in

Release Point

506380

12 to 1515 to 2018 to 24

Bore size (mm)Tightening torque

N·m

106 to 133133 to 177159 to 212

Ibf · in

Series CKZ2NSpecific Product PrecautionsBe sure to read this before handling. Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Actuator Precautions.

1. Manual toggle releaseThe toggle link mechanism can be released easily by hitting the portion of round shaped projection on the cover by using of plastic hammer (hammer made of soft material), etc.Please be sure to perform manual toggle release after safety has been confirmed because the clamp arm can suddenly move up during manual release.

2. Do not disassemble the power clamp.No special maintenance is necessary because the power clamp has a fully enclosed design to protect the clamp against welding spatter, and also the power clamp has a contamination resistant construction. So, please do not disassemble the power clamp except changing replaceable parts as there is a possibility of deterioration of the clamp performance.

3. Tightening torque of spare partsPlease make sure to tighten spare parts recommended in ac-cordance with the following torque show in the table.

4. Clamp Arm Tightening Torque

(1) Please make sure that the switch cassette is tightly secured to the body when it has been replaced with a new one.

(2) Please make sure that the switch actuator is mounted so that the stamped side is secured as shown below if replacing.

Note:

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

181

182

New

Series CKZTPower Clamp Cylinder

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

183

∗ For additional formats, please log on to the SMC web site www.smcusa.com and click on the E-Tech icon.

Software

CATIA

UNIGRAPHICS

FIDES

AUTO CAD

SOLID WORKS

3D CAD Series Variations

Series

Bore size (mm)

Arm opening angle

Switch

Port thread type

ø50Equivalentø40 ø63

Equivalent

30°, 45°, 60°, 75°90°, 105°, 120°, 135°

TURCK/P&F

G/NPT

ø80Equivalent

CKZT

External stopper

Toggle link mechanismMaintains secure and powerful support.

Proximity switchBoth TURCK and P&F switches are available.

Fulcrum stopperCoordinates with the external stopper and forms the toggle mechanism.

Seal (Equivalent to UL94 standard VO Flame resistant)Prevents the infiltration of spatter, dust and other contaminants.

BumperReduces the effects of impact from unclamping the cylinder.

SealPrevents the infiltration of spatter, dust and other contaminants.

ArmStandard

184

Series CKZTModel Selection

1 Common precautions for each size1) Use air filtered through a 5-µm-element filter.2) Before piping is connected to the slim-line power clamp cylinder it should be thoroughly flushed with air.3) Only use the clamp arm in our catalog. Do not weld an arm to the cylinder.4) Make sure to use a speed controller and adjust it to more than 1sec. when changing from clamping to unclamping (or vice versa).

ProcedureA) Place the workpiece, supply air at clamp side without installing clamping block, operate the clamp arm to the end of clamp.B) Under the above conditions, adjust shim so that the space between the workpiece and the clamping block is about 0 mm.

Theoretically there is no clamping force for holding a workpiece under this condition.C) In order to generate clamping force from the state described in step B, insert additional shim. The thickness of the shim differs


2 Slim-line power clamp cylinder mountingWhen clamping by using clamping force onlyExample)

Mounting process

Clamp armCylinder

Shim

Shim

Clamping block

Workpiece receptacle side block



Workpiece setting Air supplyOperate to theend of clamp

Shim adjustmentB

A

Install a blockat clamp side

Shim adjustmentC

Block contact adjustment(clamp side)

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

185

186

ø40

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)



0.50 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0.7 MPa0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

2000

1500

1000

500

0


Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

Arm length L: 4 in

Shim thickness (in)


0 0.05

0.040.02 0.06

0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35

500

400

300

200

100

0

Arm length LA

0.7 MPa0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa


ø50

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)



0.50 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa 0.3 MPa

2000

1500

1000

500

0

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

Arm length L: 6 in

Shim thickness (in)


0 0.05

0.040.02 0.06

0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35

500

400

300

200

100

0

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa 0.3 MPa


Note) When a shim that exceeds the clamping force peak plotted on the graph is inserted, the self-locking mechanism doesn’t work.Insert a shim with appropriate thickness. ∗ Arm length “L” indicates the distance between the

clamp arm shaft and the clamping position.For distance “A” between knock positioning pinhole and clamp arm shaft, refer to the Table 1.

Relation between shim thickness and clamping force

CKZT40CKZT50CKZT63CKZT80

0

5

10

15

AModel

Table 1

Model Selection

ø63

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)



0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4000

3000

2000

1000

0

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35

800

600

400

200

0

ø80

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)



0 1 2 2.5 3.53 4 5 6 7 8 9

0.7MPa

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0

0.5 MPa 0.3 MPa

Arm length L: 8 in

Shim thickness (in)


0.080.04 0.12

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)

0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35

1600140012001000800600400200

0

Arm length L: 10 in

Shim thickness (in)


0.140.04 0.10

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa 0.3 MPa

0.7MPa0.5 MPa 0.3 MPa


Model Selection

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

187

2 Slim-line power clamp cylinder mountingWhen using a hard stop

Clamp arm

Shim q

Hard stop section A

Section A

Upper hard stop

Lowerhard stop

ProcedureA) Supply air at clamp side without installation of upper hard stop, and operate the clamp arm to the end of clamp.B) Under the above conditions, adjust shim q so that the space between the upper hard stop and the lower hard stop is about 0

mm. Theoretically there is no clamping force to the lower hard stop under this condition.C) In order to generate clamping force from the state described in step B, insert additional shim. The thickness of the shim differs


D) Under the state described in step C, adjust shim w so there is contact between the clamping block and the workpiece.

PrecautionsWhen using the side guide to the clamp arm to prevent lateral motion, make sure not to apply a lateral load or galling to the clamp arm.

When using the side guide

Arm length L(Distance to a hard stop)

D

Clamp arm

Shim q

Upper hard stop Clamping block

Shim w



Cylinder

Clamp arm

Side guide

Mounting process

Air supplyHard stop

set

A

Operate to theend of clamp

Shim adjustmentB

Install theupper hard

stop

Shim adjustmentShim adjustmentC

Upper hardstop contactadjustment

Workpiecesetting

Block contactadjustment(clamp side)

188

Model Selection

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

189

Relation between clamp arm length and clamping force

θ

W

LFulcrum

Max

imum

cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)


Arm length L (mm)

450400350300250200150100500

ø63

ø50

ø80

Max

imum

cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(lbf)


Arm length L (in)

ø63

ø80

1000

500

1500

2000

2500

0 5 10 15 200

ø50

ø40

ø40

10000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0

3 Clamp armUse the clamp arm in the catalog.

The length of the clamp arm “L” should be the length given below or less.

Allowable load for clamp arm endRefer to the graph on pages 190 and 191 for parts weight of the arm.

Use within the allowable arm end load range according to the distance “L” from the fulcrum to the mounting tool’s center position and the arm opening angle “θ”.

CKZT40CKZT50CKZT63CKZT80

150 mm

150 mm

300 mm

400 mm

Arm length LModel

Model Selection

3 Clamp arm

190

Model SelectionD

ista

nce

from

piv

ot p

oint

(m

m)

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

inch

es)


ø40

ø63

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

inch

es)


Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

inch

es)


ø50

30°45°60°75°

90°105°120°135°


Load capacity (N)

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

mm

)

Load capacity (N)

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

mm

)

Load capacity (N)

6.0

5.5

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

2.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

12.0

11.0

10.0

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

4.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 70 5 10 15 20 25 30

200

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

180

160

140

120

100

800 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

300

280

260

240

220

200

180

160

140

120

1000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

Model Selection

Leave a space in order to release by hitting with a plastic hammer.

Space at manual release

Leave a space for wiring a proximity switch.

150Min.

4 Space in designLeave a space in the below position.

3 Clamp arm

ø80

191

Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

mm

)

Load capacity (N)

30°45°60°75°

90°105°120°135°


Dis

tanc

e fr

om p

ivot

poi

nt (

inch

es)


17.0

16.0

15.0

14.0

13.0

12.0

11.0

10.0

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.00 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

400

380

360

340

320

300

280

260

240

220

200

180

160

1400 5 10 15 20 25 30 3540 45 50 55 60 6570 75 80 85 90 95100 105 110115 120125 130 135

How to Order


ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80Series CKZT

CKZTClamp Cylinder (Without Arm)

Power clamp cylinderEuropean type

63 TN 120 T

Bore size40506380

ø40ø50ø63ø80

Cylinder portNilTN

GNPT

Arm mounting position3045607590

105120135

30°45°60°75°90°

105°120°135°

Switch typeTP

TURCKP&F

CKZTClamp Arm (40)


40 A015 C S

Bore size40 ø40

OffsetA015A045

Offset 15Offset 45

∗ For A015, S type only

Mounting hole

S∗B

D1

68

D2

7 10.2

H1620

øD1

H

øD2

Arm position

R

Right

C

Center

L

Left

H

øD1

øD2

H

øD1

øD2

Symbol

192

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

193

CKZTClamp Cylinder (50, 63, 80)


63 A015 C S

Bore size506380

ø50ø63ø80

OffsetA015A045

Offset 15Offset 45

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

D2

9 10.2

Arm position

R

Right

C

Center

L

Left

øD1 øD2

øD1 øD2

øD1 øD2

Symbol

How to Order

Power Clamp Cylinder Series CKZT

194


Wiring Diagram

Weight (Cylinder Without Arm)

Black

S2 Lood

S1 Lood

(–)

(+)Brown

White

Blue

2

3

1

4

Double acting

Air

1.2 MPa (174 psi)

0.8 MPa (116 psi)

0.3 MPa (44 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)

1.0 second to clamp, 1.0 second to unclamp

Clamping side: None Unclamping side: Rubber bumper

Bore size (mm)

Action

Fluid

Proof pressure




Min. operating time

Cushion

40 50 63 80


Note) Switch specifications are corresponding to manufacturer’s technical information.

Note) Both TURCK and P&F are common.

2 mm ± 10%

10 to 30 VDC

N.O., PNP

150 mA

30 Hz

PBT-GP30

2 mm ± 10%

10 to 30 VDC

N.O., PNP

100 mA

25 Hz

PA6, PBT

Green


Green


Manufacturer

Operating range

Supply voltage

Output

Continuous load current

Response frequency

Housing material

Voltage indication

Output indication

TURCK P&F

Unit: kg (lbs)

Bore size(mm)

40

50

63

80

30°

Arm angle

1.57 (3.45)

5.21 (11.46)

7.37 (16.21)

17.20 (37.84)

45°

1.57 (3.45)

5.19 (11.42)

7.34 (16.15)

17.13 (37.69)

60°

1.57 (3.45)

5.17 (11.37)

7.31 (16.08)

17.07 (37.55)

75°

1.57 (3.45)

5.15 (11.33)

7.28 (16.02)

17.00 (37.40)

90°

1.56 (3.43)

5.12 (11.26)

7.24 (15.93)

16.93 (37.25)

105°

1.56 (3.43)

5.09 (11.20)

7.21 (15.86)

16.86 (37.09)

120°

1.56 (3.43)

5.07 (11.15)

7.18 (15.80)

16.80 (36.96)

135°

1.56 (3.43)

5.06 (11.13)

7.16 (15.75)

16.76 (36.87)

Series CKZT

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

195

Construction (40)

t

!2

u

!0

o

q

e

y

i

w

r

!1

A-A

A A

!3!5 !4


40 CKZT-T040

CKZT-K040 Note 2)CKZT-D040CKZT-B040

t Top cover!3 Spacer!4 Short head cap screw!5 Seal washer

40

CKZT-D040 Note 2)

40 CKZT-S040 Note 1)

q Stayo Spring washer!0 Socket head cap screw



CKZT-B040 Note 2)

w Stopper boltr Bumper!1 O ring

TPSwitch cassette


Top cover kits

Table 1

30°45°60°75°90°

105°120°135°

CodeOpening angle

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

Note 1) T = TURCK, P = P&FNote 2) Please specify the opening angle by the code in Table 1.


196

Construction (50, 63, 80)

!3!4

A-AA A

Table 1

30°45°60°75°90°

105°120°135°

CodeOpening angle

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

t Top cover!3 Spacer!4 Short head cap screw


Switch cassette


Top cover kits

50

63

80

50

63

80








CKZ1N-D080CKZN-B080

CKZ1N-D063CKZN-B063

CKZ1N-D050CKZN-B050


CKZ1N-S050 TP

Note 1)

CKZ1N-S063 TP

Note 1)

CKZ1N-S080 TP

Note 1)

CKZN-K050 Note 2)

CKZN-B050 Note 2)

CKZN-D050 Note 2)

CKZN-B063 Note 2)

CKZN-D063 Note 2)

CKZN-K063 Note 2)

CKZN-B080 Note 2)

CKZN-D080 Note 2)

CKZN-K080 Note 2)

50

63

80

CKZ2N-T050

CKZ2N-T063

CKZ2N-T080

t

!2

u!0oqe

yi

wr!1

Note 1) T = TURCK, P = P&FNote 2) Please specify the opening angle by the code in Table 1.

Series CKZT

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

197

Allowable Locking Moment

Maximum Clamping Moment

Cylinder Stroke

∗ The moment when the clamp arm is locked at the time of air release in the clamped state.

Bore size (mm)Allowable locking moment

N·m

380

800

1500

2500

lbf · in

3363

7080

13274

22124

40

50

63

80

Unit: (mm)

Angle

Bore size

40

50

63

80

30°

26.8

31.1

34.1

47.3

45°

33.3

38.9

42.5

59.4

60°

39.6

46.4

50.5

71.1

75°

45.9

54.1

58.6

83.2

90°

52.3

61.9

66.8

95.7

105°

58.4

69.6

74.7

108.0

120°

63.6

76.4

81.5

119.1

135°

67.3

81.3

86.3

127.3

40

50

63

80

Bore size (mm)

Max. clamping force

35

100

300

560

N·m

0.3 MPa

310

885

2655

4956

Ibf · in

76

130

350

720

N·m

0.4 MPa

673

1150

3097

6372

Ibf · in

118

160

400

880

N·m

0.5 MPa

1044

1416

3540

7788

Ibf · in

154

190

450

1040

N·m

0.6 MPa

1363

1681

3982

9204

Ibf · in

178

220

500

1200

N·m

0.7 MPa

1575

1947

4425

10619

Ibf · in

194

250

550

1360

N·m

0.8 MPa

1717

2212

4867

12035

Ibf · in


198

2 x 2 x ø6 H7 depth 8

2 x 2 x M6 x 1.0 depth 10M6 x 1.0 depth 10

52

35±0.02

35±0.02

25±0

.05

+0.

140

0

38.5

±0.0

525

±0.0

2

106

265.

9

60

202835

83

115

110.5

R80

52

99.4

96.8

44.5

33

54

NPT 1/8G

NPT 1/8G

3.5

47±0

.05

45±0

.1

25±0

.1

0

8N

9 -0.

043

2 x ø6 H7 depth 10

16h9

Release point

12±0.05

Dimensions (Clamp Cylinder Without Arm)

CKZT40

Series CKZT

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

199

XC

XB

RW

LB

PD

±0.0

5

NB

±0.0

5

VD

±0.0

5

VC

±0.1

VB

±0.1

PB

±0.0

2+0.

1 K

0

LA

±0.1

L

E

B

2 x 2 x øP H7 depth D2 x øV H7 depth I

2 x 2 x MM depth J

XA

NA±0.02 NC

PA±0.02 PC±0.05

RB

GA

GB

R

RR

RA

GC

2 x NPT 1/4G

2 x NPT 1/4G

4 x NN depth S

VA±0.02

C

VE

VF

Release point

Nh9

N

Hexagon sockethead plug

Dimensions (Clamp Cylinder Without Arm)

CKZT50, 63, 80

Bore size(mm)

506380

C D E GA GB GC I J K L LA LB MM N NA NB NC NN PB

(mm)

95

112

154

48

54

76

12

12

13

13.7

16.6

19.6

134.3

141.2

185.8

138.5

147.5

199

93

90.5

137.5

10

10

12

12

12

18

55

55

80

376.4

395.6

530.9

149.5

158.5

214

78.4

78

113.7

M10 x 1.5

M10 x 1.5

M12 x 1.75

19

22

30

13

13

21

36.5

36.5

50

10.3

15.8

20.8

M8 x 1.25

M8 x 1.25

M10 x 1.5

10

10

12

Bore size(mm)

506380

XCPA PB PC PD R RA RB RR S V VA VB VC VD VE VF W XA XB

50

50

70

45

45

75

10

10

15

55

55

65

45

52

70

68

78

108

45

50

68

48

54

76

11

11

15

8

8

8

30

30

50

32

32

50

63.5

63.5

90

71.5

71.5

96.5

12

12

12

3.5

3.5

3.5

78.4

78

113.7

141.8

154.4

197.3

137.3

150.4

192.8

92.8

105.3

148.3


200

33 54

23

0

16-0

.1

31

22±0

.115

±0.2

117

16

48

(7) 20±0.2

20±0.02 90±0.1

2 x ø6H7 through

2 x ø7 through

Center type

Left type

Right type

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through

34

20

44

48 68

28±0

.115

±0.2

19

144

65

(9) 30±0.2

30±0.02 105±0.1

Center type

Left type

Right type

Dimensions (Clamp Arm: Offset 15)

ø40

ø50

WeightCKZT40-A015CSCKZT40-A015RSCKZT40-A015LS

0.49 (1.08)0.51 (1.12)0.51 (1.12)

CKZT40 A015 C S

CRL

CenterRightLeft

Arm position

Weight

kg (lbs)

kg (lbs)CKZT50-A015CSCKZT50-A015CBCKZT50-A015RSCKZT50-A015RBCKZT50-A015LSCKZT50-A015LB

0.79 (1.74)0.78 (1.72)0.90 (1.98)0.89 (1.96)0.90 (1.98)0.89 (1.96)

CKZT50 A015 CArm position

CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

D2

9 10.2

Symbol

How to Order

How to Order

Series CKZT

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

201

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through

37

47

20

54 78

28±0

.115

±0.2

144

22

65

(9) 30±0.2

30±0.02 105±0.1

Right type

Center type

Left type

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through

76 108

50.5

2563

35±0

.120

±0.2

179

30

64

(9) 30±0.2

30±0.02 140±0.1

Center type

Left type

Right type

ø63

ø80

WeightCKZT80-A015CSCKZT80-A015CBCKZT80-A015RSCKZT80-A015RBCKZT80-A015LSCKZT80-A015LB

2.17 (4.78)2.16 (4.76)2.21 (4.87)2.19 (4.83)2.21 (4.87)2.19 (4.83)


CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

D2

9 10.2

Symbol

Weight

kg (lbs)


1.02 (2.25)1.01 (2.23)1.10 (2.43)1.08 (2.38)1.10 (2.43)1.08 (2.38)


CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

D2

9 10.2

Symbol

How to Order

How to Order



202

34

20

44

48 68

28±0

.145

±0.2

18

144

65

30±0.2

30±0.02 105±0.1

Center type

Left type

Right type

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through

(9)

33 54

2333

22±0

.145

±0.2

140

16

72

30±0.02

30±0.02 100±0.1

Center type

Left type

Right type

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through (10)

0

H-0

.1ø40

ø50

Weight CKZT50-A045CSCKZT50-A045CBCKZT50-A045RSCKZT50-A045RBCKZT50-A045LSCKZT50-A045LB

0.93 (2.05)0.92 (2.03)1.02 (2.25)1.01 (2.23)1.02 (2.25)1.01 (2.23)


CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

Symbol D2

9 10.2

Weight

kg (lbs)


0.63 (1.39)0.64 (1.41)0.64 (1.41)0.66 (1.46)0.64 (1.41)0.66 (1.46)


CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

Symbol D2

7 10.2

H1620

How to Order

How to Order

Series CKZT


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

203

37

47

20

54 78

28±0

.145

±0.2

144

22

64

30±0.2

30±0.02 105±0.1

Center type

Left type

Right type

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through (9)

76 108

50.5

2563

35±0

.145

±0.2

179

30

64

30±0.2

30±0.02 140±0.1

Center type

Left type

Right type

2 x øD1H7 through

2 x øD2 through(9)

ø63

ø80

WeightCKZT80-A045CSCKZT80-A045CBCKZT80-A045RSCKZT80-A045RBCKZT80-A045LSCKZT80-A045LB

2.46 (5.42)2.44 (5.38)2.61 (5.75)2.59 (5.71)2.61 (5.75)2.59 (5.71)


CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

D2

9 10.2

Symbol

Weight

kg (lbs)


1.19 (2.62)1.18 (2.60)1.25 (2.76)1.23 (2.71)1.25 (2.76)1.23 (2.71)

How to Order


CRL

CenterRightLeft

S

Mounting hole

SB

D1

68

D2

9 10.2

Symbol

How to Order



Series CKZTMade to Order 1Contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and delivery.

Power clamp cylinder with metal cover1

Manual toggle releaseThe toggle link mechanism can be released easily by opening the metal cover and hitting the portion of the protrusion by using of plas-tic hammer (hammer made of soft material), etc.

• Applicable modelCKZT40, 50, 63, 80

• Applicable to Arc-melting-resistant line• In addition to the existing rubber cover type, Opening/closing metal cover type is

available for releasing part of the toggle construction.


Angle

Cushion




30°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 105°, 120°, 135°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)


Metal cover

Protrusion

Power clamp cylinder with angle adjustment2


• Unclamped opening angle can be adjusted by one process. (no need to adjust the proximity switch)

• Adjustable range: 30° to 135°• With angle scale


Angle

Cushion




30° to 135°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)


Angle adjustment bolt

Angle scale

204

Power clamp cylinder with manually operated handle3

• Applicable modelCKZT50, 63, 80

• Applicable to equipment requiring manual clamps.• Handle unit R/L is replaceable. • Self-weight drop prevention when unclamping


Angle

Cushion




30°, 45°, 60°,75°, 90°, 105°

30°, 45°, 60°, 75°,90°, 105°, 120°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)


Pneumatic sensor

Power clamp cylinder with pneumatic sensor4

• Applicable modelCKZT50, 63, 80

• Applicable to all air circuit equipment.• Built-in mechanical valve. Position detection is possible at clamping or unclamping

according to the signal received from the mechanical valve.

Clamping Unclamping

ClampingWith cover removed

Unclamping

Clamping output signal pressure port

Signal pressure supply port

Unclamping output signal pressure port

Mechanical valve



Angle

Cushion




30°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 105°, 120°, 135°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

205

Unclamped opening angle 15° kit (for change of angle)5


• In addition to the standard unclamped opening angle, 15° specification is available.• Unclamped opening angle can be changed to 15° without disassembling the toggle

construction.


Angle

Cushion




15°


0.8 MPa (116 psi)

–10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)



206

1. Manual toggle releaseThe toggle link mechanism can be released easily by hitting the portion of round shaped projection on the cover by using of plastic hammer (hammer made of soft material), etc.Please be sure to perform manual toggle release after safety has been confirmed because the clamp arm can suddenly move up during manual release.

2. Do not disassemble the power clampNo special maintenance is necessary because the power clamp has a fully enclosed design to protect the clamp against welding spatter, and also the power clamp has a contamination resistant construction. So, please do not disassemble the pow-er clamp except changing replaceable parts as there is a possi-bility of deterioration of the clamp performance.

3. Tightening torque of spare partsPlease make sure to tighten spare parts recommended in ac-cordance with the following torque shown in the table.

40506380

Bore size (mm)Tightening torque

40506380405063804050638040506380

3.0 to 4.05.0 to 7.05.0 to 7.05.0 to 7.01.5 to 2.03.0 to 4.03.0 to 4.03.0 to 4.0

12.5 to 17.0130 to 150160 to 200480 to 5201.5 to 2.02.5 to 3.02.5 to 3.03.0 to 5.0

Bore size(mm)

Tightening torque Description

Switch cassette kit

Switch bracket kit

Stopper bolt kit

Top cover kit

N·m27 to 3544 to 6244 to 6244 to 6213 to 1827 to 3527 to 3527 to 35

110 to 1501150 to 13271416 to 17704248 to 4600

13 to 1822 to 2722 to 2727 to 44

Ibf · in

Series CKZTSpecific Product PrecautionsBe sure to read this before handling. Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Actuator Precautions.

Note: (1) Please make sure that the switch cassette is tightly se-cured to the body when it has been replaced with a new one.

(2) Please make sure that the dog is mounted so that the stamped side is secured as shown below if replacing.

4. Clamp Arm Tightening Torque

6 to 912 to 1515 to 2018 to 24

N·m53 to 80

106 to 133133 to 177159 to 212

Ibf · in

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

207

208

Series CLKZ1R


CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

209

Height (mm)

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

CLKZ1R200

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

–10.0 –8.0 –6.0 –4.0 –2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

CLKZ1R110

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

Height (mm)

–10.0 –8.0 –6.0 –4.0 –2.0 0.0 2.0 4.00

250

500

750

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

CLKZ1R040

Height (mm)

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

0100200300400500600700800900

1000

–10.0 –8.0 –6.0 –4.0 –2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

CLKZ1R200

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

Height (mm)

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

–10.0 –8.0 –6.0 –4.0 –2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

CLKZ1R110

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

Height (mm)

0

250

500

750

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

–10.0 –8.0 –6.0 –4.0 –2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

040

Cla

mpi

ng fo

rce

(N)

Height (mm)

0

200

400

600

800

1000

–10.0 –8.0 –6.0 –4.0 –2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0

0.7 MPa

0.5 MPa

0.3 MPa

100 mm

0 mm

–

+

Clamping Force (measured at a position 100 mm from the fulcrum)

The work piece can be held with a constant clamping force regardless of its height. (–4 to +2 mm)

The work piece can be clamped at a constant holding force regardless of its height. (–4 to +2 mm)

The clamping force that remains when the air supply is cut off after clamping at a given pressure. (measured at a position 100 mm from the fulcrum)Holding Force

210

CLKZ1RPower clamp cylinder

conforming to theCNOMO standard

040 N

Category

X1121A

FluidOperating pressure rangeProof pressureOperating temperature rangePort sizeCushionArm angleOperating time (at supply pressure of 0.5 MPa)Clamping force (at supply pressure of 0.5 MPa)Holding force (at supply pressure of 0.5 MPa)Max. allowable load (at supply pressure of 0.5 MPa)Max. allowable moment of inertia (at supply pressure of 0.5 MPa)Unclamp side locking forceWeight (including short arm)

CategoryAir (Non-lube)0.3 to 0.7 MPa

1.05 MPa–10°C to +70°C

G1/8Unclamp side rubber bumper

105 (Standard) / 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90° (Option)Clamp: 0.5 s Unclamp: 0.5 s

110 N·m or more82.5 N·m or more

1.3 N·m0.02 kg·m2

5.5 N·m or more3.6 kg

200 N·m or more150 N·m or more

1.9 N·m0.03 kg·m2

10 N·m or more5.9 kg

40 N·m or more30 N·m or more

0.9 N·m0.01 kg·m2

2 N·m or more1.7 kg

040 110 200

Rated operating distance SNReproducibilityHysteresisApplicable applied voltageSupply voltageVoltage dropOutput functionMinimum operating currentMaximum operating currentResidual currentNominal temperature of applicationAmbient temperatureDegree of protectionProtection against excess current(short circuit) or overloadsProtection against polarity inversions

1.5 (mm) ± 10% 0.1 (mm)

0.1 (mm) H 1 (mm)DC24 (V)

DC10 to 30 (V) 5 (V)

Normally Open2.5 (mA)100 (mA)

0.6 (mA)25 (°C)

–10 (°C) Ta 70 (°C)IP67

Non polarized

Withoutarm

Cylinder Part No.



How to Order

OptionSymbol

NilX1121AX1121BX1121CX1121DX1121EX1121F

Arm angle105°15°30°45°60°75°90°

040110200

40daN type110daN type200daN type

0–5°

Proximity SwitchCategory

040

110/200

∗ With 2 mounting screws

Proximity switch part no.

D-NF001

D-NF002

Sw

itch

mai

n ci

rcui

t

Load2 OUT ( )

4 OUT ( )

Powersupply

Load

1 OUT ( ) Common

The detector is equipped with a protection system guaranteeing itscorrect operation in spite of an excess current of 2xle (200 mA) for 100 µs.

Unclamp(Green)

Clamp(Yellow)


Series CLKZ1R

211

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

212

Series CLKZ1R

CLKZ1R040-N 1 dimension projection

Mounting Pin (2 pcs.)

20

20 ± 0.1

25

ø8.

5

M8 x 1.25

ø14

h60 –0.0

11(

)

17

81.5

14

36

28

47

Inductive proximity sensor

D-NF001

G1/8Unclamp side

G1/8Clamp side

F

F

27.5

15 ±

0.1

25 ±

0.0

1

207

27.525 ± 0.01

1266.5

67.5

15

13.5

37

(60)

(65)

(32.

5)

105°

2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

12 ± 0.1

26

G1/8 (Plug)

Unclamp side

G1/8 (Plug)

Clamp side

Dimensions

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

213

Series CLKZ1RPower Clamp CylinderConforming to the CNOMO Standard

Dimensions

CLKZ1R110-N 1 dimension projection


17

20

28 ± 0.1

33

M8 x 1.25

ø8.

5

ø14

h60 –0.0

11(

)

16 ± 0.1

40

G1/8 (Plug)

Unclamp side

G1/8 (Plug)

Clamp side

86

23.5

12.5

78

37.528 ± 0.01

55 ±

0.0

137

.5

25 ±

0.1

(55)

47

(68)

251

20

105°

(61)

2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

9816

40

42

62

D-NF002

Inductive proximity sensor

G1/8Unclamp side

G1/8Clamp side

F

F

214

Series CLKZ1R

Dimensions

1 dimension projectionCLKZ1R200-N


17

20

28 ± 0.1

33

M8 x 1.25

ø8.

5

ø14

h60 –0.0

11(

)

16 ± 0.1

50

G1/8 (Plug)

Unclamp side

G1/8 (Plug)

Clamp side

100

23.5

17.5

78

37.528 ± 0.01

55 ±

0.0

137

.5

25 ±

0.1

(60)

58

(82)

280

25

105°

(74)

2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

113

16

50

55

85

G1/8

D-NF002Inductive proximity sensor

Unclamp side

G1/8

Clamp side

F

F


Adapter For mounting example, refer to page 217.

CKZR-A040R CKZR-A040L

CKZR-A110R CKZR-A110L

Category

040110/200

Right-handed type

CKZR-A040R

CKZR-A110R

Left-handed type

CKZR-A040L

CKZR-A110L

Section A-ASection A-A

∗ 2 mounting pins∗ Select long arm when using an adapter.

1 dimension projection

2 x M5 x 0.8 depth 9

12 ±

0.1

19 ± 0.1 108

20.5

52 52 6

2 x M5 x 0.8 depth 912

± 0

.1

19 ± 0.1 108

20.5

52 52

6

54

131.5

10

50

12.5

25 ±

0.0

1

12.5

25 ± 0.01

25 ± 0.01

C22

80

C20

38

4 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

54

131.5

10

50

12.5

25 ±

0.0

1

12.525 ± 0.01

25 ± 0.01

C22

80

C20

38

4 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

C24

12.5

28 ±

0.0

1

44122

12.5

55 ± 0.01

28 ± 0.01

C50

55 ±

0.0

1

80

158

211

14

4 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

2 x M6 x 1.0

15 18

3

2 x ø6.2

2 x M6 x 1.0

15 18

3

2 x ø6.2

A A

16 ±

0.1 82 82

28.5

13 ± 0.113 ± 0.1

8

187

AA

16 ±

0.1

82 82

28.5

13 ± 0.113 ± 0.1

8

187

12.5

28 ±

0.0

1

44122

12.5

55 ± 0.01

28 ± 0.01

C24 C50

55 ±

0.0

1

80

158

211

14

4 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

215

216

Series CLKZ1R

Mounting Pin

CKZR-P040

∗ Quantity: 2 pcs. for each

Category

040110/200

Mounting pin part no.

CKZR-P040

CKZR-P110

Arm

CKZR-Y040 CKZR-Y110 SN

CKZR-P110

CKZR-Y200 -ASN

Mounting Pin (2 pcs.) Mounting Pin (2 pcs.)

( ): In case of CKZR-Y200N-A

Category

040110200

Short arm

CKZR-Y040

Long arm

CKZR-Y110S

CKZR-Y200S-A

CKZR-Y110N

CKZR-Y200N-A



For mounting example, refer to page 217.

∗ Select long arm when using an adapter.

17 17

M8 x 1.25

ø8.

5

20

28 ± 0.1

33

ø14

h60 –0.0

11(

)

M8 x 1.25

ø8.

5

20

20 ± 0.1

25

ø14

h60 –0.0

11(

)

47

28

26

62

4241

14

ø12

61(89)

68(96)

Bolt

M6 x 1 x 25 L

20

15

65

60

Bolt

M5 x 0.8 x 25 L

10

ø8

( ): In case of CKZR-Y110N

46

85

55

82(110)

16

74(102)

ø12

25

Bolt

M8 x 1.25 x 32 L

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

217

Adapter/Arm Mounting Example

CLKZ1R040-N

CLKZ1R110-N

CLKZ1R200-N


47

12 ± 0.1

6216 ± 0.1

8516 ± 0.1

47

12 ± 0.1

6216 ± 0.1

8516 ± 0.1

105°

(R73)

65 60

32.5

66.5

25 ±

0.0

127

.5

65

25 ± 0.0127.5

15 ± 0.1Arm

CKZR-Y040

AdapterCKZR-A040R

D-NF001

Inductive proximitysensor

2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

15

(R111)

105°

20

96 89

55

106

28 ±

0.0

165

.5

105

55 ± 0.0137.5

25 ± 0.1

CKZR-A110RAdapter

Arm

CKZR-Y110N

D-NF002


2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

(R125)

105°

25

110

102

60

106

28 ±

0.0

165

.5

105

55 ± 0.0137.5

25 ± 0.1

AdapterCKZR-A110R

CKZR-Y200N-A

Arm

D-NF002


2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

(R125)

105°

110

102

25 ± 0.1 60

25

105

106

65.5

28 ±

0.0

1

55 ± 0.01 37.5

CKZR-Y200N-AArm

CKZR-A110LAdapter

D-NF002


2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

(R111)

9689

25 ± 0.1 55

20

10510

6

65.5

28 ±

0.0

155 ± 0.01 37.5

Adapter

CKZR-A110L

CKZR-Y110N

Arm

D-NF002


2 x ø14H7+0.018

0( )

105°

2 x ø14H7

105°

6560

15 ± 0.1

32.5

(R73)

65

66.5

27.5

25 ±

0.0

1

25 ± 0.01 27.5

ArmCKZR-Y040

AdapterCKZR-A040L

D-NF001


+0.0180( )

15


Series CLKZ1RSpecific Product PrecautionsBe sure to read this before handling. Refer to pages 222 and 223 for Safety Instructions and “Precautions for Handling Pneumatic Devices” (M-03-E3A) for Actuator Precautions.

When equipment is removed, confirm the safety process. Cut the supply pressure for this equipment and exhaust all residual com-pressed air in the system.Do not release the lock manually by using an external force such as a load and spring force. The cylinder could move suddenly, which could be very dangerous.

How to release the lock on the clamp sideOpen the dustproof cover at the upper part of the port on the clamping side.Insert a hexagon wrench and flip up the manual unlocking lever.

How to release the lock on the unclamp sideMove the dial of the head cover to the FREE position with a flat-head screwdriver.

Note) At the time of shipment from the factory, the locking mecha-nism on the unclamp side is not engaged. When that mech-anism is used, change the dial to the LOCK position.

1) Be sure to supply air pressure to the clamp side port before re-starting the cylinder from the clamping position.Pressurizing to the unclamp side port without applying air pres-sure to the clamp side port will release the lock and cause the cylinder to move suddenly, which could be very dangerous.

Warning WarningPreparation for Operation

1) Do not use a 3-position valve.This valve could unexpectedly supply air pressure, which would release the lock.

2) Mount the speed controller so as to provide meter-out control.Using the speed controller as a meter-in could cause operating failure.

3) Be careful not to allow a reverse flow of exhaust pressure from a common exhaust-type valve manifold.A reverse flow of exhaust pressure could release the lock. Use an independent exhaust-type valve manifold or independent valve.

CautionPneumatic Circuit

How to Release the Lock Manually

Unclampside port

Clampside port

Manual unlocking lever

Dustproof cover

218

Other Clamp CylindersProduct Lineup

Pin Clamp Cylinder (Compact body type): Series CKU

Features: Compact flat-body spring-extended clamp cylinder.Best suited for applications that install multiple cylinders in a confined space for car line switching, etc. Applicable to magnetic field resistant solid state switch.Special order ··· ø32/ø50 (Applicable to cylinders with lock.)

ø32 Equivalent

12

0.7 MPa

Rubber bumper

ø50 Equivalent

15

Bore size


Operating stroke (mm)

Cushion

Pin-Shift Cylinder: Series CKQR

Features: Best suited for basic pin-shift applications.Extended end deflection accuracy: ±0.1 mm or less. (at no load)Non-rotating mechanism/Built-in metal rod scraperAvailable in 4 mounting directions (three sides and bottom).Two bore sizes of rod end can be selected according to the model.(Rod end bore size ··· ø25/ø40)Built-in compact proximity switch for position detection. (Extended end/retracted end)

ø630.7 MPa

25 or 50

Bore size


Stroke (mm)

Plate Clamp Cylinder: Series M(D)UKA

Features: Compact flat-body clamp cylinder.Built-in metal rod scraper.Applicable to magnetic field resistant solid-state switches.Applicable to cylinders with lock as special. (Ø50 only)Applicable to bore sizes 32 and 40 as special.

ø50 Equivalent ø63 Equivalent

0.7 MPa

50, 75, 100, 125, 150

Rubber bumper

Bore size


Stroke (mm)

Cushion

CK

1C

LK

2C

(L)K

Q

MK

2T/M

K2/

MK

CK

Z2N

CK

ZT

CL

KZ

1RC

K

/M(D

)UK

A

Fo

r A

sia

For

Nort

h A

merica

For

Euro

pe

For

Fra

nce

Specia

l

219

Other Clamp Cylinders

Pin-Shift Cylinder: Series CKZP

Features: Non-rotating rod type pin-shift cylinderExtended end deflection accuracy: 0.05 mm or lessRod non-rotating accuracy: ±1.0 degree or lessAvailable in 3 directions for mounting and 2 directions for piping.The piston position can be detected accurately because of a proximity switch.Built-in metal rod scraper prevents adhesion of spatter.

ø400.8 MPa

40

Rubber bumper

ø63 EquivalentBore size


Stroke (mm)

Cushion

Clamp Cylinder: Series CKGV

Features: Clamp cylinder with built-in the toggle mechanismMountable on both sidesTwo arm opening/closing angles at unclamped side can be selected.Arm opening/closing angle at unclamping side can be adjusted by stroke adjustment by an adjusting screw.Applicable to magnetic field resistant solid state switchSelectable for safety mechanism. (Maximum thrust is generated only at clamping to prevent nipping.)

ø32 ø50 ø63 ø801.0 MPa

Head side rubber bumper

Type 90° ··· 45° to 90° Adjustable

Type 135° ··· 105° to135° Adjustable

Bore size


Cushion

Arm opening/closing angle

220

221

Safety InstructionsThese safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or “Danger.” They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International Standards (ISO/IEC), Japan Industrial Standards (JIS)∗1) and other safety regulations∗2).∗ 1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.

ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)ISO 10218-1992: Manipulating industrial robots -Safety.JIS B 8370: General rules for pneumatic equipment.JIS B 8361: General rules for hydraulic equipment. JIS B 9960-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)JIS B 8433-1993: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety. etc.

∗ 2) Labor Safety and Sanitation Law, etc.

1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications. Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results. The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its latest catalog information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the equipment.

2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment.The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced.

3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed.1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or

runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed.

2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products carefully.

3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction.

4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions. 1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight.

2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard specifications described in the product catalog.

3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis.

4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical pro tective function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.

Warning

Caution: Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.

Danger : In extreme conditions, there is a possibility of serious injury or loss of life.

Warning: Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.

222

Safety Instructions

Limited Warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements The product used is subject to the following “Limited Warranty and Disclaimer” and “Compliance Requirements”. Read and accept them before using the product.

The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing industries. If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange specifications or a contract if necessary. If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.

Caution

Limited Warranty and Disclaimer

1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is deliv-ered.∗3)

Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch.

2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product.

3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.∗ 3) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.

A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered. Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad or failure due to the deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.

Compliance RequirementsWhen the product is exported, strictly follow the laws required by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law).

223

224

Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) Double Layer Tubing Application: spot welding

Can be used in a spatter-prone environment such as when found spot welding.

Inner tubing

TRB: Nylon 12TRBU: PolyurethaneOuter layer

TRB: PVC(Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)

TRBU: Polyolefin(Equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)

∗ Not flame-resistant equipment.

FR One-touch Fittings

FR One-touch Fittings Manifold

Brass One-touch Fittings

Self-align Fittings

FR Soft Nylon Tubing

FR Double Layer Tubing

FR Double Layer Polyurethane Tubing

Double Layer Tube Stripper

Multi-tube Holder

P.227

P.232

P.234

P.236

P.248

P.250

P.252

P.254

P.254

KR-W2

KRM

KQB

H, DL, L, LL

Speed Controller with One-touch Fitting

Speed Exhaust Controller

Tamper Proof Speed Controller ∗

P.240

P.242

P.243

P.244

P.246

P.247

AS-W2

AS

ASV

AS

AS

AS

TRS

TRB

TRBU

TKS

TM

Speed Controller: Standard TypeIn-line Type

Speed Controller with One-touch Fitting, Elbow Type (Metal Body)

Speed Controller Adjustable by Flat Head Screwdriver ∗

Tu

bin

gR

elat

edP

rod

uct

sS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

Related Products(Piping Equipment)

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

225

Spatter Proof

226

Applicable tubing O.D.: Metric size Connection thread: R, Rc

Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) FR One-touch Fittings

Series KR-W2

Tubing material

Tubing O.D.

FR double layer, FR soft nylon

ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12

Applicable Tubing

Fluid

Operating pressure range Note 2)

Proof pressure


Thread

Seal on the threads (Standard)

Air, Water Note 1)

–100 kPa to 1 MPa

3 MPa

–5 to 60°C (Water: 0 to 60°C) (No freezing)

JIS B 0203 (Taper thread for piping)

JIS B 0205 (Metric fine thread)

With sealant

Mounting section

Nut section

Note 1) The surge pressure must be under the maximum operating pressure.Note 2) Please avoid using in a vacuum holding application such as a leak tester, since there is leakage.

Specifications

Chuck

Accepts FR soft nylon.Large retaining force.Chuck bites tube and collet increases retaining force.

Can be used for a wide range of pressures from a low vacuum up to a pressure of 1.0 MPaThe use of a special profile ensures sealing and reduces resistance when the tube is inserted.

Light force for removalWhen the fitting is removed from the tube, the chuck and collet are released, thus preventing them from biting into the tube excessively.

Effective when piping in a confined space.The body and the threaded portion can rotate.(for positioning to some extent)

Seal

Stud

Release button (White)

O-ring

Body (White type)

Tube

Prevention of tube releasing unconformity due to inside intrusions or adhesion of the spatter. For cover, refer to page 230.

Cover (Option)

Pipe tape is not necessary.

With thread seal

Collet

Guide

PAT. PEND

Spatter Proof

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

227

Flame Resistant (Equivalentto UL-94 Standard V-0) Series KR-W2FR One-touch Fittings

KRH06-01SW2KRH06-02SW2KRH06-03SW2KRH08-01SW2KRH08-02SW2KRH08-03SW2KRH10-01SW2KRH10-02SW2KRH10-03SW2KRH10-04SW2KRH12-02SW2KRH12-03SW2KRH12-04SW2

6

8

10

12

1 8

1 4

1 8

1 4

1 8

1 4

3 8

3 8

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 2

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Applicable tubingO.D. (mm)

Connectionthread

Model

Use to pipe in the same direction from female thread.Most general style.

Male Connector KRH-W2Use to pipe in 45° angle direction from female thread.Model in-between of male connector and male elbow.

45° Male Elbow KRK-W2

Use to pipe at right angles to female thread.Most general style.

Male Elbow KRL-W2

KRK06-01SW2KRK06-02SW2KRK06-03SW2KRK08-01SW2KRK08-02SW2KRK08-03SW2KRK10-01SW2KRK10-02SW2KRK10-03SW2KRK10-04SW2KRK12-02SW2KRK12-03SW2KRK12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 4

1 8

3 8

3 8

1 4

1 8

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 2

1 4

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Basically, it is used together with male elbow.Different point is that it is used for fittings to avoid from interfering with each other by making the piping two-level.

Extended Male Elbow KRW-W2

KRL06-01SW2KRL06-02SW2KRL06-03SW2KRL08-01SW2KRL08-02SW2KRL08-03SW2KRL10-01SW2KRL10-02SW2KRL10-03SW2KRL10-04SW2KRL12-02SW2KRL12-03SW2KRL12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 8

1 4

3 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

1 2

3 8

3 8

1 2

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

KRW06-01SW2KRW06-02SW2KRW06-03SW2KRW08-01SW2KRW08-02SW2KRW08-03SW2KRW10-02SW2KRW10-03SW2KRW10-04SW2KRW12-02SW2KRW12-03SW2KRW12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 4

1 8

3 8

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 2

1 4

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Universal male elbow allows thread connection by using a socket wrench for confined spaces.

Universal Male Elbow KRV-W2

KRV06-01SW2KRV06-02SW2KRV08-01SW2KRV08-02SW2KRV08-03SW2KRV10-02SW2KRV10-03SW2KRV12-03SW2KRV12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 4

1 8

3 8

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 4

1 2

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

228


Use to branch line from female thread in both 90° directions.

Male Branch Tee KRT-W2

KRT06-01SW2KRT06-02SW2KRT06-03SW2KRT08-01SW2KRT08-02SW2KRT08-03SW2KRT10-01SW2KRT10-02SW2KRT10-03SW2KRT10-04SW2KRT12-02SW2KRT12-03SW2KRT12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 4

1 81 4

1 8

1 4

3 8

3 8

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 2

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Use to branch line in the same direction from female thread.

Branch KRU-W2

Use to branch line in the same direction from female thread and in 90° direction.

Male Run Tee KRY-W2

KRY06-01SW2KRY06-02SW2KRY06-03SW2KRY08-01SW2KRY08-02SW2KRY08-03SW2KRY10-01SW2KRY10-02SW2KRY10-03SW2KRY10-04SW2KRY12-02SW2KRY12-03SW2KRY12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 8

1 4

3 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

1 2

3 8

3 8

1 2

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

KRU06-01SW2KRU06-02SW2KRU06-03SW2KRU08-01SW2KRU08-02SW2KRU08-03SW2KRU10-02SW2KRU10-03SW2KRU10-04SW2KRU12-02SW2KRU12-03SW2KRU12-04SW2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 4

1 8

3 8

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 2

1 4

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Use to connect tubes in the same direction.

Straight Union KRH-W2

KRH06-00W2KRH08-00W2KRH10-00W2KRH12-00W2

Applicable tubing O.D.(mm)

Model

68

1012

Use to connect tubes through a panel.

Bulkhead Union KRE-W2

KRE06-00W2KRE08-00W2KRE10-00W2KRE12-00W2


Model

68

1012

Use to connect tubes at right angles.

Union Elbow KRL-W2

KRL06-00W2KRL08-00W2KRL10-00W2KRL12-00W2


Model

68

1012

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

229


Use to connect tubes in both 90° directions.

Union Tee KRT-W2

KRT06-00W2KRT08-00W2KRT10-00W2KRT12-00W2


Model

681012

Use to plug unused one-touch fittings.

Plug KRP

Use to branch line in the same direction.

Union “Y” KRU-W2

KRU06-00W2KRU08-00W2KRU10-00W2KRU12-00W2


Model

681012

Use to size down one-touch fittings.

Plug-in Reducer KRR-W2

KRR06-08W2KRR06-10W2KRR08-10W2KRR08-12W2KRR10-12W2


Model

6

8

10

Applicablefitting size

810101212

Use to branch line in the same direction from one-touch fittings.

Plug-in “Y” KRU-W2

KRU06-99W2KRU08-99W2KRU10-99W2KRU12-99W2


ModelApplicablefitting size

68

1012

68

1012

KRP-06KRP-08KRP-10KRP-12

Applicable fitting size Model

68

1012

∗ Color: green

Prevention of tube releasing unconformity due to an inside intrusion or adhesion of the spatter.KR (Applicable tubing: FR soft nylon, FR double layer)

Spatter Cover 2 KR

KR-06C1KR-08C1KR-10C1KR-12C1


68

1012

∗ Color: gray

Prevention of tube releasing unconformity due to an inside intrusion or adhesion of the spatter.KR (Applicable tubing: FR soft nylon)

Spatter Cover 1 KR

KR-06CKR-08CKR-10CKR-12C


68

1012

∗ When tube insert parts are in line as KQU Union “Y”, use KR-C1.∗ Color: gray

Made to OrderKR Metal Type (Applicable tubing: FR double layer)

KR-06C2KR-08C2KR-10C2KR-12C2


68

1012

230


Made to Order

Use to connect male thread and tube through a panel.

Bulkhead Female Union KRE-W2

KRE06-01W2KRE06-02W2KRE06-03W2KRE08-01W2KRE08-02W2KRE08-03W2KRE10-02W2KRE10-03W2KRE12-03W2KRE12-04W2

6

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 8

1 4

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

3 8

3 8

1 2

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Use to change the tubing direction from a one-touch fitting by 90°.

Plug-in Elbow KRL-W2

KRL06-99W2KRL08-99W2KRL10-99W2KRL12-99W2



68

1012

68

1012

Use to change the tubing direction from a one-touch fitting by 90°. Applicable to 3 dimensional piping when used with a plug-in elbow.

Extended Plug-in Elbow KRW-W2

(Example) KRH06-02SW2-X2

Copper-free (Electroless Nickel Plated) X2

KRW06-99W2KRW08-99W2KRW10-99W2KRW12-99W2



68

1012

68

1012

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

231

Applicable tubing O.D.: Metric size Connection thread: Rc

Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) FR One-touch Fittings Manifold

Series KRM

Construction

KRM11 KRM12

KRM11

KRM12

Compact piping possible. Manifold piping possible. Many varieties (8 types) are available. One-touch fittings give the most efficient operation.Cover (Option)

Fluid


Proof pressure


Thread

Model

Air, Water Note 1)

1 MPa

3 MPa

–5 to 60°C (Water: 0 to 60°C) (No freezing)

Note) The surge pressure must be under the maximum operating pressure.

Specifications

JIS B 0203(Taper thread for piping)

Hexagon socket headplug: 1 pc.

—

None

KRM12KRM11

Release button

(Green)Stud

Body

O-ringBody

Port B

Port A

Port B Port BSeal

Guide

Release button

(Green)

Port A

Port B

Chuck

Collet

Guide

Seal

Chuck

Collet

Model

Port A sizeNo. ofPort A

Porting

Port A Port BModel

KRM11

KRM12

One-touch fitting

One-touch fitting

One-touch fitting

Rc female thread

6, 10

6, 10

ø6 tube

ø8 tube

ø6 tube

ø8 tube

Port B size

ø10 tube

ø12 tube

Rc

Rc

1 4

3 8

Tubing material

Tubing O.D.


ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12

Applicable Tubing

Accessory

Spatter Proof

232

Flame Resistant (Equivalentto UL-94 Standard V-0) Series KRMFR One-touch Fittings Manifold

A

B

A

N x Applicable tubing O.D.

Spatter Cover 3 KRMCKRM11

KRM12

6

8

6

10

6

10

KRM12-06-02-6KRM12-06-02-10KRM12-08-03-6KRM12-08-03-10

No. ofPort A

Connectionthread

Model

3 8Rc

Applicabletubing O.D.

(mm)A

1 4Rc

6

A

8

10

B

12

6

10

6

10

KRM11-06-10-6KRM11-06-10-10KRM11-08-12-6KRM11-08-12-10

Applicable tubing O.D. (mm) No. ofPort A

Model Applicable tubing O.D.(mm)

Refer to KR-W2 on page 230 for spatter covers 1 and 2.

KRMC (Applicable tubing: FR soft nylon)

6

8

6

10

6

10

KRMC-06-6KRMC-06-10KRMC-08-6KRMC-08-10

N Model

Made to Order

(Example) KRM11-06-10-6-X2


Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

233

Applicable tubing O.D.: Metric size Connection thread: M5, R

Brass One-touch Fittings

Series KQB

q

y r e w q

w

e

r

u

i

o

t

Construction

No.

123456789

DescriptionRelease bushingGuideChuckSealMale connector bodyMale elbow bodyO-ringStopper ringStud

Stainless steel 304C3604

Stainless steel 304Special FKM

C3604C3771

Special FKMStainless steel 316

C3604

Material

Fluoro coated

Fluoro coated

Note

Note 3) Please consult with SMC regarding applicable tube separately.Note 4) Please avoid using in a vacuum holding application such as a leak tester, since there is leakage. Note 5) It is recommended that you use the inner sleeve in the following conditions:

• When using in an environment where the fluid temperature changes drastically.• When using at a high temperature.

Tubing material

Tubing O.D.

FEP, PFA, Nylon, Soft nylon Note 1), Polyurethane Note 2) Note 3), Polyolefin

ø4, ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12

Applicable Tubing

Fluid

Operating pressure range Note 1)

Proof pressure

Ambient and fluid temperature Note 2)

Lubricant

Seal on the threads

Air, Water

–100 kPa to 1 MPa

3 MPa

–5 to 150°C (No freezing)

Grease-free specification

With sealant

Note 1) For soft nylon tubing, water cannot be used.Note 2) The pulling strength of polyurethane tube is as follows. The pulling load of the tube used for verifying

the mounting of the tube within the fitting should be the values as shown or less in the table below. As reference, the thrust force occurring between the tube and the fitting at 0.8 MPa is shown on the table below.

Specifications

Pulling StrengthModel

Without inner sleeveWith inner sleeveø4

ø6

ø8

ø10

ø12

040204250403060408050806106510751008120812091210

18 18 18 19 20.520.523 23

24

24 24

TJ-0402TJ-0425TJ-0403TJ-0604TJ-0805TJ-0806TJ-1065TJ-1075

TJ-1208

TJ-1209TJ-1210

TU0425 50 N160 N

TU0604 80 N180 N

TU0805110 N250 N

TU1065140 N450 N

TU1208140 N500 N

Reference: Thrust Force Occurring at 0.8 MPaModelLoad

TU042510 N

TU060425 N

TU080540 N

TU106565 N

TU120890 N

Temperature ConditionsOperating tube

FEP tubing/TH seriesPFA tubing/TL series

Temperature80°C or more120°C or more

Tube size Tubing model (Material) Applicable

inner sleeve

Length(mm)

ModelTL

(PFA)TH

(FEP)

TUS(Soft poly-urethane)

TU(Poly-

urethane)ModelO.D.

Spatter Proof

234

Flame Resistant (Equivalentto UL-94 Standard V-0) Series KQBBrass One-touch Fittings

Male Connector KQBH

4

6

8

10

12

KQBH04-M5KQBH04-01SKQBH06-M5KQBH06-01SKQBH06-02SKQBH08-01SKQBH08-02SKQBH08-03SKQBH10-02SKQBH10-03SKQBH12-03SKQBH12-04S

Connectionthread Model

1 8

1 81 4

1 43 81 4

1 8

3 81 2

3 8

M5RM5RRRRRRRRR


Hexagon Socket Head Male Connector KQBS

Straight Union KQBHApplicable tubing O.D.

(mm)Model

4681012

KQBH04-00KQBH06-00KQBH08-00KQBH10-00KQBH12-00

Union Elbow KQBLApplicable tubing O.D.

(mm)Model

4681012

KQBL04-00KQBL06-00KQBL08-00KQBL10-00KQBL12-00

Union Tee KQBTApplicable tubing O.D.

(mm)Model

4681012

KQBT04-00KQBT06-00KQBT08-00KQBT10-00KQBT12-00

Union “Y” KQBUApplicable tubing O.D.

(mm)Model

4681012

KQBU04-00KQBU06-00KQBU08-00KQBU10-00KQBU12-00

Bulkhead Union KQBEApplicable tubing O.D.

(mm)Model

4681012

KQBE04-00KQBE06-00KQBE08-00KQBE10-00KQBE12-00

4

6

8

10

12

KQBS04-M5KQBS04-01SKQBS06-M5KQBS06-01SKQBS06-02SKQBS08-01SKQBS08-02SKQBS08-03SKQBS10-02SKQBS10-03SKQBS12-03SKQBS12-04S



1 8

1 81 4

1 43 81 4

1 8

3 81 2

3 8

M5RM5RRRRRRRRR

Male Elbow KQBL

4

6

8

10

12

KQBL04-M5KQBL04-01SKQBL06-M5KQBL06-01SKQBL06-02SKQBL08-01SKQBL08-02SKQBL08-03SKQBL10-02SKQBL10-03SKQBL12-03SKQBL12-04S



1 8

1 81 4

1 43 81 4

1 8

3 81 2

3 8

M5RM5RRRRRRRRR

Male Branch Tee KQBT

4

6

8

10

12

KQBT04-M5KQBT04-01SKQBT06-M5KQBT06-01SKQBT06-02SKQBT08-01SKQBT08-02SKQBT08-03SKQBT10-02SKQBT10-03SKQBT12-03SKQBT12-04S



1 8

1 81 4

1 43 81 4

1 8

3 81 2

3 8

M5RM5RRRRRRRRR

Made to Order

Electroless Nickel Plated X2All brass parts are electroless nickel plated.

(Example) KQBH04-01S-X2

Electroless nickel plated

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

235

Applicable tubing O.D.: Metric size Connection thread: R, Rc

Self-align Fittings

Series H, DL, L, LL

Flared ridge ferrulePrevents accidental loss of ferrule when inserting tubing into the fitting body.

Hardened ridge ferrulePrevents breakage of ferrule when tightening nut.

Flared I.D.Provides low flow resistance inside the fitting.

Wide variety of styles and sizesTen styles and five tube O.D’s provide a wide range of fittings that will fit any application.

Flared I.D. can prevent the tubing from deforming inwards.

Tubing sliding prevented during installation.The tubing support mechanism gives a strong feeling when inserting tubing, and prevents tubing from sliding when screwing in the tubing.

Flared I.D.

Tubing support

Large holding force by metallic style Applicable for use on soft copper steel pipe(Not available for urethane tubing)

Ferrule

Body

Union nut

Tubing

PAT.

Body

Nut

Ferrul

C3604, C3771

C3604

C2700

Principal Parts Material

Applicable tubing material

Applicable tubing O.D.


Proof pressure

Fluid

Thread

Seal on the threads Note)

Nylon tubing, Soft nylon tubing, Soft copper tubing (C1220T-O)

ø4, ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12

1 MPa

10 MPa

Air

JIS B 0203 (Taper thread for piping)

JIS B 0205 (Metric fine thread)

None or with sealant

Mounting section

Nut section

Note) Male elbow, Male branch tee, Male run tee with seal is manufactured upon receipt of order. Suffix “S” to the end of part number if w/ seal is desired.

Applicable Tubing

Spatter Proof

236

Series H, DL, L, LLSelf-align Fittings

Use to pipe in the same direction from female thread.Most general style.

Male Connector H

H04-01H04-02H06-01H06-02H06-03H08-01H08-02H08-03H10-02H10-03H10-04H12-02H12-03H12-04

6

4

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 4

1 8

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Use to pipe at right angles to female thread. Swiveled at any direction.

Swivel Elbow L

Use to pipe at right angles to female thread.Most general style.

Male Elbow DL

DL04-01DL04-02DL06-01DL06-02DL06-03DL08-01DL08-02DL08-03DL10-02DL10-03DL10-04DL12-02DL12-03DL12-04

6

4

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 4

1 8

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Use to pipe at right angles to female thread. Swiveled at any direction. Solid piece moves fittings up from workpiece.

Swivel Extended Elbow LL

L04-01L04-02L06-01L06-02L06-03L08-01L08-02L08-03L10-02L10-03L10-04L12-02L12-03L12-04

6

4

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 4

1 8

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LL04-01LL04-02LL06-01LL06-02LL06-03LL08-01LL08-02LL08-03LL10-02LL10-03LL10-04LL12-02LL12-03LL12-04

6

4

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 4

1 8

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

RT

ub

ing

Sp

eed

Co

ntr

olle

rF

itti

ng

s

237

Series H, DL, L, LLSelf-align Fittings

Use to branch line from female thread in both 90° directions.

Male Branch Tee DT

DT04-01DT04-02DT06-01DT06-02DT06-03DT08-01DT08-02DT08-03DT10-02DT10-03DT10-04DT12-02DT12-03DT12-04

6

4

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 4

1 8

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Use to branch line in the same direction from female thread and in 90° direction.

Male Run Tee DY

DY04-01DY04-02DY06-01DY06-02DY06-03DY08-01DY08-02DY08-03DY10-02DY10-03DY10-04DY12-02DY12-03DY12-04

6

4

8

10

12


Connectionthread

Model

1 4

1 8

1 8

1 8

1 4

1 4

3 8

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

1 2

1 4

3 8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Use to connect tubing through a panel.

Bulkhead Union DE

DE04-00DE06-00DE08-00DE10-00DE12-00


Model

4681012

Use to plug unused self-align fittings.

Plug DP

DP-04DP-06DP-08DP-10DP-12

Applicable fitting (mm) Model

468

1012

Use to connect tubing in both 90° directions.

Union Tee DT

DT04-00DT06-00DT08-00DT10-00DT12-00


Model

468

1012

Use to pipe from male thread such as pressure gauge.

Female Connector DHF

DHF04-02DHF06-02DHF06-03DHF08-02DHF10-02DHF12-02


Connectionthread

Model

4

6

81012

1 4

1 4

3 8

1 4

1 4

1 4

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

Use to connect male thead and tubing through a panel.

Bulkhead Female Connector DEF

DEF06-02DEF08-03DEF10-03DEF12-03


Connectionthread

Model

68

1012

3 8

1 4

3 8

3 8

Rc

Rc

Rc

Rc

238

Self-align Fittings Series H, DL, L, LL

(Example) H06-02-X2


Made to Order

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

239

Elbow Type Applicable tubing O.D.: Metric size Connection thread: R

Speed Controller with One-touch Fitting

Series AS-W2

Specifications

Note) Please note the maximum operating pressure of the tube (refer to pages 248, 250, 252 for details).

Fluid

Proof pressure


Mini. operating pressure


Number of needle rotations

Applicable tubing material Note)

Air

1.5 MPa

1 MPa

0.1 MPa


10 turns


Model

Elbow type

AS221F-01-W2

AS221F-02-W2

AS321F-02-W2

AS321F-03-W2

AS421F-04-W2

Port sizeApplicable tubing O.D. (mm) Applicable cylinder

bore size (mm)

R1/8

R1/4

R1/4

R3/8

R1/2

20, 25, 32

20, 25, 32, 40

40, 50, 63

40, 50, 63

63, 80, 100

6 8 10 12

Note 1) Meter-out and meter-in types can be visually differentiated by the lock nut. The lock nut on the meter-out type is electroless nickel plated, while the meter-in type is black zinc chromate plated.

Note 2) Marking is electroless nickel plated, provided as standard. (N specificaitons)

Elbow Type

22 0 01 06 W2AS 1F

Body size1/8, 1/4 standard3/8 standard1/2 standard

234

Elbow

Control type

With one-touch fitting

Meter-outMeter-in

01

R1/8R1/4R3/8R1/2

01020304

Port size

Metric sizeApplicable tubing O.D.

ø6ø8

ø10ø12

06081012

How to Order

Flame-resistant rubber is used for rubber portions.(Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)

Spatter Proof

240

JIS Symbol

Elbow Type AS


(mm)

Connectionthread

8

10

12

6

R1/8

R1/4

R1/4

R3/8

R1/8

R1/4

R1/4

R3/8

R1/8

R1/4

R1/4

R3/8

R1/2

R1/4

R3/8

R1/2

Model

Meter-out

Elbow Type

Meter-in

AS2201F-01-06W2AS2201F-02-06W2AS3201F-02-06W2AS3201F-03-06W2AS2201F-01-08W2AS2201F-02-08W2AS3201F-02-08W2AS3201F-03-08W2AS2201F-01-10W2AS2201F-02-10W2AS3201F-02-10W2AS3201F-03-10W2AS4201F-04-10W2AS3201F-02-12W2AS3201F-03-12W2AS4201F-04-12W2

AS2211F-01-06W2AS2211F-02-06W2AS3211F-02-06W2AS3211F-03-06W2AS2211F-01-08W2AS2211F-02-08W2AS3211F-02-08W2AS3211F-03-08W2AS2211F-01-10W2AS2211F-02-10W2AS3211F-02-10W2AS3211F-03-10W2AS4211F-04-10W2AS3211F-02-12W2AS3211F-03-12W2AS4211F-04-12W2

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

241

Speed Controller with One-touch Fitting Series AS

In-line Type Applicable

tubing O.D.: Metric size Cylinder side Port size : M3 to 1/2

Speed Controller: Standard Type

Series AS

Body size12345

M3, M5 standard1/8, 1/4 standard3/8 standard1/2 standard1/2 standard

M5AS 1 000

Bore sizeBore size Applicable series

M3M501020304

M3 x 0.5M5 x 0.8

Rc1/8Rc1/4Rc3/8Rc1/2

AS1000AS1000AS2000

AS2000, 3000, 4000, 5000AS3000, 4000, 5000

AS4000, 5000

Thread type

NilMetric thread (M3, M5)

RcNPT

GNF

OptionH Note 1)

L Note 2)

Note 1) AS1000 is not applicable. Note 2) AS1000, AS2000 are not applicable.

High temperature (–5 to 80°C)Low temperature (–30 to 60°C)

Note) AS1000 with nipple: AS1000-M5-N

AccessoryDescription Part no. Applicable model

M-5N AS1000Nipple

Compact size saves space. Speed may be accurately controlled even at low speeds. Constant speed easily set. Retainer prevents an accidental loss of needle.

Note) ( ): Values for AS1000.

Air

1.5 MPa (1.05 MPa)

1 MPa (0.7 MPa)

0.05 MPa (0.1 MPa)


8 turns (10 turns) Note))

Fluid

Proof pressure Note)

Max. operating pressure Note)

Min. operating pressure Note)


Number of needle rotations Note)

Specifications

AS1000-M3

AS1000-M5

AS2000-01

AS2000-02

AS3000-02

AS3000-03

AS4000-02

AS4000-03

AS4000-04

AS5000-02

AS5000-03

AS5000-04

Model Port sizeApplicable cylinder

bore size (mm)Effective area(mm2)

Effective area(mm2)

Flow rate(l/min (ANR))

Flow rate(l/min (ANR))

Weight(g)

M3 x 0.5

M5 x 0.8

1/8

1/4

1/4

3/8

1/4

3/8

1/2

1/4

3/8

1/2

20

90

340

340

810

810

1,670

1,670

1,670

2,840

4,270

4,270

0.3

1.4

5.2

5.2

12.3

12.3

25.5

25.5

25.5

44

66

66

20

80

250

250

810

810

1,670

1,670

1,670

2,840

4,270

4,270

0.3

1.2

3.8

3.8

12.3

12.3

25.5

25.5

25.5

44

66

66

4.7

33

90

115

130

124

221

214

205

242

233

224

2.5, 4, 6

6, 10, 16, 20, 25

Free flow Controlled flow

20, 25, 32, 40

32, 40, 50, 63

40, 50, 6380, 100

40, 50, 6380, 100

Model/Flow Rate and Effective Area

Note) Flow rate values are measured at 0.5 Mpa and 20°C.

JIS Symbol

How to Order

Spatter Proof

242

Elbow Type Applicable

tubing O.D.: Metric size Port size: 1/8 to 1/2Series ASV

JIS Symbol

Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) Speed Exhaust Controller

ASV


345

1/8 standard1/4 standard3/8 standard

Body size

Speed exhaust controller

06081012

ø6ø8

ø10ø12

Applicable tubing O.D.Metric size

01020304

1/81/43/81/2

Port size

X12 Lubricant: vaseline

Made to Order

NilCK

NoneWith spatter coverHexagonal lock nut

Option

∗ Option should be indicated in order of C and K.

3 01 06

Elbow

K1 0 F S

SealSymbol

SSeal

With sealApplicable model

ASV310F/410F/510F

ASV310F-01

ASV310F-02

ASV410F-01

ASV410F-02

ASV410F-03

ASV510F-02

ASV510F-03

ASV510F-04

R1/8

R1/4

R1/8

R1/4

R3/8

R1/4

R3/8

R1/2

4 6 8 10 12 5/32" 1/4" 5/16" 3/8" 1/2"

Applicable tubing O.D. (mm) Effective area (mm2)

IN → OUT OUT → EXH.

7

7

13.5

13.5

13.5

23

27

27

8

8

14

14

14

27

29

29

Model

ModelPort size

SpecificationsSeries

Fluid

Proof pressure





Applicable tubing material Note)

Option

ASV310F/410F ASV510F

12 turns 15 turns

Nylon, Soft nylon, Polyurethane

With spatter cover, Hexagonal lock nut

Air

1.5 MPa

1 MPa

0.1 MPa


Note) Use caution regarding the max. operating pressure when soft nylon or polyurethane tubing is used.

How to Order

Integration of a quick exhaust valve and an exhaust restrictor.Permits high-speed cylinder operation. The effective area is two times larger.

(In comparison with control by speed controller)Applicable model: ASV310F, ASV410F, ASV510F

Silencer and one-touch fittings are installed.

Brass parts are all electroless nickel plated.

Spatter Proof

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

243

Series ASFlame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)

Speed Controller with One-touch FittingElbow Type (Metal Body)

Elbow Type Applicable

tubing O.D.: Metric size Cylinder side Port size : 1/8 to 1/2

Speed controller with one-touchfittings for metal body specifications

Uses flame resistant resin as standard. (UL standard V-0)

JIS Symbol

Fluid

Proof pressure





Applicable tubing material Note 2)

Option

Air

1.5 MPa

1 MPa

0.1 MPa


10 turns (8 turns Note 1))

Nylon, Soft nylon, Polyurethane

Hexagon lock nut, Electroless nickel plated Note 3)

Specifications

Tube size

With seal

ø4ø6ø8

ø10ø12

0406081012

Thread sizeM501020304

Model

Model Port sizeApplicable tubing O.D. Applicable

cylinderbore size (mm)

AS121-M5

AS221-01

AS221-02

AS321-03

AS421-04

M5 x 0.8

R

R

R

R

6, 10, 16, 20

20, 25, 32

20, 25, 32, 40

40, 50, 63

63, 80, 100

18

14

38

12

4 6 8 10 12

Control methodMeter-outMeter-in

0


OptionNoneHexagonal lock nutElectroless nickel plated

NilKN

1

F S10 03 063 2ASSpeed controller

Elbow

M5 standard01, 02 standard03 standard04 standard

1234

Body size

M5 x 0.8 R R R R

18

14

38

12

Note 1) In case of M5 size, S (with seal) is not required.

Note 1) Meter-out and meter-in types can be visually differentiated by the lock nut. The lock nut on the meter-out type is electroless nickel plated, while the meter-in type is black zinc chromate plated.

Note 2) Marking is electroless nickel plated, provided as standard. (N specificaitons)

Meter-out and meter-in types can be visually differentiated by the lock nut.The lock nut on the meter-out type is electroless nickel plated while the meter-in type is black zinc chromate plated. Note 1) M5 sizeNote 2) Use caution regarding the max. operating pressure when soft nylon or polyurethane tubing is used.Note 3) Brass parts are all electroless nickel plated.

How to Order

∗ If more than one option is required, write option part numbers in the order of “K”, “N”.

Spatter Proof

244

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

245

Speed Controller Adjustable by Flat Head Screwdriver

Series AS20-D Elbow Type (Metal Body) Applicable


01 SAS 2 0 0

Body size1234

M5 standard1/8,1/4 standard3/8 standard1/2 standard

2

Elbow

Control type01

D

Type adjustable by flat head screwdriver

Port sizeSymbol Cylinder side In the side of solenoid valve

M501020304

F01F02F03F04

U10/32N01N02N03N04

M5 x 0.8R1/8R1/4R3/8R1/2R1/8R1/4R3/8R1/2

10-32UNFNPT1/8NPT1/4NPT3/8NPT1/2

M5 x 0.8Rc1/8Rc1/4Rc3/8Rc1/2G1/8G1/4G3/8G1/2


Meter-outMeter-in

JIS Symbol

Model/Specifications

1/410-32UNF

AS120-M5 AS120-U10/32 AS420-04AS320-03AS320-02AS220-02AS220-01

Port size

Applicable cylinder bore size (mm)

Fluid

Proof pressure





Controlled flow(Free flow) Effective area (mm2)

1/8 1/4 3/8

32, 40, 50, 63

1/2

80, 10020, 25, 32, 406, 10, 16, 20, 25

Specifications Model

Air

1.5 MPa

1 MPa

0.1 MPa


105

1.6

1700

26

920

14

460

7

230

3.5

M5 x 0.8

Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

10 turns8 turns

How to Order

With sealNote) In case that connecting port is either M5 or 10-32

UNF thread, it is not available with seal. With gasket is provided as standard.

Note 1) Flow rate values are measured at 0.5 MPa and 20°C.Note 2) Meter-out and meter-in types can be visually differentiated by the flow direction symbol on the resin

body. Note 3) Brass parts are all electroless nickel plated, provided as standard.

Spatter Proof

246

Tamper Proof Speed Controller

Series AS20-T Elbow Type (Metal Body) Applicable


JIS Symbol

01 SAS 2 0 0

Body size

2

Elbow

Control type01

T

Port sizeSymbol Cylinder side In the side of solenoid valve

M501020304

F01F02F03F04

U10/32N01N02N03N04

M5 x 0.8R1/8R1/4R3/8R1/2R1/8R1/4R3/8R1/2


M5 x 0.8Rc1/8Rc1/4Rc3/8Rc1/2G1/8G1/4G3/8G1/2


Meter-outMeter-in

Model/Specifications

1/410-32UNFPort size

Applicable cylinder bore size (mm)

Fluid

Proof pressure





Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

Effective area (mm2)

1/8 1/4 3/8

32, 40, 50, 63

1/2

80, 10020, 25, 32, 406, 10, 16, 20, 25

AS120-M5 AS120-U10/32Specifications Model

Air

1.5 MPa

1 MPa

0.1 MPa


10 turns8 turns

105

1.6

1700

26

920

14

460

7

230

3.5

M5 x 0.8

AS220-01 AS420-04AS320-03AS320-02AS220-02

Controlled flow(Free flow)

How to Order

1234

M5 standard1/8,1/4 standard3/8 standard1/2 standard

Tamper proof Note) Speed controller requires a special tool for

flow adjustment. Order separately with part number, AS-T-1.

With sealNote) When connecting port is either M5 or 10-32 UNF

thread, it is not available with seal. With gasket is provided as standard.

Note 1) Flow rate values are measured at 0.5 MPa and 20°C.Note 2) Meter-out and meter-in types can be visually differentiated by the flow direction symbol on the resin

body. Note 3) Brass parts are all electroless nickel plated, provided as standard.

Spatter Proof

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

247

Tubing size: Metric sizeSeries TRSFlame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) FR Soft Nylon Tubing

Bur

st p

ress

ure

(MP

a)

Operating temperature (°C)

Other than TSR0603


ModelModel

Fluid Air, Water

1.2 MPa

Refer to the burst pressure characteristics curve.

32271917

–20 to +60°C, Water: 0 to 60°C (No freezing)

Flame resistant nylon (Equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)

Max. operating pressure (at 20°C)Burst pressure

FR one-touch fitting KR-W2 seriesRecommended fitting

Minimum bending radius (mm)

Operating temperature

Material

TRS060363

TRS080585

TRS1065106.5

TRS1208128

Tubing O.D. (mm)

Tubing I.D. (mm)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

— 20 m roll — 100 m reel

Specifications

Burst Pressure Characteristics Curve and Operating Pressure

How to Order

100TRS1065 BLength per roll

Symbol Color

Tubing model

BWR

BUG

Black WhiteRedBlueGreen

Symbol Length

Color

20100

20 m roll100 m reel

Suitable for air and water piping in environments where sparks from spot welders, etc., may be a problem.Flame resistant tubing

Spatter Proof

248

20 m roll

TubingO.D.

TubingI.D. Color (Color symbol) Model

100 m reel

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

6

8

10

12

3

5

6.5

8

TubingO.D.

TubingI.D. Color (Color symbol) Model

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Green (G)

6

8

10

12

3

5

6.5

8

TRS0603 Color symbol -100








Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

249

Series TRSFlame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)FR Soft Nylon Tubing

Series TRB Tubing size: Metric size

Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) FR Double Layer Tubing

Bur

st p

ress

ure

(MP

a)


Burst pressure TRB0604

Burst pressure (For other than TRB0604)Maximum operatingpressure (TRB0604)

Maximum operating pressure(For other than TRB0604)

100TRB1075 BLength per roll

Symbol Color

Tubing model

BWR

BUYG

Symbol Length

Color

20 20 m roll100 m reel100

BlackWhiteRedBlueYellowGreen

Inner tubing

Outer layer

Sectional view of FR double layer tubing

Burst Pressure Characteristics Curve and Operating Pressure

Related Accessories:Tubing StripperSeries TKSTubing outer layer peeling tool.

Refer to page 254 for more information.

ModelModel

45352815

TRB0604

41

TRB0806

61

TRB1075

7.51

TRB1209

91

6 8 10 12

Min. bending radius (mm)

Inner tubing I.D. (mm)

Inner tubing O.D. (mm)

Outer layer thickness (mm)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Black (B)

Green (G)


SpecificationsFluid

Burst pressure

Recommended fitting

Max. operating pressure (at 20°C)

Air, Water


FR one-touch fitting KR-W2 series

1.0 MPa

–20 to +60°C(Water: 0 to 60°C) (No freezing)

Nylon 12

PVC (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)


MaterialInner tubing

Outer layer

Note) The color of all inner tubing is black.

Suitable for air and water piping in environments where sparks from spot welders, etc., may be a problem.Double layer design using flame resistant resin (equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) for outer layer.

How to Order

Note)

Ext

erna

l lay

er c

olor

Spatter Proof

250

20 m roll

InnertubingO.D.

Innertubing

I.D.

InnertubingO.D.

Innertubing

I.D.Color (Color symbol) Color (Color symbol)Model

100 m reel

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

6

8

10

12

4

6

7.5

9

Model

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

6

8

10

12

4

6

7.5

9

TRB0604 Color symbol -100








Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

251

Series TRBFlame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)FR Double Layer Tubing

Series TRBU Tubing size: Metric size

Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) FR Double Layer Polyurethane Tubing

100TRBU1065 BLength per rollTubing model

Color

Inner tubing

Outer layer

Sectional view of FR double layer polyurethane tubing

Burst Pressure CharacteristicsCurve and Operating Pressure

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

0–20 0 20


Bur

st p

ress

ure

(MP

a)

40 60

Related Accessories:Tubing StripperSeries TKSTubing outer layer peeling tool.

Refer to page 254 for more information.

SpecificationsFluid

Burst pressure

Recommended fitting

Max. operating pressure (at 20°C)

Air, Water


FR one-touch fitting KR-W2 series

0.8 MPa

–20 to +60°C(Water: 0 to 40°C) (No freezing)

Polyurethane

Polyolefin (Equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)


MaterialInner tubing

Outer layer

Note) The color of all inner tubing is black.

ModelModel

35272015

TRBU0604 TRBU0805 TRBU1065 TRBU1208641

851

106.51

1281

Inner tubing O.D. (mm)

Inner tubing I.D. (mm)

Outer layer thickness (mm)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

How to Order

Symbol Length20 20 m roll

100 m reel100

Symbol ColorBWR

BUYG

BlackWhiteRedBlueYellowGreen

Suitable for air and water piping in environments where sparks from spot welders, etc., may be a problem.Double layer design using flame resistant resin (equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0) for outer layer.Inner tubing material: Polyurethane

Burst pressure



Note)

Ext

erna

l lay

er c

olor

Min. bending radius (mm)

Spatter Proof

252

20 m roll

TRBU0604 Color symbol -20




Color (Color symbol) Model

100 m reel

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

6

8

10

12

4

5

6.5

8





Color (Color symbol) Model

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

Black (B)

White (W)

Red (R)

Blue (BU)

Yellow (Y)

Green (G)

6

8

10

12

4

5

6.5

8

InnertubingO.D.

Innertubing

I.D.

InnertubingO.D.

Innertubing

I.D.

253

Tu

bin

gS

pee

d C

on

tro

ller

Fit

tin

gs

Series TRBUFlame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)FR Double Layer Polyurethane Tubing

Tubing Related ProductsRelated Products

Double Layer Tube Stripper Series TKSAllows easy stripping of the outer layer from double layer tubes.

Model

TKS-06TKS-08TKS-10TKS-12

Tip color

Orange

Yellow

Blue

Green

Applicable tubing ∗

TRB0604, TRBU0604

TRB0806, TRBU0805

TRB1075, TRBU1065

TRB1209, TRBU1208

∗ Inner tubing material/TRB: Nylon, TRBU: Polyurethane

Variations

Multi-tube Holder Series TMPossible to separate options depending on number of connection tubesUse of flame resistant resin (Equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)

1. Cut the multi-tube holder depending on number of tubes to be connected.<Cutting method>Cut the groove for separation with side cutters.

2. Install the multi-tube holder to the equipment with cross-recessed head, countersunk tapping screw.

3. Lay the tube across the gripper and push on the tube.

4. For removing the tubes, pull up the tubes from the gripper.

How to Use

Caution

TM-04TM-06TM-08TM-10TM-12

468

1012

Model

6

12

8

No. of connectingtubes (Max.) Accessory

Cross recessed head countersunk tapping screw

Size (Nominal x Length) No. of tubings

4

2 x 6

2.6 x 8

3 x 8


(mm)

Model

254

CAT.E24B

Clamp Cylinder

Cla

mp

Cy

lind

er

Akihabara UDX 15F, 4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPANPhone: 03-5207-8249 Fax: 03-5298-5362URL http://www.smcworld.com© 2008 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.

1st printing LT printing MR 13500DN Printed in Japan.D-DN

This catalog is printed on recycled paper with concern for the global environment.

∗ Addition of series C(L)KQ.∗ Addition of series MK2T/MK2/MK. MR

Record of changes

B edition

Series CKZTSeries CLKZ1R


Series CKZ2NPower Clamp Cylinder


Clamp Cylinder with LockSeries CLK2

Series C(L)KQG/Series C(L)KQP

Pin Clamp Cylinder

Rotary Clamp CylinderSeries MK2T

New

New

Documents

Clamp Cylinder - Airline Hydraulics